Home

HP rp7410 Administrator's Guide

1. Task Summary Configuring Remote NOTES Thi f Partition administration add f f HP Administration s coverage of remote nPartition administration addresses features o Integrity Superdome rx8620 and rx7620 servers e Service Processor MP or GSP Remote security features SO command Set MP security including IPMI password SAcommand Set MP network access including IMPI LAN PARPERM command Set nPartition Configuration Privilege e HP UX B 11 23 and HP UX B 11 31 Features affecting remote administration The opt wbem sbin cimconfig command lists and sets CIM Server configuration properties which determine the types of users and connections permitted To list the current properties cimconfig 1 c command The opt wbem sbin cimserver command starts and stops the CIM Server To stop the CIM Server cimserver s command to start the CIM Server cimserver command The opt wbem bin cimprovider command lists enables disables or removes CIM provider modules such as HP_NParProviderModule To list CIM provider modules cimprovider 1 s command The WBEM Services SSL certificates files client pem server pem determine whether a client is trusted to connect to a server var opt wbem client pem file The Trust Store file on the local system which contains a CERTIFICATE entry from every server to which it is trusted to connect o var opt wbhem server pem file Contains
2. DEFAULT id Display or set SCSI device parameters Using Management Interfaces and Tools 5 Booting and Resetting nPartitions This chapter introduces nPartition system boot and reset concepts configuration options and procedures for booting and resetting nPartitions This chapter covers boot details for HP UX HP OpenVMS 164 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Red Hat Enterprise Linux and the SuSE Linux Enterprise Server operating systems Differences in the nPartition boot process on PA RISC systems and Intel Itanium based systems also are addressed in this chapter AN CAUTION An nPartition on an HP Integrity server cannot boot HP UX virtual partitions when in nPars boot mode Likewise an nPartition on an HP Integrity server cannot boot an operating system outside of a virtual partition when in vPars boot mode For details refer to Boot Modes on HP Integrity nPartitions nPars and vPars Modes page 94 A NOTE For details on boot and reset of nPartitions running vPars software refer to Installing and Managing HP UX Virtual Partitions vPars Overview of nPartition System Booting This section provides an overview of the nPartition system boot process for HP 9000 servers and HP Integrity servers On cell based HP servers system resources are configured into one or more nPartitions Each nPartition includes the cells with processors and memory assigned to it and the I O that
3. Summary e NOTE e BCH Menu issue the BOOT command and reply y for yes to the Do you wish to stop at the ISL prompt question See Booting to the HP UX Initial System Loader ISL page 149 Only supported on PA RISC systems Booting to the HP UX Loader HPUX EFI e NOTE e EFI Shell or EFI Boot Manager start booting HP UX and type any key to interrupt the boot process stopping it at the HP UX Boot Loader prompt HPUX gt See Booting to the HP UX Loader HPUX EFI page 150 Only supported on HP Integrity servers Using HP UX Loader Commands Booting to the Linux Loader ELILO EFI e BCH Menu boot to the Initial System Loader prompt ISL gt and from ISL issue HP UX loader commands in the following form hpux command For example enter hpux 1s to issue the 1s command e EFI Shell or EFI Boot Manager boot to the HP UX Boot Loader prompt HPUX gt and issue HP UX loader commands directly For example enter 1s to issue the 1s command See Using HP UX Loader Commands page 151 e NOTE e EFI Shell or EFI Boot Manager start booting Linux and type any key to interrupt the boot process stopping it at the ELILO Linux Loader prompt ELILO boot See Booting to the Linux Loader ELILO EFI page 152 Only supported on HP Integrity servers Using Linux Loader ELILO Commands e NOTE e EFI Shell or EFI Boot Manager boot to th
4. e NOTE e EFI Boot Manager select an item from the boot options list e EFI Shell access the EFI System Partition for example s0 for a root device and enter vms_ loader to invoke the loader See Booting HP OpenVMS page 122 Only supported on HP Integrity servers Booting and Resetting nPartitions Table 5 1 nPartition Boot and Reset Task Summaries continued Task Shutting Down HP OpenVMS Summary e NOTE Only supported on HP Integrity servers e At the OpenVMS command line issue the SYS SYSTEM SHUTDOWN command and specify the shutdown options in response to the prompts given See Shutting Down HP OpenVMS page 123 Booting Microsoft Windows e NOTE Only supported on HP Integrity servers e EFI Boot Manager select an item from the boot options list Windows does not support being invoked from the EFI Shell See Booting Microsoft Windows page 126 Shutting Down Microsoft Windows e NOTE Only supported on HP Integrity servers e Issue the shutdown command with the desired options such as r to shut down and reboot automatically s to shut down and halt make the nPartition inactive or a to abort a system shutdown You also can select the Start gt Shut Down action and either choose Restart or choose Shut down from the pull down menu e The r and s options to shutdown also are used when performing nPartition reconfigurations see
5. Diagnostics and Event Monitoring Hardware Support Tools Complete information about HP hardware support tools including online and offline diagnostics and event monitoring tools is at the http docs hp com hpux diag Web site This site has manuals tutorials FAQs and other reference material Web Site for HP Technical Support http us support2 external hp com The HP IT resource center Web site at http us support2 external hp com provides comprehensive support information for IT professionals on a wide variety of topics including software hardware and networking Publishing History This is the second edition of the Partition Administrator s Guide This book replaces the nPartition Administrator s Guide 5991 1247B and HP System Partitions Guide 5991 1247 HP Encourages Your Comments HP welcomes your feedback on this publication Address your comments to edit presskit rsn hp comand note that you will not receive an immediate reply All comments are appreciated Related Information 13 14 1 Getting Started with nPartitions This chapter introduces cell based HP server features server models supported operating systems and administration tools and outlines the basic information needed for managing nPartitions Introduction to nPartitions Cell based HP servers enable you to configure a single server complex as one large system or as multiple smaller systems by configuring nPartitions Each nPartition de
6. The following sections explain how to use the Enhanced nPartition Commands and Partition Manager Version 2 0 to remotely manage an nPartition complex using WBEM The system where the tools are used could be an nPartition or other system but where the tools are run is irrelevant when performing remote management of an nPartition complex A NOTE Remote management using WBEM relys on an nPartition in the target complex being z booted to multi user mode The remote nPartition must be configured to accept remote WBEM requests Remote management using WBEM also requires that the Trust Certificate Store file on the local system contains a copy of the server certificate data from the SSL Certificate file on the system being managed See WBEM Remote Management Files page 44 WBEM Remote Management Files WBEM systems provide secure remote management using the following files as part of the SSL authentication process Both files reside on all WBEM enabled systems e server pem WBEM SSL Certificate file The SSL Certificate file resides on the system that is being managed and contains the local server s PRIVATE KEY and CERTIFICATE data On HP UX B 11 23 systems the SSL Certificate file is the var opt wbem server pem file 44 Getting Started with nPartitions On a Windows system the SSL Certificate file is in the location specified by the SPEGASUS HOME cimcerver_ current conf file in this file the sslCertificateFilePath
7. page 236 e Listing nPartition Configurations Partition Manager page 237 nPartition configuration information includes a list of which cells are assigned to which nPartitions and additional details such as the core cell choices boot device paths and nPartition names Procedure 8 26 Listing nPartition Configurations Service Processor From the service processor Command Menu use the CP command to list the nPartition configurations for the server complex The CP command reports information including the nPartition numbers and corresponding cells assignments 1 Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CM to access the Command Menu 2 At the Command Menu enter the CP command to list the nPartition configurations the nPartition numbers and corresponding cells assignments for the server complex 3 To exit the service processor Command Menu enter MA to return to the service processor Main Menu At the Main Menu enter X to exit the service processor interface Procedure 8 27 Listing nPartition Configurations nPartition Commands From the command line issue the parstatus P command to list a summary of all nPartitions in the server complex For detailed information issue the parstatus V p command for more information about a specific nPartition p where is the nPartition number 236 Listing nPartition and Hardware Status 1 Login to a system with the nPartition commands installed If using remot
8. Assign cells to the nPartition that has the largest cell count first Then select cells for the next largest nPartition and so on and finally choose cells for the nPartition with the fewest cells last This provides more appropriate cell assignments for larger nPartitions those with more cells Any smaller nPartitions with fewer cells are more easily accommodated in the remaining available cells Place each nPartition within an empty cabinet if possible This applies to nPartitions in HP Superdome 64 way servers only If possible assign each nPartition cells from a cabinet whose cells have no nPartition assignments Do this before assigning cells from a cabinet that already has cells assigned to an nPartition Recommended nPartition Configurations 65 66 4 Using Management Interfaces and Tools This chapter presents the system management interfaces and tools available on Hewlett Packard s cell based servers Also covered here are the nPartition boot environments management access procedures and detailed command references Management differences on HP 9000 systems and HP Integrity systems are addressed in this chapter For a discussion of the supported cell based server models see Chapter 2 page 49 SMS Support Management Station for HP Superdome Servers The Support Management Station SMS is a workstation or PC that is connected to an HP Superdome server through the service processor private LAN The SMS may either
9. From the EFI Shell environment use the cpuconfig command to configure or deconfigure processors in the local nPartition The EFI Shell is available only on HP Integrity systems 1 Access the EFI Shell environment for the nPartition whose processors you want to configure or deconfigure Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If at another EFI menu select the Exit option from the sub menus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading From the EFI Boot Manager menu select the EFI Shell menu option to access the EFI Shell environment 2 Enter the cpuconfig command with no arguments to list the current processor configurations for all cells assigned to the local nPartition 3 Use the cpuconf ig command to change processor configurations for any of the cells assigned to the local nPartition epuconfig cell cpu off deconfigures the specified processor cpu on the specified cell cell cpuconfig cell cpu on configures the processor on the cell Enter help cpuconfig for more details on configuring and deconfiguring processors from the EFI Shell 4 Reboot the nPartition using the reset command Whenever changing processor configurations you must reboot the corresponding nPartition to allow the configuration changes to take place 5 E
10. From the EFI Shell environment issue the reconfigreset command to shut an nPartition down to a shutdown for reconfig inactive state The EFI Shell is available only on HP Integrity systems 1 Access the EFI Shell environment for the nPartition that you want to shut down to a shutdown for reconfig inactive state Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If at another EFI menu select the Exit option from the sub menus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading From the EFI Boot Manager menu select the EFI Shell menu option to access the EFI Shell environment 2 At the EFI Shell environment issue the the reconfigreset command to reset the local nPartition to a shutdown for reconfig state The reconfigreset command resets all cells in the nPartition performs any nPartition reconfigurations and halts all cells at a boot is blocked state thus making the nPartition and all its cells inactive 3 Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the EFI environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 5 41 Shutting Down to Shutdown for Reconfig HP UX From the HP UX command line issue
11. HP UX Support for Cell Local Memory page 108 e To add an HP UX entry to the nPartition boot options list on an HP Integrity server refer to Adding HP UX to the Boot Options List page 109 e To boot HP UX refer to Booting HP UX page 110 e To shut down HP UX refer to Shutting Down HP UX page 117 HP UX Support for Cell Local Memory On servers based on the HP sx1000 chipset or HP sx2000 chipset each cell has a cell local memory CLM parameter which determines how firmware interleaves memory residing on the cell 108 Booting and Resetting nPartitions A NOTE HP UX 11i Version 1 B 11 11 does not support using CLM Before booting HP UX 11i Version 1 on an nPartition you must ensure that the CLM parameter for each cell in the nPartition is set to zero 0 Although you might be able to boot HP UX 11i Version 1 on an nPartition with CLM configured any memory configured as cell local is unusable and such a configuration is untested and unsupported HP UX 11i Version 2 B 11 23 and HP UX 11i Version 3 B 11 31 support using CLM The optimal CLM settings depend on the applications and workload the OS is running To check CLM configuration details from an OS use Partition Manager or the parstatus command For example the parstatus V c command and parstatus V p command report the CLM amount requested and CLM amount allocated for the specified cell c where is the cell number or the specified
12. The HP Integrity Superdome SD32B server has single core or dual core Intel Itanium 2 processors The model command output for the HP Integrity SD32B server is ia64 hp superdome server SD32B The Superdome 32 way 64 way server can have up to 32 processor sockets 256 DIMMs up to four internal 12 slot PCI I O chassis plus optional I O expansion cabinet hardware HP Superdome 64 128 Way Servers SD64000 SD64A and SD64B The Superdome 64 way 128 way server is a tightly interconnected dual cabinet server that has from 4 to 16 cells each with four processor sockets and up to 32 DIMMs The models of HP Superdome 64 way 128 way servers are SD64000 SD64A and SD64B The HP 9000 Superdome SD64000 server has single core HP PA RISC processors The model string for the SD64000 server is 9000 800 SD64000 The HP 9000 Superdome SD64A server has dual core HP PA RISC processors PA 8800 processors which provide two processor cores per processor socket The model string for the HP 9000 SD64A server is 9000 800 SD64A The HP 9000 Superdome SD64B server has dual core HP PA RISC processors PA 8900 processors which provide two processor cores per processor socket The model string for the HP 9000 SD64B server is 9000 800 SD64B The HP Integrity Superdome SD64A server has Intel Itanium 2 processors either single processor modules or HP mx2 dual processor modules Both HP mx2 dual processor modules and single Itanium 2 processors can exis
13. You can specify each configuration option on a separate command line or can combine all options into a single longer command line For details on the various options for modifying nPartition settings refer to the parmodify 1M manpage Use the parstatus V p command to list all details about your newly created and configured nPartition If any configuration details need to be modified use the parmodify command before you boot the nPartition in the next step parstatus V p1 Partition Partition Number tl Partition Name hostnamed5 Status inactive IP address 7 Prmary Boot Path 4 0 1 0 0 9 ALternate Boot Path 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HA Alternate Boot Path 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PDC Revision 104 1 IODCH Version 23664 CPU Speed 552 MHZ Core Cell s 22 Core Cell Alternate a 0 cab0 cell4 1 cab0 cell6 Cell CPU Memory Use OK GB Core On Hardware Actual Failed OK cell Next Par Location Usage Max Failed Connected To Capable Boot Num cab0 cell4 inactive 4 0 4 2 0 0 0 cab 0 bay0 chassis3 yes yes 1 cab0 cell6 inactive 4 0 4 2 0 0 0 cab 0 bayl chassisl yes yes 1 Boot your newly created nPartition past boot is blocked to make it active and make its system boot environment available The BCH environment is provided on HP 9000 servers the EFI environment is provided on HP Integrity servers Use the BO command at the service processor Command menu to boot the nPartition Once the nPartit
14. e Configuring and Deconfiguring Cells Partition Manager page 216 You can deconfigure make inactive a cell that is assigned to an nPartition by setting its use on next boot value to n do not use This causes the cell to remain assigned to the nPartition but the cell will be inactive the next time its nPartition boots meaning the cell hardware resources will not be used Whenever you configure or deconfigure cells you must reboot the corresponding nPartition for the configuration change to take effect NOTE Configuring and deconfiguring cells may be restricted based on any Instant Capacity contract for the server complex Procedure 7 8 Configuring and Deconfiguring Cells BCH Menu From the BCH Configuration Menu use the CELLCONFIG command to configure and deconfigure cells assigned to the local nPartition The BCH Menu is available only on HP 9000 systems 1 Access the BCH Main Menu for the nPartition whose cells you want to configure or deconfigure Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the BCH Main Menu the Main Menu Enter command or menu gt prompt If ata BCH menu other than the Main Menu then enter MA to return to the BCH Main Menu 2 Enter CO to access the Configuration Menu 3 From the BCH Configuration menu use the CELLCONFIG command to list or set the use on next boot v
15. On HP Superdome servers based on the HP sx1000 chipset you can mix both PA RISC nPartitions and Intel Itanium 2 nPartitions in the same server complex under specific system configurations For details refer to HP Superdome Hybrid Servers Intel Itanium 2 and PA RISC nPartition Mixing page 17 The same basic nPartition features are supported for cell based HP 9000 servers and cell based HP Integrity servers though some differences exist in the sets of supported tools and management capabilities Where such differences exist this document notes them Getting Started with nPartitions Table 1 2 HP Servers Supporting nPartitions HP 9000 Servers HP The first generation cell based HP 9000 servers include the following models 9000 servers have e HP 9000 Superdome servers including the D16000 SD32000 and SD64000 models PA RISC processors These models support up to 16 cells in a server complex e HP 9000 rp8400 model which supports up to four cells in a server complex e HP 9000 rp7405 rp7410 which supports up to two cells in a server complex For details see Server Hardware Details Cell Based HP Servers page 51 The following second generation cell based HP 9000 servers use the HP sx1000 chipset For details see sx1000 Chipset for HP Servers page 49 e HP 9000 Superdome servers including the SD16A SD32A and SD64A models These models support up to 16 cells in a server complex e HP 9000 rp
16. When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If at another EFI menu select the Exit option from the sub menus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading From the EFI Boot Manager menu select the EFI Shell menu option to access the EFI Shell environment 2 From the EFI Shell environment issue the reset command to reset the local nPartition The reset command resets all active cells in the nPartition and reboots them 3 Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the EFI environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 5 30 Rebooting and Resetting nPartitions HP UX From the HP UX command line issue the sbin shutdown or usr sbin reboot command to reset the local nPartition 1 Login to HP UX running on the nPartition that you want to reboot 2 Issue the shutdown r command to reset the nPartition The shutdown r command shuts down HP UX and reboots the nPartition All active cells in the nPartition are reset Procedure 5 31 Rebooting and Resetting nPartitions OpenVMS To reset the local nPartition from the HP OpenVMS command line issue the SYS SYSTEM SHUTDOWN command to shut down OpenVMS then enter Yes at the Should an automatic system reboot be performed prompt 1 Login to HP
17. b where is the cabinet number e frupower d C Cell power status e frupower d I T O chassis power status Procedure 8 34 Listing Power Status and Power Supplies Partition Manager You can list power status and power supply details by using Partition Manager When using Partition Manager Version 1 0 use the Details Show Complex Details action Power Cooling tab to list power details When using Partition Manager Version 2 0 use the Power and Cooling tab to list power details 1 Access Partition Manager For details on accessing Partition Manager or other tools see Tools for Listing Status page 223 List power status and power supply details for the server complex From Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the Details gt Show Complex Details action and the Power Cooling tab to view power status For specific details select the backplane power boards or bulk power supplies entries in the Power Cooling summary list From Partition Manager Version 2 0 select the Power and Cooling tab to view power status details Exit Partition Manager From Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the File Exit action From Partition Manager Version 2 0 select Log off parmgr or exit the Web browser when finished Listing Power Status and Power Supplies 239 Listing Fan and Blower Status You can list fan and blower status by using any one of the following procedures e Listing Fan and Blower Status
18. ccsscssssesssesesesesseseeseseeseeeesesesseetesteneseenens 165 Tools for Configuring Tat Mune yy vicvoivvcstsstvveh vosenieastertayceSescise E EA E EEA EEE E 165 Task Summaries for Creating and Configuring nPartitions ccccceseeceseeseeseeeseeeeeeeeeseeneeeseees 165 Creatine a Genesis Partio nieres iens aean see te tee aa eater aes E eer a cma 170 Creatine a New nPartitions errian vase E ane aeayiier stay geld eon needs so tana ve sonar op ETENE 172 Removing Deleting an nPartitions sisisi ncvensiedee acca te araea RENEE EEEE EEEE EE SESLERE SEREREK ENE 176 Assigning Adding Cells to an nPartition ssesessessssesssesesessssesesseseesessestestssestessenessenseseesesseneseee 179 Unassigning Removing Cells from ann Partiionisiiccceis cesverisssesctadeoveanvs vnsipeisenscdeeduawienasnesvanessuvageaaanys 182 Renaming am nPartitions a a RE anaes ne ESE tn ease Pee Murrey nies 185 RenAMINE d Server Compl X esssxntedtsrecasvesssenedsts ves iaai Eia aeei aE Eea ATTE T washers wedeleta A RESE 187 Setting Cell Attrib teSes riat ra tee yet ula T a A RA S 189 Setting nPartition Core Cell Choices isis iaaieo a eti eaaa aeee aa Ea aa coasted TEESE 194 Unlocking Coriplex Profile Bn tries eshoni enie iiis NE E EE E A AE EES ERE E 198 Canceling Pending Changes to the Complex Profile ssnsnssnsesseseesessessesseretsssststtsessesesssnensesseseees 199 7 Managing Hardware ReSOurces sssssessssssesessseseseseseseceesesececseseseesese
19. command to set boot paths for a specified nPartition p where is the partition number On an HP 9000 server you can use the BCH Main menu PATH command to configure boot paths On an HP Integrity server you can use the EFI Shell bc g command to configure boot paths Also see Configuring Boot Paths and Options page 155 For more details and summaries see Table 6 1 page 166 Basics of nPartition Booting and Resetting This section gives a brief overview of the boot process for cells and nPartitions and lists the main nPartition boot commands and tasks For more details see Chapter 5 page 87 Boot Process for Cells and nPartitions 32 The nPartition boot process on both HP 9000 servers and HP Integrity servers includes two phases the cell boot phase and the nPartition boot phase 1 Cell Boot Phase of the nPartition Boot Process The cell boot phase occurs when cells are powered on or reset The main activities that occur during the cell boot phase are power on self test activities During this phase each cell operates independently of all other cells in the complex Cells do not necessarily proceed through this phase at the same pace because each cell may have a different amount of hardware to test and discover or cells might be reset or powered on at different times The main steps that occur during the cell boot phase are a A cell is powered on or reset and the cell boot is blocked BIB flag is set B
20. e boottest on Enable all boot time system tests Enabling all tests is recommended e boottest off Disable all boot time system tests Disabling all selftests is usually not recommended ordinarily all tests are enabled 162 Booting and Resetting nPartitions e boottest testname on Enable the specified test festname For example boottest io_hw on enables I O hardware selftests e boottest testname off Disable the specified test festname For example boottest io_hw off disables I O hardware selftests Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the EFI environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 5 65 Configuring Boot Time System Tests HP UX B 11 11 From the HP UX B 11 11 command line use the setboot command to configure the self test configuration for an nPartition 1 2 Login to HP UX running on the nPartition whose boot time tests you want to configure Enter the setboot v command to list the current self test configuration for the local nPartition The self test details listed by setboot v include TEST The keyword names of self tests that you can enable or disable CURRENT The test setting in stable storage for the nPartition on means the test is normally executed on each boot of f means the test is normally omitt
21. s ci i sccccesssveccsssseiacete stdectistessetemesoenvcessesescesineeess 71 Extensible Firmware Interface System Boot Environment is isons dsradeivvsseesvensvsanevesetecnsuaysoudeebanoes sowinasent 72 Windows Special Administration Console SAC ssesssssssssessessesessestssesssseesssseseessssesnensenensesseseees 72 Accessing and Using the Service Processo vx citsiete tay ecuns ace osie cuss weed SEAE REAA REEE 74 Using Service Processor MENUS frrr arinin e t EEE EE widen saa Ae eal ea Rs 76 Navigating through Service Processor Menus wicca wate eave aie 76 Network Configuration for a Service ProcessOr swat stischastinns indo iw pate ctiniielasta aes 77 Viewing Console ORS sila sect orrein eth etanarDihaees Set ee Cia ahete ot banc tun ete neo tence Doe E ERSA 77 Viewing Chassis Godes or Event Logs eesicrctnee ndien nieee n a E cote ae a ives 78 Virtual Front Panel VFP nPartition Views sseseeseseeeesssesssssitsserressesttsseseeessrtetsseresseeressssreesssreeesse 79 Command Reference for Service Processor Command Ss ssssssssseserrseseressssretssesressesressesesesseeesseee 80 Command Reference for EFI Shell Commands seseseessesssssssssssrrssesressssressssrertssettesseseessesresssseeeesseee 81 Command Reference for BCH Menu Commands cysciannt cssgnseseaunsnass espbantevessend tessasvensasouban svnvteunesseetynes 84 4 Table of Contents 5 Booting and Resetting APP TITIONS ss gnsescasecasssayscstasstcncesndep
22. using various tools including the service processor MP or GSP Boot Console Handler BCH available only on PA RISC servers Extensible Firmware Interface EFI available only on HP Integrity servers nPartition commands or Partition Manager opt parmgr bin parmgr See Tools for Listing Status page 223 for details Tools for Listing Status 223 Table 8 1 Hardware and nPartition Status Task Summaries Task Listing Cell Configurations Listing Processor Configurations Summary Service Processor MP or GSP CP command for cell nPartition assignments PS command and select a cell for detailed information about any cell in the complex nPartition Commands parstatus C command Partition Manager Version 1 0 Details Show Complex Details action Cells tab Version 2 0 Select the Cells tab See Listing Cell Configurations page 226 Service Processor MP or GSP PS command and select the cell whose processor configuration you wish to view BCH Menu Information menu PR command EFI Shell info cpu command nPartition Commands parstatus C for processor summaries for all cells parstatus V c for detailed processor information for the specified cell c where is the cell number Processor information about the local nPartition ioscan C processor HP UX only or mpsched s HP UX B 11 23 and HP UX B 11 31 Partition Manager Version 1 0 Deta
23. 60 nPartition Server Hardware Overview 3 Planning nPartitions This chapter describes how you can plan nPartition configurations Details include the nPartition configuration requirements and recommendations For procedures to create and configure nPartitions see Chapter 6 page 165 nPartition Hardware Requirements for Operating Systems Table 3 1 lists the hardware requirements for operating systems running on nPartitions Table 3 1 Operating System Hardware Requirements Operating System HP UX B 11 11 nPartition Hardware Requirements Supports up to 64 PA RISC processor cores HP UX B 11 23 March 2004 and earlier Supports up to 64 Intel Itanium 2 processor cores HP UX B 11 23 September 2004 and later Supports up to 128 PA RISC processors Supports up to 128 Intel Itanium 2 processor cores HP UX B 11 31 Supports up to 128 Intel Itanium 2 processor cores HP OpenVMS 164 8 2 1 Supports up to 4 cells 16 processor cores on servers based on the HP sx1000 chipset Requires single core Itanium 2 processors and does not support HP mx2 dual processor modules HP OpenVMS 164 8 3 Supports up to 4 cells 16 processors up to 32 cores on servers based on the HP sx1000 chipset or HP sx2000 chipset On servers based on the HP sx2000 chipset supported only in nPartitions that have dual core Intel Itanium 2 processors Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Supports u
24. EFI Boot Manager Boot Option Maintenance Set Auto Boot TimeOut operation EFI Shell autoboot command For example autoboot off to disable autoboot or autoboot 60 to enable autoboot with a 60 second timeout period HP UX setboot b onorsetboot b off command to turn on enable or turn off disable autoboot See Configuring Autoboot Options page 158 Configuring Boot Time System Tests NOTE HP recommends that all self tests be performed BCH Menu Configuration menu FASTBOOT command enter FASTBOOT to list settings enter FASTBOOT RUN to enable all tests enter FASTBOOT TEST RUN or FASTBOOT TEST SKIP to enable or disable an individual test EFI Shell boot test command to list settings boottest on to enable all tests boottest off to disable all tests To configure a specific test use the boottest test onorboottest test off command HP UX B 11 11 setboot t testname value to configure the test for all following boots or setboot T testname value to configure the test for the next boot only setboot v to list settings HP UX B 11 23 and B 11 31 setboot t testname value to configure the test for the next boot only setboot v to list settings See Configuring Boot Time System Tests page 161 Troubleshooting Boot Problems On HP cell based servers you might encounter different boot issues than on other HP servers The following boot issues are possible on cell based servers e Prob
25. Service Processor page 240 e Listing Fan and Blower Status nPartition Commands page 240 e Listing Fan and Blower Status Partition Manager page 240 Fan and blower status includes lists of cabinet blowers and I O fans and their status whether ok or failed Procedure 8 35 Listing Fan and Blower Status Service Processor From the service processor Command Menu use the PS command and the cabinet option to list fan and blower status for the specified cabinet 1 Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CM to access the Command Menu 2 At the Command Menu enter the PS command and select the cabinet option for the cabinet whose fan and blower status you want to view e On HP Superdome servers select the B cabinet option and specify the cabinet whose information you want to view e Onall other systems select the T cabinet option 3 To exit the service processor Command Menu enter MA to return to the service processor Main Menu At the Main Menu enter X to exit the service processor interface Procedure 8 36 Listing Fan and Blower Status nPartition Commands From the command line issue the parstatus Bcommand fora fan and blower status summary for all cabinets or parstatus V b for detailed fan and blower status for the specified cabinet b where is the cabinet number 1 Login to a system with the nPartition commands installed If using remote administration features to li
26. Setting Cell Attributes 189 3 From the BCH Configuration menu use the CELLCONFIG command to list or set the use on next boot value for each cell e To list the use on next boot values for all cells in the nPartition issue the CELLCONFIG command with no arguments e To change the use on next boot value for a cell issue the following command CELLCONFIG cell ON OFF where cell is the cell number ON sets the cell use on next boot value to y yes do use the cell or OFF sets the cell use on next boot value to n no do not use the cell A cell that boots with a y ON use on next boot value is permitted to rendezvous and join its nPartition thus becoming an active cell whose resources are used A cell that boots with a n OFF use on next boot value does not rendezvous and thus becomes an inactive cell whose resources are not used by its nPartition although the cell still is assigned to its nPartition 4 Reboot the nPartition to use the cells new use on next boot settings If you have changed any cell use on next boot settings for the nPartition then reboot the nPartition in either of two ways e Use the REBOOT command at the BCH interface to perform a reboot If you have only changed cell configurations from ON to OFF then perform a reboot using the REBOOT command Any cells set to not be used will still be assigned to the nPartition but will not be used will not rendezvous in the nPartition e Use the RECO
27. Windows shutdown r Linux shutdown r time OpenVMS SYSSSYSTEM SHUTDOWN with an automatic system reboot If you have changed any use on next boot values from n do not use on next boot to y use the cell on next boot then you must perform a reboot for reconfig to allow the currently inactive cells to reboot and rendezvous when the nPartition reboots Procedure 6 19 Setting Cell Attributes Partition Manager You can set cell attributes by using Partition Manager When using Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the nPartition to which the cell belongs select the Partition Modify Partition action Change Cell Attributes tab select the cell s and click Modify Cell s When using Partition Manager Version 2 0 select the nPartition to which the cell belongs select the nPartition Modify nPartition action and then configure attributes using the Set Cell Options tab and the Configure Memory tab 1 Access Partition Manager For details on accessing Partition Manager or other tools see Tools for Configuring nPartitions page 165 Select the nPartition whose cell attribute values you want to modify Initiate the nPartition modify action If using Partition Manager Version 1 0 the Partition Modify Partition action If using Partition Manager Version 2 0 select the nPartition Modify nPartition action Access the Partition Manager section s for configuring cell attributes From Partition Manager Version 1 0
28. or is all for all tests The setboot command s t option changes the test setting in stable storage and affects all following boots The T option changes the test setting for the next boot only A NOTE HP recommends that all self tests be performed for all nPartitions To enable all tests for an nPartition use the following command setboot t all on For example to enable the early CPU tests and PDH tests but disable the late CPU tests issue the following command setboot t early cpu on t PDH on t late cpu off This changes the settings for these tests in stable storage for the nPartition and uses these test configurations for all following boots After modifying the self test configuration for an nPartition you can list the new settings with the setboot v command For more details refer to the setboot 1M manpage Procedure 5 66 Configuring Boot Time System Tests HP UX B 11 23 and HP UX 11 31 From the HP UX B 11 23 or HP UX 11 31 command line use the setboot command to configure the self test configuration for an nPartition 1 Login to HP UX running on the nPartition whose boot time tests you want to configure 2 Enter the setboot v command to list the current self test configuration for the local nPartition The self test details listed by setboot v include TEST The keyword names of self tests that you can enable or disable CURRENT The setting for the test in stable storage for the nPartitio
29. or the Live Events feature Up to 32 users can simultaneously login to the service processor through its network customer LAN interface and they can independently manage nPartitions or view the server complex hardware states Two additional service processor login sessions can be supported by the local and remote serial ports These allow for serial port terminal access through the local RS 232 port and external modem access through the remote RS 232 port In general the service processor MP or GSP on cell based servers is similar to the service processor on other HP servers while providing enhanced features necessary for managing a multiple nPartitions For example the service processor manages the complex profile which defines nPartition configurations as well as complex wide settings for the server The service processor also controls power reset and TOC capabilities displays and records system events or chassis codes and can display detailed information about the various internal subsystems Service Processor MP or GSP Features 68 The following list describes the primary features available through the service processor on cell based HP servers e Command Menu The Command menu provides commands for system service status and access configuration tasks To enter the Command menu enter CM at the service processor Main menu To exit the service processor Command menu enter MA or type b Control b to return
30. root or IPMI LAN access is required See frupower Command page 264 cplxmodify Only distributed with the Enhanced nPartition Commands Modify server complex attributes Supports changing the name of a complex root or IPMI LAN access is required See cplxmodify Command page 266 20 Getting Started with nPartitions Availability of nPartition Commands The Original nPartition Commands were distributed as part of HP UX 11i v1 B 11 11 releases prior to the December 2004 release The Enhanced nPartition Commands are distributed with current HP UX releases including the HP UX 11i v3 B 11 31 release all releases of HP UX 11i v2 B 11 23 and releases of HP UX 11i v1 B 11 11 beginning with the December 2004 release The Enhanced nPartition Commands also are distributed as bundles on the HP Smart Setup CD for Windows and as bundles on the HP Integrity Essentials Foundation Pack for Linux You can download the nPartition Commands for Windows and Linux from the http www hp com Web site See Downloading Enhanced nPartition Commands for Windows and Downloading the HP Integrity Essentials Foundation Pack for Linux Enhanced nPartitions Commands for Windows The Enhanced nPartition Commands for Windows are available in both 32 bit and 64 bit versions e The Windows 32 bit Enhanced nPartition Commands are designed for any 32 bit system running Windows XP Windows 2000 with Service Pack 3 or Wi
31. shutdown r t 60 c Shut down in one minute This command initiates a Windows system shutdown and reboot after a timeout period of 60 seconds The c option specifies a message that is broadcast to any other users of the system Booting and Shutting Down Linux This section has procedures for booting and shutting down Linux on cell based HP Integrity servers and a procedure for adding Linux to the boot options list To check whether the cell local memory CLM configuration is appropriate for Red Hat Enterprise Linux or SuSE Linux Enterprise Server refer to Linux Support for Cell Local Memory page 129 To add a Linux entry to the nPartition boot options list refer to Adding Linux to the Boot Options List page 130 To boot Red Hat Enterprise Linux refer to Booting Red Hat Enterprise Linux page 131 To boot SuSE Linux Enterprise Server refer to Booting SuSE Linux Enterprise Server page 132 To shut down Linux refer to Shutting Down Linux page 134 Linux Support for Cell Local Memory On servers based on the HP sx1000 chipset or HP sx2000 chipset each cell has a cell local memory CLM parameter which determines how firmware interleaves memory residing on the cell Booting and Shutting Down Linux 129 23 NOTE Red Hat Enterprise Linux does not support using CLM Before booting Red Hat Enterprise Linux on an nPartition you must ensure that the CLM parameter for each cell in the nPartitio
32. the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the BCH Main Menu the Main Menu Enter command or menu gt prompt If ata BCH menu other than the Main Menu then enter MA to return to the BCH Main Menu At the BCH Configuration menu use the FASTBOOT command to list or configure the nPartition fast boot settings Enter FASTBOOT with no arguments to display the current fast boot settings This lists which self tests are set to be performed or skipped Configuring Boot Time System Tests 161 E NOTE HP recommends that all self tests be performed for all nPartitions To enable all tests for an nPartition use the FASTBOOT RUN command at the BCH Configuration menu To disable an individual test enter FASTBOOT test SKIP where test is the name of the self test PDH EARLY or LATE To enable an individual test enter FASTBOOT test RUN For details on setting self tests enter HELP FASTBOOT at the Configuration menu 3 Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the BCH environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 5 64 Configuring Boot Time System Tests EFI Shell From the EFI Shell environment use the boot test command to manage the self test configuration for the local nPartition The EFI Shell is available only on HP Integr
33. under normal operation you first shut down the operating system e BCH Menu RECONFIGRESET command e EFI Shell reconfigreset command e HP UX sbin shutdown R H command e OpenVMS SYS SYSTEM SHUTDOWN command and enter No at the Should an automatic system reboot be performed prompt then at the service processor MP or GSP Command menu enter the RR command and specify the nPartition e Windows shutdown s command or the Start Shut Down action and Shut down pull down menu option Only supported for cell based HP servers e Linux sbin shutdown h time command You must include the time argument to specify when the shutdown is to occur See Shutting Down to a Shutdown for Reconfig Inactive State page 141 e NOTE e Service Processor MP or GSP BO command e HP UX specify the B option when using the usr sbin parmodify command to reconfigure an inactive nPartition Only supported for cell based HP servers See Booting an Inactive nPartition page 146 e BCH Menu BOOT LAN command e EFI Boot Manager select Boot Option Maintenance Boot from a File and select the Load File option for the LAN card that has the desired MAC address e EFI Shell Lanboot select command See Booting over a Network page 147 Booting and Resetting nPartitions Table 5 1 nPartition Boot and Reset Task Summaries continued Task Booting to the HP UX Initial System Loader CISL
34. 0064 46 Partition Manager Support for Remote Management Using IPMI over LAN eeceeeees 47 Licensing Information Getting Server Product Detail s s sip sisiccsvscceisecentacveyenes depteubateny nev scovandscteysieecs 47 nPartition and Virtual Partition Unique Ld ent hers go cscceasessesede stag veneciererncesnveskeeoneeiceaanyeedeeeeaiecedel 47 2 Partition Server Hardware Overview c scscscscssseseseesesescseseescssseseseeseseseseseteesesess 49 5x1000 Chipsettor HP Servers svcknsit cies ithe aca a hanna allemaal trata 49 sx2000 Chipset for HP Servet Senta iina a aa enaa a S aaea a ib ne ach a she eines footed 49 Model Identifiers for Machine Hardware sseseeeeeesssesesesreeessssssrseeeessssesretreeresssssesereeeesessesreeeeesessse 49 Server Hardware Details Cell Based HP Servers ccc seuss cenctuayersdegas ectune es vehnee sa iend ou sexvcnoss vebeaatvneenne sa ceesds 51 Two Cell nPartition Server Model ccccccsessssececececeeeesennececeeeeecessesenaececeeeeesneseaaececeeeeneeeseneaeeees 55 Four Cell nPartition Server Models a E E E Taaa 56 Superdome Server Models srren erini oen iae ine EEEa AEAEE EEEE SEEE ERNA EEE EE rest ak EEEE Ea Esae 57 HP Superdome 16 32 Way Servers SD16000 SD16A and SD16B sssssessessesssesersesssersssees 58 HP Superdome 32 64 Way Servers SD32000 SD32A and SD32B sssssessessesssersersessserssesees 58 HP Superdome 64 128 Way Servers SD64000 SD64A and SD64B sssss
35. 1 Login to a system with the nPartition commands installed If using remote administration features you can login to any system with Enhanced nPartition Commands installed 2 Issue the parstatus X command to display the product number and serial number Procedure 8 25 Listing Product and Serial Numbers Partition Manager You can list the product number and serial number for a complex by using Partition Manager When using Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the Complex Show Complex Details action and General tab When using Partition Manager Version 2 0 select the General tab 1 Access Partition Manager For details on accessing Partition Manager or other tools see Tools for Listing Status page 223 2 From Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the Complex gt Show Complex Details action and General tab to list the product number and serial number for the server complex From Partition Manager Version 2 0 select the General tab to list the product number and serial number 3 Exit Partition Manager From Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the File Exit action From Partition Manager Version 2 0 select Log off parmgr or exit the Web browser when finished Listing nPartition Configurations You can list nPartition configurations by using any one of the following procedures e Listing nPartition Configurations Service Processor page 236 e Listing nPartition Configurations nPartition Commands
36. 1 0 12 0 HA Alternate bootpath 0 0 0 1 0 Alternate bootpath 0 0 0 1 1 Autoboot is ON enabled Hyperthreading ON H OFF next boot g The HP UX setboot command indicates that Hyper Threading currently is enabled ON for the nPartition The next time the nPartition is booted after it is reset Hyper Threading will be disabled OFF for the nPartition Enabling Hyper Threading for an nPartition To enable Hyper Threading use any of the following methods and then reset the nPartition whose Hyper Threading status you have changed e From the EFI Shell cpuconfig threads on e From HP UX setboot m on e Using the Enhanced nPartition Commands parmodify pn T y where nis the nPartition number e Using Partition Manager Perform the Modify nPartition task and select the Enable Hyper Threading check box on the Configure Memory tab You must reset an nPartition after changing its Hyper Threading status Enabling and Disabling Hyper Threading on Dual Core Intel Itanium 2 Processors 219 Example 7 3 Enabling Hyper Threading for an nPartition Shell gt cpuconfig threads J cpuconfig Threads are turned off Shell gt Shell gt cpuconfig threads on g cpuconfig Threads will be on after a reset Shells The EFI Shell cpuconfig threads command indicates that Hyper Threading currently is disabled turned off for the nPartition This EFI Shell command configures Hyper Threading to be enable after the nPartition is
37. 37 Complex Profile Entry Locking and Unlocking cy caitucsncns i ibeiisiueen contac taedreaueeanantowtay otuet ee outed 38 Complex Profile Group Details seansni enina treenaa Tearen aA E EE E EE ERa ent 39 Remote and Local Management of nParnHons ccc sa navn arti eileen nel veins 41 Intelligent Platform Management Interface IPM cccceeseeseseeeseeceesceeeeeseeecseecnssenseesseeeeseees 41 IPMI Block Transter CLPIVIL BT Jerie erana E E E E a e ERA 42 nPartition Configuration Privilege esesssesesssessessessserssisresseississsereessissresrenseeseeseesseeseesees 42 TEME OV ers AIN a E E AE T ECAI E AEE TA EAA A E E EAA 42 Web Based Enterprise Management WBEM 02 sctcs2is i2itciateipetd baigeiaetataisenaviguan 43 Table of Contents 3 TOCA IVT a CIE I Eig sotss a teatichn ends ai bo oieee can coo seus sine lena noua ou E TOE EEE E E 43 Remote Management Using WBEM serseri raaton nera ea aE ETE EE ea R 44 WBEM Remote Management Piles ss vuas cenausssrascaarsensunesuatedetienitegss niaatetinegivesnnedudata utachrecnens 44 nPartition Commands Support for Remote Management Using WBEM cccssesesseereees 45 Partition Manager Support for Remote Management Using WBEM ccccssceeeseeeseeneees 45 Remote Management Using IPMI over LAIN isczcccicxzsiad toteapsneh ts onetanpnagin tune onsbsetcdersnies ets nnteaies ye cteeaden 46 nPartition Commands Support for Remote Management Using IPMI over LAN
38. Boot Manager From the EFI Boot Manager environment use the Boot Option Maintenance Set Auto Boot TimeOut menu operation to configure an nPartitions autoboot setting The EFI Boot Manager is available only on HP Integrity systems 1 Access the EFI Boot Manager menu for the nPartition whose autoboot options you want to configure Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If at another EFI menu select the Exit option from the sub menus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading Select the Boot Option Maintenance option from the main EFI Boot Manager menu Configuring Autoboot Options 159 3 Select the Set Auto Boot TimeOut menu operation from the Boot Option Maintenance menu 4 Atthe Set Auto Boot TimeOut menu either disable autoboot by selecting the Delete Disable Timeout menu item or enable autoboot by setting the autoboot timeout through the Set Timeout Value menu item When autoboot is enabled on an HP Integrity server the local nPartition boot options are attempted to be loaded automatically at boot time starting with the first item in the boot options list See the Help menu for details EFI Boot Maintenance Manager ver 1 10 14 60 Set Auto Boot Timeout Select an Option Set Timeout Value Delete Disable Timeout Help
39. Exit 5 Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the EFI environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 5 61 Configuring Autoboot Options EFI Shell From the EFI Shell environment configure the autoboot setting for the local nPartition by using the autoboot command The EFI Shell is available only on HP Integrity systems 1 Access the EFI Shell environment for the nPartition whose autoboot options you want to configure Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If at another EFI menu select the Exit option from the sub menus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading From the EFI Boot Manager menu select the EFI Shell menu option to access the EFI Shell environment 2 At the EFI Shell environment use the autoboot command to enable or disable autoboot for the nPartition When autoboot is enabled for an nPartition in an HP Integrity server items in the boot options list are attempted to be loaded automatically at boot time starting with the first item in the boot options list Enter the autoboot command with no arguments to list the current autoboot configuration for
40. From Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the Details Show Complex Details action then select the Cells tab From Partition Manager Version 2 0 select the Cells tab to list these details 3 Exit Partition Manager From Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the File Exit action From Partition Manager Version 2 0 select Log off parmgr or exit the Web browser when finished Listing Processor Configurations You can list processor configurations by using any one of the following procedures e Listing Processor Configurations Service Processor page 227 e Listing Processor Configurations BCH Menu page 227 e Listing Processor Configurations EFI Shell page 228 e Listing Processor Configurations nPartition Commands page 228 e Listing Processor Configurations Partition Manager page 229 Processor CPU configuration details include the CPU population CPU type and the clock speed Procedure 8 4 Listing Processor Configurations Service Processor From the service processor Command Menu use the PS command to list details about the cell whose processor configuration you want to view 1 Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CM to access the Command Menu 2 At the Command Menu enter the PS command select the C option and specify the cell whose processor configuration you want to view 3 To exit the service processor Command Menu enter MA to return to the service
41. How and when these paths are used is covered in the explanations of the local and remote management scenarios that follow IPMI Block Transfer IPMI BT A The IPMI Block Transfer IPMI BT path uses a driver dev ipmi for HP UX 11i v2 B 11 23 and HP UX 11i v3 B 11 31 and a hardware buffer on each cell to provide communication between the operating system and the service processor Thus each nPartition running HP UX 11i v2 or HP UX 11i v3 in an sx1000 based or sx2000 based server has its own private path to the service processor the block transfer hardware on the core cell in each nPartition is used The service processor always reliably knows which nPartition a request comes from NOTE The IPMI BT path currently is supported only for nPartitions running the Enhanced nPartition Commands To use the IPMI BT interface you must locally or remotely access the operating system running in the target complex For details see Remote Management Using WBEM page 44 In many respects from an administrator s perspective the IPMI BT interface behaves like the proprietary interface used in the first generation cell based servers For example a user with superuser capabilities on an nPartition can manage the entire complex including making changes to both the local nPartition and other nPartitions in the complex nPartition Configuration Privilege Because it is not always desirable to allow a user on one nPartition to make changes that
42. Local MeMOTry cc cccccescsseeseeseeseesecesessseeeeeseeeseesesnaeenes 124 Adding Microsoft Windows to the Boot Options Lists ecesac a tnetacti slate atten wate 125 Booting Microsoft Window si tecese2s5 ncucoctsessestsnnas ti iaaiiai de a i a eea ES i E n S woven 126 Shutting Down Microsoft WindoOWS s sssssssssessseissrsseseessessreseesseesresresseessisreeserssrenesseenseeneneense 128 Booting and Shutting Down Pix vc toxaseudn ta necntes case seta enchant oped eia e a e a E Tae 129 Linux Support for Cell Local Memory siessen aa e i aaki 129 Adding Linux to the Boot Options List cierto orsensrsi inin a a i 130 Booting Red Hat Enterprise LINUX s ri cee vere isi saccveahentecdesso ts veiw EE NEEE RTEKA Petena SNEEN EESE E taati 131 Booting SuSE Linux Enterprise Serven tisser ini TE T EIE RE 132 Sh tuns Down LINUX vies ders cae eesis cian veetets pce reall eee AREE AREE ERES ES EEA ects AR EEEE Saera eat 134 Rebooting and Resetting nPartitions sssesssssessessesetstsststestestsresssstesessestesessestestsnessensesnenensesenene 135 Performing a Reboot Lor Recon tie icc ices Ae sited vcetcaa Gs baad cae ENEE sea an Ce ieee ea aa eae 139 Shutting Down to a Shutdown for Reconfig Inactive State ncccvcicie coicestive eeciscwiide nuances 141 Booting an Inactive Mart Onis ci canst asters ieena iea Ean EEA VAE Ea EEEE pos E nese sone EAEE E EE Ei 146 Booting oyver a NetWofk erasini san er Geile E eE AE EEE EE EA E EE e 147
43. Main menu you can select from these viewers e Activity Log Viewer Allows you to browse recorded event logs of alert level 0 or 1 e Error Log Viewer Allows you to browse recorded event logs of alert level 2 or higher e Live Chassis Logs Viewer Displays event logs in real time as they are emitted By default the live event log viewer has the Alert filter enabled which causes it to display only the events of alert level 3 or higher To view all event logs in real time type U for the Unfiltered option You also can filter the live codes by cell C or nPartition P Cell filter only display event logs emitted by a specific cell in the server complex Partition filter only display event logs emitted by hardware assigned to a specific nPartition When viewing event log logs type V to change the display format The viewers can show event logs in text format T keyword format K or raw hex format R Virtual Front Panel VFP nPartition Views The Virtual Front Panel VFP provides ways to monitor the boot or run status of each cell in an nPartition and of the nPartition itself The VFP provides the sort of information typically displayed on the LCD of a non partitionable server The VFP presents a real time display of activity on the selected nPartition s and it automatically updates when cell and nPartition status change To access the VFP feature enter VFP from the service processor Main menu To exit the VFP type b Cont
44. Menu Enter command or menu gt PATH Primary Boot Path 0 0 2 0 0 13 0 0 2 0 0 d hex HA Alternate Boot Path 0 0 2 0 0 14 0 0 2 0 0 e hex Alternate Boot Path 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 hex Main Menu Enter command or menu gt Boot the device using the BOOT command from the BCH interface You can issue the BOOT command in any of the following ways e BOOT Issuing the BOOT command with no arguments boots the device at the primary PRI boot path e BOOT bootvariable This command boots the device indicated by the specified boot path where bootvariable is the PRI HAA or ALT boot path For example BOOT PRI boots the primary boot path e BOOT LAN INSTALL or BOOT LAN ip address INSTALL The BOOT INSTALL commands boot HP UX from the default HP UX install server or from the server specified by ip address BOOT path This command boots the device at the specified path You can specify the path in HP UX hardware path notation for example 0 0 2 0 0 13 or in path label format for example PO or P1 If you specify the path in path label format then path refers to a device path reported by the last SEARCH command After you issue the BOOT command the BCH interface prompts you to specify whether you want to stop at the ISL prompt To boot the stand vmunix HP UX kernel from the device without stopping at the ISL prompt enter n to automatically proceed past ISL and execute the contents of the AUTO file on the chosen de
45. On HP 9000 systems all cells in an nPartition must have the same processor revision level and clock speed That is the IODC_HVERSION must be identical for all PA RISC processors You can view processor details including the CPU type revision level and speed by using the parstatus V c command or by using Partition Manager select the Cell Show Cell Details action CPUs Memory tab e On HP Integrity servers all cells in an nPartition must have the same compatibility value The cell compatibility value is reported by the parstatus V c command as CPU Compatibility for the cell Partition Manager Version 2 0 reports the value as Cell Compatibility in the General Cell Properties view for the cell which you can display by clicking the cell location when viewing other details about the server complex Planning nPartitions On HP Integrity servers all cells assigned to an nPartition must have either mx2 dual processor modules or single Itanium 2 processors Both HP mx2 dual processor modules and single Itanium 2 processors can exist in the same complex but they cannot be mixed in the same nPartition The same firmware revision must be present on all cells within an nPartition At least one cell in every nPartition must be connected to an I O chassis that has core I O Only one core I O is active per nPartition If an nPartition has multiple cells that are connected to I O chassis with core I O only the core I O connected t
46. OpenVMS to the Boot Options List A On HP Integrity servers you can use the following procedures to manage boot options list entries for HP OpenVMS You can add the efi vms vms_loader efi loader to the boot options list from the EFI Shell or EFI Boot Configuration menu or in some versions of EFI the Boot Option Maintenance menu NOTE OpenVMS 164 installation and upgrade procedures assist you in setting up and validating a boot option for your system disk HP recommends that you allow the procedure to do this To configure booting on Fibre Channel devices you must use the OpenVMS 164 Boot Manager utility BOOT_OPTIONS COM For more information on this utility and other restrictions refer to the HP OpenVMS for Integrity Servers Upgrade and Installation Manual Procedure 5 15 Adding an HP OpenVMS Boot Option This procedure adds an HP OpenVMS item to the boot options list from the EFI Shell To add an HP OpenVMS boot option when logged in to OpenVMS use the SYSSMANAGER BOOT _OPTIONS COM command 1 Access the EFI Shell environment Log in to the management processor and enter CO to access the system console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If at another EFI menu select the Exit option from the sub menus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading From the EFI Boot Manager menu select the EFI Shell menu option to access the EFI She
47. Operating System Version V8 2 1 Copyright 1976 2005 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P SPKAO Copyright c 1998 LSI Logic PKW V3 2 20 ROM 4 19 PKAO SCSI Chip is SYM53C1010 66 Operating mode is LVD Ultra3 SCSI SSMP I CPUTRN CPU 01 has joined the active set SSMP I CPUTRN CPU 02 has joined the active set Exit the console and management processor interfaces when finished using them To exit the EFI environment type B Control B this exits the system console and returns to the management processor Main Menu To exit the management processor type X at the Main Menu Shutting Down HP OpenVMS This section describes how to shut down the HP OpenVMS OS on cell based HP Integrity servers Procedure 5 18 Shutting Down HP OpenVMS From the HP OpenVMS command line issue the S S SYSTEM SHUTDOWN command to shut down the OpenVMS OS 1 Log in to HP OpenVMS running on the system that you want to shut down You should log in to the MP for the server and use the Console menu to access the system console Accessing the console through the MP enables you to maintain console access to the system after HP OpenVMS has shut down Booting and Shutting Down HP OpenVMS 164 123 2 Atthe OpenVMS command line issue the SYS SYSTEM SHUTDOWN command and specify the shutdown options in response to the prompts given gt SYSSSYSTEM SHUTDOWN SHUTDOWN Perform an Orderly System Shutdown on node RSNVMS How many minutes until fin
48. Option page 109 Adding an HP OpenVMS Boot Option page 120 Adding a Microsoft Windows Boot Option page 125 Adding a Linux Boot Option page 130 A CAUTION The nPartition ACPI configuration must be set to the proper value for the operating system when configuring boot options on HP Integrity servers This must be done for the device paths to be properly established in the boot options list Use the acpiconfig command to check and set this value For details refer to ACPI Configuration Value HP Integrity Server OS Boot page 92 Procedure 5 55 Configuring Boot Paths and Options BCH Menu Use the PATH command from the BCH Main Menu to configure boot paths for an nPartition The BCH Menu is available only on HP 9000 systems 1 Access the BCH Main Menu for the nPartition whose boot paths and options you want to configure Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the BCH Main Menu the Main Menu Enter command or menu gt prompt If ata BCH menu other than the Main Menu then enter MA to return to the BCH Main Menu At the BCH Main menu set the boot path values using the PATH command To list the current boot path settings enter PATH with no arguments Configuring Boot Paths and Options 155 To set a boot path enter PATH VAR hwpath where VAR is the boot path varia
49. Partition Manager Version 2 0 select Set Cell Options tab and use the Core Cell Choice column to set priorities After changing attribute values for all the cells you plan to modify click the OK button Review all information presented in the Notes and Warnings the Summary of Changes and the HA Checks tabs Either cancel or proceed with changing the core cell choices Click the Cancel button to cancel the changes To proceed with the core cell changes click the Finish button or click the OK button Exit Partition Manager From Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the File Exit action From Partition Manager Version 2 0 select Log off parmgr or exit the Web browser when finished Setting nPartition Core Cell Choices 197 Unlocking Complex Profile Entries You can manually unlock a Complex Profile entry by using either of the following procedures e Complex Profile Unlocking Service Processor page 198 e Complex Profile Unlocking nPartition Commands page 198 The Complex Profile is a set of data that determines how hardware is assigned to and used by nPartitions in an server complex Each Complex Profile entry has its own lock which is used to restrict access to the entry In certain situations you might need to manually unlock a Complex Profile entry for example when an nPartition configuration tool such as Partition Manager has prematurely exited before it sends revised Complex Profile entries and correspo
50. Processor page 207 e Powering Cells and I O Chassis On and Off nPartition Commands page 208 e Powering Cells and I O Chassis On and Off Partition Manager page 208 You can control power for cells and T O chassis from remote locations without physically accessing the system hardware E NOTE On HP nPartition systems powering on a cell also powers on any I O chassis attached to the cell and powering off a cell also powers off any I O chassis attached to the cell Powering on or off an I O chassis connected to a powered on cell causes the cell to reset if the cell located and mapped the I O chassis during its cell boot process The frupower command and Partition Manager permit you to power on or off inactive cells and I O chassis that are assigned to the current nPartition or are not assigned to any nPartition The PE command at the service processor Command menu permits you to power on or off any hardware in the complex including active cells and I O chassis The PE command does not check the current usage of components 206 Managing Hardware Resources Procedure 7 3 Powering Cells and 1 O Chassis On and Off Service Processor Use the Command menu PE command to power on and power off cells I O chassis and cabinets from the service processor interface GSP or MP CAUTION When using the PE command at the service processor Command menu to power on or off hardware be certain to specify the correct com
51. Profile entries however in nearly all situations you instead should allow the administration tools to automatically acquire and release locks CAUTION You should generally avoid manually unlocking Complex Profile entries because doing so can can result in the loss of configuration changes The locks for Complex Profile entries are managed as described here e For the Stable Complex Configuration Data entry there are slight differences in the locking mechanisms on HP 9000 and HP Integrity servers On cell based HP 9000 servers the Stable Complex Configuration Data has a single lock On cell based HP Integrity servers the Stable Complex Configuration Data has two separate locks a read lock for restricting read access to the current Stable Complex Configuration Data entry and a write lock for restricting access to a modifiable copy of the Stable Complex Configuration Data e On both HP 9000 and HP Integrity cell based servers there is one lock for each Partition Configuration Data entry each nPartition has its own Partition Configuration Data entry The parunlock command and the service processor RL command enable you to manually unlock Complex Profile entries It can be necessary to manually unlock a Complex Profile entry in the situation where an nPartition configuration tool such as Partition Manager has prematurely exited If such a tool exits before it sends revised Complex Profile entries and corresponding lock k
52. States i cccccccccccccccccesscccceesesccceseesscesesssceusessseeuessseeusessseuussess 27 Overview of Managing TPATEtONS ij ncsnetssesesssadevncderissherievasedincunedy ts ves teusttenbersnupaydstatadets bunselnetetent eee 27 Basics of Listing nPartition and Comiplex Sta tus ioiss sscecsnpestevvievess ewsadnveiatecescaveawsdeuavend anna eteclevers 27 Basics of nPartion Creation oe a a N oe teeudes svecwates sogcdds Muwesh a E a 29 GENESIS P ALELELOMM PAE eee ces aces saeees ceeds oe hbe E gee RL ae aE aS 30 Basics of nPartition Modification ccccccccccccsecscccceseescceseecccesesceceseesscesessseeueesseuueessseeusssssuuunsess 30 nPartition Modification Taeke ae e e a AAA Ea AAE AAAA AAAA AE EASELS ERa AECA rAr ELAINE ELER 31 Basics of nPartition Booting and Resetting eseesessesssersesseesserssisrssseissrsnrsreesseenrenrenseeseesresseesresees 32 Boot Process for Cells and nPartitions c ccccccccccccsescccsecssccssceesccsseescesseescessceusecsseuseesseuunsess 32 Common nPartition Boot Commands and TaskS ccccccccccceccccceesccsccesesccceuesessceusessseeusessseuuesess 33 Complex PTA Scans in asese ek rnea EEEREN aket v ss Dan dave aus La na Pe et Ga sates gba Pal ea ek neat sade 36 Changing the Server Complex Prorile iss istcrcscevalcete est ds adonse tovebardenrsaiaente vitae epeenseuewesaveasemaeneuwieren 37 How the Complex Profile is Updated je cnisstoctsciiae abesdcacetcewneensanstpeae eevee wanstveteneeanenterslgelutantess
53. add cells to the Genesis Partition if you want it to have more than one cell Creating a New nPartition You can create a new nPartition by using any one of the following procedures e Creating a New nPartition nPartition Commands page 173 e Creating a New nPartition Partition Manager page 175 Creating a new nPartition involves specifying one or more cells in a server complex setting various attributes for the cells and optionally specifying other nPartition settings The settings you specify then are used to create anew nPartition which has assigned to it the cells you selected At least one cell in each nPartition must be connected to an I O chassis that has core I O attached To boot an operating system from disk the nPartition also must have a boot device and associated PCI card When creating an nPartition follow the HP nPartition requirements and guidelines HP recommends only specific sets of nPartition configurations 172 Creating and Configuring nPartitions A Procedure 6 2 Creating a New nPartition nPartition Commands From the command line use the parcreate command to create a new nPartition You also can use the parstatus and parmodify commands to list nPartition and complex details and modify nPartition settings NOTE You can remotely perform this task using remote administration options supported by the Enhanced nPartition Commands or Partition Manager Version 2 0 Remote administration is
54. and Partition Manager list the complex name Each server complex name has up to 20 characters which can include upper and lowercase letters numbers and dashes underscores periods and spaces _ and The server complex name is stored as part of the Complex Profile for the server part of its Stable Complex Configuration Data Procedure 6 13 Renaming a Server Complex Service Processor From the service processor Command Menu use the ID command to list and modify the server complex name Renaming a Server Complex 187 1 Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CM to access the Command Menu At the Command Menu issue the ID command to list the complex name The ID command lists some of the Stable Complex Configuration Data for the current server including the complex name GSP CM gt ID This command allows you to change certain fields in the Stable complex configuration portion of the complex profile Retrieving the stable complex configuration portion of the complex profile GSP modifiable stable complex configuration data fields Model String 9000 800 SD64000 Complex System Name feshd5 Complex Serial Number USR2024FP1 Original Product Number A5201A Current Product Number A5201A Enterprise Id Do you want to modify any of this information Y N 3 Specify whether you want to modify the complex profile including its name Only modify the Complex System Name Do not change
55. and Partition Manager to remotely manage an nPartition complex using IPMI over LAN The system where the tools are used could be an nPartition or other system but where the tools are run is irrelevant when performing remote management of an nPartition complex nPartition Commands Support for Remote Management Using IPMI over LAN Two options of the Enhanced nPartition Commands result in remote management using IPMI over LAN These options are e g password The password is the service processor s IPMI password e h hostname IPaddress The h option specifies the hostname or IP address of the service processor in the target complex When you use the g h set of options the specified command sends the appropriate WBEM requests to the local nPartition Provider which in turn uses IPMI over LAN to communicate with the service processor in the target complex 46 Getting Started with nPartitions Partition Manager Support for Remote Management Using IPMI over LAN Partition Manager Version 2 0 can be used in this mode in either of two ways e Run Partition Manager on an nPartition and then select the Switch Complexes task from the Tools menu In the resulting dialog enter the hostname or IP address of the service processor in the target complex and supply that service processor s IPMI password e Run Partition Manager on a system that is not an nPartition In this situation Partition Manager immediately displays the Switch Com
56. are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If at another EFI menu select the Exit option from the sub menus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading From the EFI Boot Manager menu select the EFI Shell menu option to access the EFI Shell environment 2 Access the EFI System Partition sX where X is the file system number for the device from which you want to boot HP UX For example enter fs2 to access the EFI System Partition for the bootable file system number 2 The EFI Shell prompt changes to reflect the file system currently accessed The full path for the HP UX loader is EFI HPUX HPUX EFI and it should be on the device you are accessing Booting and Shutting Down HP UX 109 3 At the EFI Shell environment use the bc g command to manage the boot options list The bcfg command includes the following options for managing the boot options list e bcfg boot dump Display all items in the boot options list for the system e bcfg boot rm Remove the item number specified by from the boot options list e bcfg boot mv a b Move the item number specified by a to the position specified by b in the boot options list e bcfg boot add file efi Description Add anew boot option to the position in the boot options list specified by The new boot option references file efi and is listed with the title specified by Description For example bcfg boot add 1 EFI HPUX HPUX
57. be an HP UX workstation or an HP ProLiant system running Microsoft Windows 2000 with Service Pack 3 or later The SMS primarily is used by HP certified service and support personnel for system scan upgrade and hardware verification purposes The Windows SMS is an HP ProLiant system running the Windows operating system that has an enhanced system support toolset including Partition Manager and the HP nPartition commands such as parcreate and parstatus among others Use of the nPartition commands from a Windows SMS requires specifying the remote management command line options either the u h setof options or the g h options For details see Specifying Remote Management Options to Commands page 247 You can use the Windows versions of the nPartition commands to remotely manage servers based on the HP sx1000 chipset or HP sx2000 chipset Remote management using IPMI over LAN is supported for all servers based on the HP sx1000 chipset or HP sx2000 chipset Remote nPartition management using WBEM is supported for nPartitions running an operating system with the HP nPartition Provider Details on the Windows SMS release of nPartition commands are given in Commands for Configuring nPartitions page 19 For more details about the SMS for Superdome servers refer to the Service Guide for your model of Superdome server Overview of nPartition Service Processor MP or GSP Interfaces The service processor MP or
58. being the cell numbers Setting nPartition Core Cell Choices 195 3 Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the EFI environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 6 22 Setting Core Cell Choices nPartition Commands From the command line use the parmodify command to configure the core cell choices for an nPartition You also can use the parstatus V p command to list the core cell choices for an nPartition p where is the nPartition number EA NOTE You can remotely perform this task using remote administration options supported by the Enhanced nPartition Commands or Partition Manager Version 2 0 Remote administration is supported by the Partition Manager Tools Switch Complexes action and by the nPartition command u h optionsor g h options For details see Tools for Configuring nPartitions page 165 1 Login to a system with the nPartition commands installed If using remote administration features to set core cell choices you can login to any system with Enhanced nPartition Commands installed 2 Issue the parstatus V p command to list the current core cell choices and core cell use for an nPartition The parstatus V p command list detailed status for the specified nPartition p where is the nPartition number The
59. boot past BIB rendezvous and boot to the system boot environment BCH or EFI and if configured automatically boot an operating system For annPartition whose cells have been powered off use the PE command to power on the nPartition hardware TOC Transfer of Control Reset When you initiate a transfer of control reset the service processor immediately performs a TOC reset of the specified nPartition which resets the nPartition and allows a crash dump to be saved If crash dump is configured for an OS on an nPartition then when you TOC the nPartition while it is running the OS the nPartition performs a crash dump and lets you select the type of dump To perform a TOC reset use the TC command from the service processor Command menu HP nPartition systems do not have TOC buttons on the server cabinet hardware From the Windows SAC you can initiate a crash dump by issuing the crashdump command at the SAC gt prompt From HP OpenVMS 164 you can cause OpenVMS to dump system memory and then halt at the POO gt gt prompt by issuing the RUN SYSSSYSTEM OPCRASH command To reset the nPartition following OPCRASH access the nPartition console and press any key to reboot System Boot Configuration Options This section briefly discusses the system boot options you can configure on cell based servers You can configure boot options that are specific to each nPartition in the server complex HP 9000 Boot Configuration Options On cell
60. cell based HP Integrity servers based on the HP sx1000 chipset OpenVMS 164 8 3 is supported on HP Integrity servers based on the HP sx1000 and sx2000 chipsets OpenVMS 164 does not support cell local memory Also see nPartition Hardware Requirements for Operating Systems page 61 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2003 is supported on HP Integrity servers including the cell based HP Integrity servers Windows Server 2003 supports cell local memory Also see nPartition Hardware Requirements for Operating Systems page 61 Red Hat Enterprise Linux 3 Update 2 Red Hat Enterprise Linux 3 Update 3 Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 Red Hat Enterprise Linux 3 and Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 are supported on HP Integrity servers including the cell based HP Integrity servers Red Hat Enterprise Linux does not support cell local memory Also see nPartition Hardware Requirements for Operating Systems page 61 SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 and SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 are supported on HP Integrity servers including the cell based HP Integrity servers SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 and SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 support cell local memory Also see nPartition Hardware Requirements for Operating Systems page 61 HP supports nPartition capabilities on cell based servers listed in Table 1 2
61. cell based server 170 Creating and Configuring nPartitions As a result of this procedure all existing nPartition configurations are deleted and are replaced with a single one cell nPartition the Genesis Partition You can revert to the previous nPartition configuration if any existed before you created the Genesis Partition by using the CC command and L option to restore the last configuration 1 Save all current nPartition configuration details if any nPartitions are configured in the complex Saving the current nPartition information provides you the details you would need to re create all nPartitions as they currently exist Use the parstatus V p command or an equivalent Partition Manager procedure to save configuration details about each nPartition For each nPartition enter the parstatus V p command to display detailed information about the partition number p specified 2 Determine which cell will be configured as the Genesis Partition The cell must be connected to an I O chassis The I O chassis must have a core I O card installed and it should have a bootable disk or a method for installing an operating system and a disk onto which it can be installed 3 Ensure that all nPartitions within the complex are in the shutdown for reconfig inactive state If an nPartition is running HP UX you can shut down the nPartition to the shutdown for reconfig state by using the shutdown R H command If an nPa
62. cell belongs select the nPartition Modify nPartition action Set Cell Options tab and configure the use on next boot value See Configuring and Deconfiguring Cells page 213 Configuring and Deconfiguring Processors e NOTE Configuring and deconfiguring processors may be restricted based on any Instant Capacity contract for the server complex After a processor configuration is changed the nPartition in which the processor resides must be rebooted to use the new configuration e BCH Menu Configuration Menu CPUCONFIG command CPUCONFIG cell cpu OFF deconfigures the specified processor cpu on the specified cell cell CPUCONFIG cell cpu ON configures the processor on the cell e EFI Shell cpuconfig command cpuconfig cell cpu off deconfigures the specified processor cpu on the specified cell cell cpuconfig cell cpu on configures the processor on the cell See Configuring and Deconfiguring Processors page 217 Task Summaries for Hardware Resource Management 203 Table 7 1 Hardware Management Task Summaries continued Task Summary Enabli Disabli H sete eee mE je CAUTION Some operating systems do not support Hyper Threading Problems can Bee ore Intel occur when running an OS that does not support Hyper Threading on an nPartition Itanium 2 Processors that has Hyper Threading enabled e NOTE You must reset an nPartition when changing its Hyper Threading st
63. cell numbers e nPartition Commands parmodify p r r command to specify up to four core cell choices r where is the cell number in priority order for the specified nPartition p where is the nPartition number e Partition Manager Version 1 0 Select the nPartition to configure select the Partition Modify Partition action Core Cell Choices tab Version 2 0 Select the nPartition to configure select the nPartition Modify nPartition action Set Cell Options tab and use the Core Cell Choice column to set priorities See Setting nPartition Core Cell Choices page 194 168 Creating and Configuring nPartitions Table 6 1 nPartition Configuration Task Summaries continued Task Setting nPartition Boot Paths Summary e NOTE On HP Integrity servers nPartition boot paths can be listed and configured only from the local nPartition See Chapter 5 page 87 for detailed nPartition boot configuration tasks and related information e BCH Menu BCH Main menu PATH command e EFI Boot Manager Boot Option Maintenance menu e EFI Shell bc g command e HP UX setboot command or parmodify p b s t command Setting the Date and Time e NOTE The Service Processor MP or GSP date and time is stored and managed separately from nPartition times and each nPartition has independently stored and managed date and time settings Changes to the date and time for an n
64. changes to the inactive nPartition are completed immediately and the nPartition then boots and becomes active e When you specify B to modify an active nPartition you must perform a reboot for reconfig for the changes to be completed After the reboot for reconfig occurs the nPartition boots and becomes active because the parmodify command B option was specified Refer to the parmodify 1M manpage for details on all options 4 As needed perform a reboot for reconfig on the modified nPartition HP UX shutdown R Windows shutdown r Linux shutdown r time OpenVMS SYSS SSYSTEM SHUTDOWN with an automatic system reboot See Reboot for Reconfig Guidelines for Adding Cells page 180 for details on when to perform a reboot for reconfig Procedure 6 7 Adding Cells to an nPartition Partition Manager You can add cells to an nPartition by using Partition Manager Assigning Adding Cells to annPartition 181 When using Partition Manager Version 1 0 select an nPartition and use the Partition Modify Partition action Add Remove Cells tab When using Partition Manager Version 2 0 select an nPartition and use the nPartition Modify nPartition action Add Remove Cells tab 1 Access Partition Manager For details on accessing Partition Manager or other tools see Tools for Configuring nPartitions page 165 2 Select the nPartition to which you want to add cells 3 Specify for Partition Manager to add one or more ce
65. default is 0 no cell local memory Percentage cell local memory CLM The percent number can be any number in the range 0 100 with a suffix of This number is rounded to 12 5 25 37 5 50 62 5 75 87 5 or 100 If the cell contains less than 4 GBytes of memory then the percentage is rounded to 25 50 75 or 100 Percentages are rounded up or down to the nearest value but are not rounded up to 100 Absolute CLM specification The default The absolute number is interpreted as an absolute number of gigabytes of memory and can optionally have a suffix of GB As needed an absolute CLM specification is rounded up to the nearest 0 5 GBytes If the clm value is rounded the command reports the final value used Specifies the primary boot path For HP 9000 servers this is the PRI boot path For HP Integrity servers only boot options for the local nPartition can be modified therefore boot paths for a newly created nPartition cannot be set using parcreate Instead use the EFI system boot interface available through the nPartition console Specifies the alternate boot path For HP 9000 servers this is the ALT boot path For HP Integrity servers only boot options for the local nPartition can be modified therefore boot paths for a newly created nPartition cannot be set using parcreate Instead use the EFI system boot interface available through the nPartition console Specifies the se
66. details about the COC command Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the BCH environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 6 21 Setting Core Cell Choices EFI Shell From the EFI Shell environment use the rootcel1 command to set core cell choices for the local nPartition The EFI Shell is available only on HP Integrity systems 1 Access the EFI Shell environment for the nPartition whose core cell choices you want to configure Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If at another EFI menu select the Exit option from the sub menus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading From the EFI Boot Manager menu select the EFI Shell menu option to access the EFI Shell environment At the EFI Shell interface enter the rootcell command to list or set the core cell choices for the local nPartition Enter the rootcell command with no arguments to display the current core cell choice list Enter the rootcell clear command to clear the list of preferred core cells Enter rootcell c0 cl tospecify up to four choices with c0 being the highest priority choice and c0 c3
67. e PCI Card Slots Managing the attention indicator for a PCI card slot is supported from HP UX only Use the rad command HP UX B 11 11 only or olrad command HP UX B 11 23 and HP UX B 11 31 to turn on off or blink the attention indicator for a PCI card slot Specify the PCI slot using cabinet bay chassis slot 4 notation Turn Off PCI Card Slot Attention Indicator The HP UX B 11 11 rad off slot command turns off the attention indicator for the specified PCI card slot slot The HP UX B 11 23 and HP UX B 11 31 olrad I OFF slot command turns off the attention indicator for the specified PCI card slot slot Blink PCI Card Slot Attention Indicator The HP UX B 11 11 rad attention slot command blinks the attention indicator for the specified PCI card slot slot The HP UX B 11 23 and HP UX B 11 31 olrad f ATTN slot command blinks the attention indicator for the specified PCI card slot slot Turn On PCI Card Slot Attention Indicator The HP UX B 11 11 rad f on slot command turns on the attention indicator for the specified PCI card slot slot The HP UX B 11 23 and HP UX B 11 31 olrad command does not support turning on a PCI card slot s attention indicator to a steady on state Turning Attention Indicators LEDs On and Off 211 For details refer to the fruled 1 rad 1M or olrad 1M manpage The following HP UX B 11 11 example turns off and blinks various attention indicators on an HP Superdome system
68. example shows the virtual partition unique ID returned by the get conf command as well as the local nPartition number and the current virtual partition name parstatus w The local partition number is 0 vparstatus w The current virtual partition is Shad getconf CS PARTITION IDENT Z3e0ec8e078cd3c7b PO VO0O0 For details on virtual partitions refer to the book Installing and Managing HP UX Virtual Partitions vPars Getting Started with nPartitions 2 nPartition Server Hardware Overview This chapter describes the cell based HP server models including system capacities model strings and differences among the cell based server models Both HP 9000 servers and HP Integrity servers are discussed here e The HP 9000 series of servers has HP PA RISC processors The cell based HP 9000 servers include three generations of servers the first generation models models based on the HP sx1000 chipset and models based on the HP sx2000 chipset e The HP Integrity series of servers has Intel Itanium 2 processors The cell based HP Integrity servers either are based on the HP sx1000 chipset or are based on the HP sx2000 chipset sx 1000 Chipset for HP Servers The second generation of cell based servers is built around the HP sx1000 chipset The sx1000 chipset supports both single core and dual core processors including both HP PA RISC and Intel Itanium 2 processors The following servers use the HP sx1000 chips
69. fails or is otherwise inactive and the cell to which the HAA disk is available then the nPartition still can boot an operating system Even if the PRI and HAA devices connect to the same cell such as on a two cell server with two nPartitions configured the HAA device can be used to boot an operating system should the PRI device fail Recommended HP Superdome nPartition Configurations 64 A On HP Superdome servers the locations of the cells you assign to each nPartition and the resulting loads on server interconnections can affect nPartition system performance within the server HP offers specific guidelines for configuring nPartitions on HP Superdome servers in order to ensure good system performance NOTE The guidelines in this section apply to HP Superdome servers only These guidelines follow two basic configuration principles 1 Avoid sharing interconnecting hardware crossbars and crossbar links among multiple nPartitions 2 Minimize the number of crossbar links used by each nPartition but do not overload crossbar links by creating nPartitions that can generate more cell communications traffic across the links than the links can support Overloading crossbar links degrades performance Configuration Guidelines for HP Superdome nPartitions Use these guidelines to help determine which cells to assign to the nPartitions you create on HP Superdome servers Planning nPartitions Define nPartitions in order of size
70. file efi and is listed with the title specified by Description Forexample bcfg boot add 1 efi vms vms_loader efi HP OpenVMS adds an HP OpenVMS item as the first entry in the boot options list See the help bcfg command for details Exit the console and management processor interfaces if you are finished using them To exit the EFI environment press B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the management processor Main Menu To exit the management processor type X at the Main Menu Booting and Shutting Down HP OpenVMS 164 121 Booting HP OpenVMS To boot HP OpenVMS I64 on a cell based HP Integrity server use either of the following procedures e Booting HP OpenVMS EFI Boot Manager page 122 8 P 5 pag e Booting HP OpenVMS EFI Shell page 122 VAN CAUTION ACPI Configuration for HP OpenVMS 164 Must Be default On cell based HP Integrity servers to boot the HP OpenVMS OS an nPartition must have its ACPI configuration value set to default At the EFI Shell interface enter the acpiconf ig command with no arguments to list the current ACPI configuration If the acpiconfig value is not set to default then OpenVMS cannot boot in this situation you must reconfigure acpiconfig or booting will fail and report the INCONSTATE code when launching OpenVMS To set the ACPI configuration for HP OpenVMS 164 At the EFI Shell interface enter the acpiconfig default command and then enter the reset co
71. for the nPartition The monarch processor on the core cell runs the Boot Console Handler BCH or Extensible Firmware Interface EFI code while all other processors are idle until an operating system is booted On first generation cell based servers and HP sx1000 chipset based servers core I O is provided by a PCI card residing in an I O chassis On these servers to be eligible as a core cell a cell must be assigned to the nPartition it must be active and it must be attached to an I O chassis containing functional core I O On HP sx2000 chipset based servers core I O is provided on each cell so any cell assigned to an nPartition can be a core cell Although an nPartition can have multiple core capable cells only one core I O is actively used in an nPartition the core I O belonging to the active core cell For details about setting and using the core cell choices or alternates for an nPartition see Setting nPartition Core Cell Choices page 194 When none of the core cell choices can serve Getting Started with nPartitions as the active core cell or if no core cell choices are specified the nPartition attempts to select an eligible cell using a default process Active and Inactive Cells Cells that are assigned to an nPartition and have booted to form an nPartition are active cells whose resources processors memory and any attached I O can be actively used by software running in the nPartition Cells that are inac
72. from a remote system 2 Use the frupower command to turn on or turn off the cell power Specify the frupower f c command to power off a cell c This also powers off any I O chassis connected to the cell Specify the frupower o c command to power ona cell c This also powers on any I O chassis connected to the cell The following example shows several sample frupower commands and their results frupower f c0 Error Can not power off active cell 0 frupower f c2 frupower o c2 frupower f c6 Error Cell 6 belongs to partition 1 Can not power off cell frupower f i0 1 1 Error I O chassis 0 1 1 is attached to a powered on free cell 4 Please power off the free cell In the above example cell 0 is active and thus cannot be powered off using frupower Cell 2 is inactive and is powered off frupower f c2 and then powered back on frupower o c2 Cell 6 is assigned to a remote nPartition partition number 1 and thus cannot be powered off I O chassis 0 1 1 is attached to cell 4 so to power it off cell 4 must be powered off Procedure 7 5 Powering Cells and 1 O Chassis On and Off Partition Manager You can power cells and I O chassis on and off by using Partition Manager When using Partition Manager Version 1 0 select an inactive cell or I O chassis and use the Cell Power Off Cell or 1 O Power Off I O Chassis action or a similar Power On action When using Partition Man
73. from the service processor MP or GSP Main menu e To force console write access type ecf Control e c f e To exit the console type b Control b to return to the Main Menu The BCH interface is available after one or more core capable cells assigned to the nPartition has been powered on its hardware has completed all Power On Self Tests POST and the cells have booted past boot is blocked rendezvoused and BCH has started executing Boot Console Handler System Boot Environment 71 Once you begin the HP UX boot process and load ISL the BCH interface is no longer available The BCH menus and commands for nPartitions differ slightly from the commands menus for BCH on other HP 9000 server systems To display the current BCH menu and commands type DI The BCH interface HELP command lists BCH command or menu details Main Menu Enter command or menu gt HELP MA Main Menu Help The following submenus are available from the main menu COnfiguration Boot ID INformation ALL Boot Timer SERvice BAttery Boot INfo CE11Config CLEARPIM CAche CoOreCell MemRead ChipRevisions CPUConfig PDT ComplexID DataPrefetch PIM FabriciInfo DEfault SCSI FRU FastBoot FwrVersion KGMemory IO PathFlag LanAddress PD MEmory ResTart PRocessor TIme Extensible Firmware Interface System Boot Environment On HP Integ
74. in Windows Server 2003 Enterprise HP UX Primary Boot 4 0 1 1 0 2 0 Boot Option Maintenance Menu Use and v to change option s Use Enter to select an option Overview of nPartition System Booting 91 92 EY NOTE In some versions of EFI the Boot Configuration menu is listed as the Boot Option Maintenance menu To manage the boot options list for each system use the EFI Shell the EFI Boot Configuration menu or operating system utilities At the EFI Shell the bc g command supports listing and managing the boot options list for all operating systems except Microsoft Windows On HP Integrity systems with Windows installed the MSUtil nvrboot efi utility is provided for managing Windows boot options from the EFI Shell Likewise on HP Integrity systems with OpenVMS installed the efi vms vms_bcfg efiand efi vms vms_show utilities are provided for managing OpenVMS boot options The EFI Boot Configuration menu provides the Add a Boot Option Delete Boot Option s and Change Boot Order menu items If you must add an EFI Shell entry to the boot options list use this method Operating system utilities for managing the boot options list include the HP UX setboot command and the HP OpenVMS SYSSMANAGER BOOT_OPTIONS COM command The OpenVMS 164 installation and upgrade procedures assist you in setting up and validating a boot option for your system disk HP recommends that you allow the procedure to do this Alternati
75. nPartition status includes the current active core cell Core Cell and any core cell choice settings The core cell choice preferences are listed by parstatus as the Core Cell Alternate settings with 1 being the highest priority and 2 through 4 as the lower priority core cell choices parstatus V p0 Partition Partition Number 0 Partition Name julesoo Status active IP address 0 0 0 0 Primary Boot Path 0 0 2 0 0 13 0 Alternate Boot Path 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 HA Alternate Boot Path 0 0 2 0 0 14 0 PDC Revision 6 0 IODCH Version 23664 CPU Speed 552 MHz Core Cell cab0 cello0 Core Cell Alternate 1 cab0 cell0 Core Cell Alternate 2 cab0 cell2 Core Connected Par Hardware Location Usage IO To Num cab0 bay0 chassisl active yes cab0 cellod 0 cab0 bayl chassis3 active yes cab0 cell2 0 196 Creating and Configuring nPartitions Modify the nPartition core cell choices using the parmodify p r command You can modify the core cell choices for the local nPartition or any remote nPartition in the server complex Use the following command parmodify p r r Specify the nPartition number p and the cell ID r for all cells you wish to designate as core cell choices parmodify p0 r2 r0 Command succeeded The order in which you list the cells is the order in which the nPartition core cell choices are established the first cell listed is the first preferred core
76. not have the parconfig EFI shell command do not support virtual partitions and are effectively in nPars boot mode HP recommends that you do not use the parconfig EFI shell command and instead use the EFI HPUX vparconfig EFI shell command to manage the boot mode for nPartitions on cell based HP Integrity servers Refer to Installing and Managing HP UX Virtual Partitions vPars Sixth Edition for details Tools for Booting nPartitions The tools for booting nPartitions and configuring related settings are e Service Processor MP or GSP Menus Service processor menus provide a complex wide service interface that can allow access to all hardware and nPartitions See Command Reference for Service Processor Commands page 80 e EFI Boot Manager and EFI Shell On HP Integrity servers only the EFI Extensible Firmware Interface Boot Manager and Shell are the methods for interacting with an nPartition before it has booted an operating system See Command Reference for EFI Shell Commands page 81 e Boot Console Handler BCH Menu Commands On PA RISC servers the BCH interface is the method for interacting with an nPartition before it has booted HP UX See Command Reference for BCH Menu Commands page 84 e nPartition Commands HP nPartition commands allow you to configure manage and monitor nPartitions and hardware within a server complex The Enhanced nPartition Commands also can remotely manage comple
77. number NOTE You can remotely perform this task using remote administration options supported by the Enhanced nPartition Commands or Partition Manager Version 2 0 Remote administration is supported by the Partition Manager Tools Switch Complexes action and by the nPartition command u h optionsor g h options For details see Tools for Configuring nPartitions page 165 1 Login to a system with the nPartition commands installed If using remote administration features to rename an nPartition in a complex you can login to any system with Enhanced nPartition Commands installed Creating and Configuring nPartitions 2 Usetheparmodify p P name command to set the nPartition name for any of the nPartitions in the server complex Specify both the nPartition number p where is the nPartition number and the new name for the nPartition P name If the nPartition name contains spaces then quotation marks must surround the name parmodify pl P New Name Command succeeded You can list the new name of the nPartition by using the parstatus p command where is the nPartition number or parstatus P Procedure 6 12 Renaming an nPartition Partition Manager You can change an nPartition name by using Partition Manager Select an nPartition then select either the Partition Modify Partition action Partition Manager Version 1 0 or the nPartition Modify nPartition action Partition Manager Ver
78. on hardware that has been powered off use the PE command at the management processor Command menu acpiconfig disable softpowerdown When set on HP rx7620 rx7640 rx8620 and rx8640 servers acpiconfig disable softpowerdown causes nPartition cells to remain at a boot is blocked state when the OS issues a shutdown for reconfig command for example shutdown hor shutdown s In this case an OS shutdown for reconfig makes the nPartition inactive This is the normal behavior on HP rx7620 rx7640 rx8620 and rx8640 servers with an ACPI configuration setting of default or single pci domain To make an inactive nPartition active use the management processor BO command to boot the nPartition past the boot is blocked state e Boot Modes on HP Integrity nPartitions nPars and vPars Modes On cell based HP Integrity servers each nPartition can be configured in either of two boot modes nPars Boot Mode In nPars boot mode an nPartition is configured to boot any single operating system in the standard environment When an nPartition is in nPars boot mode it cannot boot the vPars monitor and therefore does not support HP UX virtual partitions vPars Boot Mode In vPars boot mode an nPartition is configured to boot into the vPars environment When an nPartition is in vPars boot mode it can only boot the vPars monitor and therefore it only supports HP UX virtual partitions and it does not support booting HP OpenVMS 164 Microsoft Wind
79. on the HP sx1000 chipset or HP sx2000 chipset each cell has a cell local memory CLM parameter which determines how firmware interleaves memory residing on the cell NOTE HP OpenVMS I64 does not support using CLM Before booting OpenVMS on an nPartition you must ensure that the CLM parameter for each cell in the nPartition is set to zero 0 Although you might be able to boot OpenVMS on an nPartition with CLM configured any memory configured as cell local is unusable and such a configuration is untested and unsupported To check CLM configuration details from an OS use Partition Manager or the parstatus command For example the parstatus V c command and parstatus V p command report the CLM amount requested and CLM amount allocated for the specified cell c where is the cell number or the specified nPartition p where is the nPartition number To check CLM configuration details from the EFI Shell on a cell based HP Integrity server use the info mem command If the amount of NonInterleaved Memory reported is less than 512 MB then no CLM is configured for any cells in the nPartition and the indicated amount of noninterleaved memory is used by system firmware If the info mem command reports more than 512 MB of noninterleaved memory then use use Partition Manager or the parstatus command to confirm the CLM configuration details To set the CLM configuration use Partition Manager or the parmodify command Adding HP
80. perform a reboot for reconfig of an nPartition when you have removed an active cell from the nPartition e You must immediately perform a reboot for reconfig of an nPartition when you have removed a cell from an active nPartition and specified the B option to the parmodify command e You do not need to perform a reboot for reconfig of an nPartition when you have removed an inactive cell from an nPartition and did not specify the B option to the parmodify command In the cases where you must immediately perform a reboot for reconfig after removing a cell not doing so will leave the Complex Profile locked and thus will prevent any other changes to the server complex configuration In these cases the reboot for reconfig is required to complete the cell assignment changes and permit other changes to occur Procedure 6 8 Removing Cells from an nPartition nPartition Commands From the command line use the parmodify command to remove cells from an nPartition You also can use the parstatus command to list current nPartition details such as cell assignments NOTE You can remotely perform this task using remote administration options supported by the Enhanced nPartition Commands or Partition Manager Version 2 0 Remote administration is supported by the Partition Manager Tools Switch Complexes action and by the nPartition command u h optionsor g h options For details see Tools for Configuring nPartitions page 165
81. processors 32 processor cores total Uses the HP sx2000 chipset Runs the HP UX B 11 11 December 2006 release model string 9000 800 rp8440 HP Integrity rx8620 server Up to 16 Intel Itanium 2 processors Uses the HP sx1000 chipset Runs HP UX B 11 23 HP UX B 11 31 HP OpenVMS 164 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Red Hat Enterprise Linux and SuSE Linux Enterprise Server model command output ia64 hp rx8620 server HP Integrity rx8620 32 server Up to 16 HP mx2 dual processor modules with Intel Itanium 2 processors 32 processor cores total Uses the HP sx1000 chipset Runs HP UX B 11 23 HP UX B 11 31 and Microsoft Windows Server 2003 model command output ia64 hp rx8620 server HP Integrity rx8640 Up to 16 Intel Itanium 2 processors either single Intel Itanium 2 processors or dual core Intel Itanium 2 processors Up to 32 processor cores total when using dual core processors Uses the HP sx2000 chipset Runs HP UX B 11 23 HP UX B 11 31 and Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Servers with dual core Intel Itanium 2 processors also can run HP OpenVMS 164 8 3 Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 Update 4 and SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 model command output ia64 hp rx8640 server nPartition Server Hardware Overview Table 2 1 Models of Cell Based HP Servers continued Cell Capacity HP 9000 Superdome Servers See Superdome Server Models pag
82. release and later supports rp7420 rp8420 and HP 9000 Superdome SD16A SD32A SD64A models based on the HP sx1000 chipset The HP UX 11i v1 B 11 11 December 2006 release and later supports rp7440 rp8440 and HP 9000 Superdome SD16B SD32B SD64B models based on the HP sx2000 chipset HP UX 11i v1 does not support cell local memory Also see nPartition Hardware Requirements for Operating Systems page 61 HP UX 11i v2 B 11 23 HP UX 11i v2 B 11 23 is supported on HP Integrity servers includin PP grity 8 the cell based HP Integrity servers The HP UX 11i v2 B 11 23 September 2004 release and later also supports cell based HP 9000 servers based on the HP sx1000 chipset HP UX 11i v2 supports cell local memory Also see nPartition Hardware Requirements for Operating Systems page 61 Introduction to nPartitions 15 HP Server Support for nPartitions 16 Table 1 1 nPartition Operating System Support continued Operating System HP UX 11i v3 B 11 31 HP OpenVMS 164 8 2 1 and 8 3 Supported Cell Based Servers HP UX 11i v3 B 11 31 is supported on HP Integrity servers and HP 9000 servers HP UX 11i v3 is supported on all servers based on the HP sx1000 chipset and on HP Integrity servers based on the HP sx2000 chipset HP UX 11i v3 supports cell local memory Also see nPartition Hardware Requirements for Operating Systems page 61 OpenVMS 164 8 2 1 is supported on
83. reset Disabling Hyper Threading for an nPartition To disable Hyper Threading use any of the following methods and then reset the nPartition whose Hyper Threading status you have changed e From the EFI Shell cpuconfig threads off e From HP UX setboot m off e Using the Enhanced nPartition Commands parmodify pn T n wherenis the nPartition number e Using Partition Manager Perform the Modify nPartition task and deselect the Enable Hyper Threading check box on the Configure Memory tab You must reset an nPartition after changing its Hyper Threading status Configuring and Deconfiguring Memory DIMMs A You can configure and deconfigure memory by using any one of the following procedures e Configuring and Deconfiguring Memory BCH Menu page 220 e Configuring and Deconfiguring Memory EFI Shell page 221 You can configure and deconfigure memory modules DIMMs from any cell that is assigned to an nPartition Deconfiguring memory causes it to not be available for use by the cell or its nPartition Whenever you configure or deconfigure memory you must reboot the corresponding nPartition for the configuration change to take effect NOTE DIMMs operate either in ranks of four or echelons of two depending on memory architecture of the server When you deallocate a DIMM all other DIMMs in the rank or echelon also will not be used the next time the nPartition boots Each rank or echelon is numbered 0 1 2 and
84. select the Change Cell Attributes tab then select the cell and click the Modify Cell button This enables you to configure the use on next boot value for the selected cell Setting Cell Attributes 193 From Partition Manager Version 2 0 use the Set Cell Options tab to configure cell use on next boot values and use the Configure Memory tab to configure cell local memory values CAUTION Memory configured as cell local memory only can be used by operating systems that support it Any memory configured as cell local memory is unusable when an nPartition runs an operating system that does not support it After changing attribute values for all the cells you plan to modify click the OK button Review all information presented in the Notes and Warnings the Summary of Changes and the HA Checks tabs Either cancel or proceed with the cell attribute changes Click the Cancel button to cancel the changes To proceed with the cell attribute changes click the Finish button or click the OK button Reboot the nPartition to use the cells new attribute values On cell based servers based on the HP sx1000 chipset or HP sx2000 chipset if you have changed cell local memory CLM values then you must reboot the nPartition whose CLM values have changed If you also are changing use on next boot values then also use the following guidelines If you have changed any cell use on next boot settings for the nPartition then reboot the nPartition
85. select the I O Chassis tab When using Partition Manager Version 2 0 select the I O tab 1 Access Partition Manager For details on accessing Partition Manager or other tools see Tools for Listing Status page 223 2 List I O configuration details for the server complex From Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the Details Show Complex Details action then select the I O Chassis tab to view I O chassis details for the complex For additional details on any I O chassis use the Show Details button to display a list of PCI slots and cards From Partition Manager Version 2 0 select the I O tab to view details about the I O chassis in the complex You can view further details about individual cards by clicking on the card or by selecting the card s and using actions available from the I O menu Viewing these additional details requires running pdweb the HP UX Peripheral Device tool on the local nPartition to which the cell connected to the I O chassis is assigned 3 Exit Partition Manager From Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the File Exit action From Partition Manager Version 2 0 select Log off parmgr or exit the Web browser when finished Listing Input Output I O Configurations 233 Listing Cabinets in a Server Complex You can list the cabinets in a server complex by using any one of the following procedures e Listing Cabinets in a Server Complex Service Processor page 234 e Listing Cabinet
86. servers the chassis number is 0 Chassis 0 which connects to cell 0 and is the left chassis as viewed from the cabinet rear the left eight PCI card slots 1 Chassis 1 which connects to cell 1 and is the right chassis as viewed from the cabinet rear the right eight PCI card slots On HP Superdome servers the chassis number is 1 Chassis 1 the left chassis in the bay as viewed when facing the bay chassis 3 Chassis 3 the right chassis in the bay as viewed when facing the bay chassis In HP Superdome servers all chassis are 12 slot I O chassis both in Compute cabinets and in I O Expansion cabinets The example below shows the parstatus command listing details about two different I O chassis cabinet 0 bay 0 chassis 1 and cabinet 0 bay 1 chassis 3 parstatus i0 0 1 Chassis Core Connected Par Hardware Location Usage IO To Num cab0 bay0 chassis1 absent parstatus i0 1 3 Chassis Core Connected Par Hardware Location Usage IO To Num cab0 bayl chassis3 active yes cab0 cellod 0 Specifying Cells and I O Chassis to Commands 245 Use the parstatus I command to list all I O chassis within a server complex regardless of the chassis cell connections and nPartition assignments Use the HP UX rad qcommand or olrad q command to list the currently available PCI T O slots in the local nPartition and their status The rad command is available with HP UX B 11 11 an
87. set the PRI boot path to 0 0 4 0 0 8 0 and the HAA boot path to 0 0 4 0 0 9 0 for partition number 0 issue the parmodify p0 b 0 0 4 0 0 8 0 s 0 0 4 0 0 9 0 command as shown below parmodify p0 b 0 0 4 0 0 8 0 s 0 0 4 0 0 9 0 Command succeeded Boot Path Notes for HP Integrity servers On HP Integrity servers parmodify and setboot considers the first item in the boot options list to be the PRI boot path the second item to be the HAA boot path and the third boot option list item to be the ALT boot path When you use parmodify or setboot to configure the first PRI or second HAA or third ALT item in the boot options list the new device path that you specify either replaces the original boot option or it is inserted in the original item s place with the original item being shifted toward the end of the boot options list e If the boot option currently is not set to an HP UX device the new boot device path is inserted as a new item in the boot options list In this case the original list item if any moves toward the end of the boot options list and the new boot device path becomes the first PRI or second HAA or third ALT item in the list as specified by parmodify or setboot e Ifthe boot option currently is set to an HP UX device and the list item has the standard description such as HP UX Primary Boot for PRI or HP UX Alternate Boot for ALT then the new boot device path replaces the original item in the boot options l
88. so on up to hexadecimal number F as needed The DIMMs in the rank or echelon are lettered A to D For example rank 0 includes DIMMs 0A OB 0C and OD echelon 1 has DIMMs 1A and 1B Procedure 7 14 Configuring and Deconfiguring Memory BCH Menu From the BCH Service Menu use the DIMMDEALLOC command to configure or deconfigure memory modules DIMMs in cells assigned to the local nPartition The BCH Menu is available only on HP 9000 systems 220 Managing Hardware Resources A Access the BCH Main Menu for the nPartition whose memory you want to configure or deconfigure Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the BCH Main Menu the Main Menu Enter command or menu gt prompt If ata BCH menu other than the Main Menu then enter MA to return to the BCH Main Menu Enter SER to access the BCH Service Menu From the Service Menu use the DIMMDEALLOC command to list the current configurations of memory modules DIMMs in the cells assigned to the local nPartition Also use the DIMMDEALLOC command to configure and deconfigure DIMMs for cells in the local nPartition NOTE When you deallocate a DIMM all other DIMMs in the rank or echelon also will not be used the next time the nPartition boots Enter DIMMDEALLOC with no arguments to list the current DIMM configurations for all cells in the local nPart
89. state If this is the case go back to Step 3 and ensure all nPartitions are inactive at the shutdown for reconfig state 7 Issue the BO command to boot the Genesis Partition past its shutdown for reconfig state and make it an active nPartition When a Genesis Partition is created it remains at boot is blocked in an inactive shutdown for reconfig state so you must boot it manually The Genesis Partition always is assigned partition number 0 because when it is created it is the first and only nPartition in the server complex Using the BO command to boot partition 0 will boot the Genesis Partition to its system boot environment either Boot Console Handler BCH on HP 9000 servers or Extensible Firmware Interface EFI on HP Integrity servers GSP CM gt BO This command boots the selected partition Name 0 Partition 0 Select a partition number 0 Do you want to boot partition number 0 named Partition 0 Y N y gt The selected partition will be booted GSP CM gt 8 Access the console for the Genesis Partition and configure the nPartition as appropriate and necessary From the service processor Command menu enter MA to return to the Main menu then enter CO to access the Console menu The Genesis Partition is partition 0 and by default is named Partition 0 You will need to set the boot paths or options any core cell choices the nPartition name and other settings as appropriate You also may need to
90. steps that occur during the nPartition boot phase are a The service processor provides a copy of the relevant Complex Profile data to the cells assigned to the nPartition This data includes a copy of the Stable Complex Configuration Data and a copy of the Partition Configuration Data for the nPartition For details see Complex Profile page 36 b The service processor releases BIB for all cells assigned to the nPartition that have a y use on next boot value and complete the cell boot phase in time The service processor does not release BIB for any cell with a n use on next boot value or for any cell that did not complete the cell boot phase within ten minutes of the first cell to do so Once BIB is release for a cell the cell is considered to be active c nPartition rendezvous begins with the system firmware on each active cell using its copy of complex profile data to contact other active cells in the nPartition The active cells in the nPartition negotiate to select a core cell e The chosen core cell manages the rest of the nPartition boot process A processor on the core cell runs the nPartition system boot environment BCH on HP 9000 servers EFI on HP Integrity servers The core cell hands off control to an operating system loader when the OS boot process is initiated You can view progress during the cell and nPartition boot phases by observing the Virtual Front Panel for an nPartition which is available from
91. supported by the Partition Manager Tools Switch Complexes action and by the nPartition command u h optionsor g h options For details see Tools for Configuring nPartitions page 165 1 Login to a system that enables you to list the current cell assignments and details For example login to HP UX running on an existing nPartition in the server complex or login to a system with the Enhanced nPartition Commands or Partition Manager Version 2 0 Plan your nPartition configuration by selecting which cells will comprise the new nPartition Use the parstatus AC command to list all unassigned available cells in the server complex parstatus AC Cel1 CPU Memory Use OK GB Core On Hardware Actual Failed OK cell Next Par Location Usage Max Failed Connected To Capable Boot Num cab0O celll absent cab0O cell3 absent cab0 cell4 power on 4 0 4 2 0 0 0 cab 0 bay0 chassis3 yes cabO cellS absent cab0 cell6 power on 4 0 4 2 0 0 0 cab 0 bayl chassisl yes cab0O cell7 absent You can select any of the cells listed to create the new nPartition only the cells that are not absent are present within the server complex All cells that you choose must meet the hardware requirements for nPartitions for example they all must have the same firmware revision The cells also must form an HP recommended nPartition configuration At least one cell must have an I O chas
92. system 1 2 A Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CM to access the Command Menu At the Command menu enter the RS command specify which nPartition is to be reset and confirm whether to reset it The RS command resets all active cells in the nPartition and reboots them past partition rendezvous to the system boot environment BCH or EFI or an operating system NOTE On HP Integrity servers you should reset an nPartition only after all self tests and partition rendezvous have completed For example when the nPartition is inactive all cells are at BIB or is at EFI Be certain to correctly select which nPartition to be reset GSP CM gt RS This command resets the selected partition WARNING Execution of this command irrecoverably halts all system processing and I O activity and restarts the selected partition Name 0 jules00 1 jules01 Rebooting and Resetting nPartitions 135 Select a partition number 1 Do you want to reset partition number 1 Y N y gt The selected partition will be reset GSP CM gt If you are accessing the service processor using a single partition user account the RS command selects which nPartition is to be reset the nPartition that your account allows you to access If using an operator or administrator service processor account you can select which of the nPartitions in the server complex you want to reset 3 To exit the service processor Command M
93. the sbin shutdown R H command to shut an nPartition down to a shutdown for reconfig inactive state NOTE On Superdome SX1000 PA and SX2000 PA shutdown R H does not stop at BIB if the MP has been hot swapped since the last reboot NOTE On HP rx7620 rx7640 rx8620 and rx8640 servers you can configure the nPartition behavior when HP UX initiates a shutdown for reconfig shutdown hor shutdown R H The two options are to have hardware power off when the OS is halted or to have the nPartition be made inactive all cells are in a boot is blocked state The normal behavior for HP UX shutdown for reconfig is for the nPartition be made inactive For details see ACPI Softpowerdown Configuration OS Shutdown Behavior page 93 1 Login to HP UX running on the nPartition that you want to shut down to a shutdown for reconfig inactive state 2 Issue the shutdown R H command to reset the nPartition to the shutdown for reconfig state The shutdown R Hcommand shuts down HP UX reset all cells in the nPartition perform any nPartition reconfigurations and halt all cells at a boot is blocked state thus making the nPartition and all its cells inactive Procedure 5 42 Shutting Down to Shutdown for Reconfig OpenVMS To perform a shutdown for reconfig of an nPartition running OpenVMS 164 first issue SYSSSYSTEM SHUTDOWN COM from OpenVMS and enter No at the Should an automatic system Shutting Down to a Shutdown for
94. the target nPartition u or service processor g frupower Command 265 cplxmodify Command The cplxmodify command modifies attributes of a cell based server complex such as the complex name A NOTE The cplxmodify command is only supported by the Enhanced nPartition Commands Root permission is required to run this command Refer to the cplxmodify 1M manpage for details Synopsis cplxmodify N ComplexName u username h IPaddress hostname g h IPaddress hostname e The u h set of options may be specified to cause the command to send its management request using WBEM to an nPartition other than the local nPartition but can also be used as a loopback access to the local nPartition e The g h options may be specified to cause the command to send its management request using IPMI over LAN to a service processor in another server complex but can also be used as a loopback access to the service processor in the local complex The u and g options are mutually exclusive Options N ComplexName u username h I Paddress hostname 266 nPartition Commands Changes the name of the target complex to ComplexName Specifies the account and authorization to access an nPartition other than the local nPartition The h option is required if this option is used username specifies a configured user name on the target nPartition Allows access to the complex specified by the h o
95. the ELILO EFI Linux loader from the EFI Shell Refer to the procedure Booting SuSE Linux Enterprise Server EFI Shell page 133 for details On a SuSE Linux Enterprise Server boot device EFI System Partition the full paths to the loader and configuration files are efi SuSE elilo efi efi SuSE elilo conf After choosing the file system for the boot device for example s0 you can initiate the Linux loader from the EFI Shell prompt by entering the full path for the ELILO EFT loader By default the ELILO EFI loader boots Linux using the kernel image and parameters specified by the default entry in the elilo conf file on the EFI System Partition for the boot device To interact with the ELILO EFI loader interrupt the boot process for example type a space at the ELILO boot prompt To exit the ELILO EFI loader use the exit command Procedure 5 24 Booting SuSE Linux Enterprise Server EFI Shell Use this procedure to boot SuSE Linux Enterprise Server from the EFI Shell Refer to ACPI Configuration for SuSE Linux Enterprise Server Must Be single pci domain or default page 133 for required configuration details 1 Access the EFI Shell From the system console choose the EFI Shell entry from the EFI Boot Manager menu to access the shell Booting and Shutting Down Linux 133 2 Access the EFI System Partition for the SuSE Linux Enterprise Server boot device Use the map EFI Shell command to list the file s
96. the PRIVATE KEY and CERTIFICATE entry for the local system The opt parmgr bin parmgr command starts or stops the HP UX Tomcat based Servlet Engine in which Partition Manager runs To start parmgr s start to stop parmgr s stop to check status parmgr s status to restart parmgr s restart Unlocking Comple Pr l ae al pex e CAUTION These commands should only be used when recovering from a hung complex reconfiguration e Service Processor MP or GSP RL command e HP UX parunlock command See Unlocking Complex Profile Entries page 198 Canceling Pending Only changes involving the unassignment deletion of an active cell from an nPartition Changes to the Complex can practically be canceled Profile e Service Processor MP or GSP RL command e HP UX parunlock command See Canceling Pending Changes to the Complex Profile page 199 Restoring the Prior Compl ah Profile e NOTE All nPartitions in the complex must be inactive put in a shutdown for reconfig state before restoring a prior complex profile Service Processor MP or GSP CC command L option Creating a Genesis Partition Creating a Genesis Partition overwrites all nPartition related complex profile data for the server and establishes one single cell nPartition Procedure 6 1 Genesis Partition Creation Service Processor Use the CC command and G option at the service processor Command menu to create a Genesis Partition on a
97. the format hh mm in which hh is the hour one or two digits and mm is the minute of the hour two digits or in the format m in which m is the number of minutes delay until shutdown or specify now to immediately shut down Booting an Inactive nPartition You can boot an inactive nPartition by using any one of the following procedures e Booting an Inactive nPartition Service Processor page 146 e Booting an Inactive nPartition nPartition Commands page 147 When all cells in an nPartition are at boot is blocked the nPartition is inactive This is the case for example when an nPartition is held at the shutdown for reconfig state You can boot an nPartition past the shutdown for reconfig state to make it active by using the BO boot command at the service processor Command menu To determine whether an nPartition is in a boot is blocked shutdown for reconfig state use the Virtual Front Panel for the nPartition to check the nPartition boot status If all cells assigned to the nPartition are at boot is blocked the nPartition is halted at the shutdown for reconfig state Procedure 5 45 Booting an Inactive nPartition Service Processor Use the service processor Command menu BO command to boot an nPartition past the shutdown for reconfig state to make the nPartition active If you use the BO command to attempt to boot an nPartition that already is active the command has no effect 1 Login to the service processor M
98. the local nPartition You also can specify of to disable autoboot or specify a timeout duration to enable autoboot with a specific number of seconds during which automatic booting from the boot options list can be canceled For example autoboot off to disable autoboot or autoboot 60 to enable autoboot with a 60 second timeout period See the help autoboot command for details 3 Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the EFI environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu 160 Booting and Resetting nPartitions Procedure 5 62 Configuring Autoboot Options HP UX From the HP UX command line use the setboot b onorsetboot b off command to turn on enable or turn off disable autoboot 1 2 Login to HP UX running on the nPartition whose autoboot options you want to configure On HP Integrity servers only the setboot b oncommand enables autoboot and the setboot b off command disables autoboot When autoboot is enabled for an nPartition in an HP Integrity server items in the boot options list are attempted to be loaded automatically at boot time starting with the first item in the boot options list On HP 9000 servers only the setboot command configures the boot action for the PRI boot path Configure the PRI boot action for the local nPartition by usin
99. the model string serial number or other details used by commands utilities and licensing tools To cancel the changes at any time enter q to quit the ID command without modifying the complex profile 4 To exit the service processor Command Menu enter MA to return to the service processor Main Menu At the Main Menu enter X to exit the service processor interface Procedure 6 14 Renaming a Server Complex nPartition Commands From the command line use the cplxmodify N name command to rename a server complex The cplxmodify command currently only is supported by the Enhanced nPartition Commands A NOTE You can remotely perform this task using remote administration options supported by the Enhanced nPartition Commands or Partition Manager Version 2 0 Remote administration is supported by the Partition Manager Tools Switch Complexes action and by the nPartition command u h optionsor g h options For details see Tools for Configuring nPartitions page 165 1 Login to a system with the nPartition commands installed If using remote administration features to rename a complex you can login to any system with Enhanced nPartition Commands installed 2 Issue the the cplxmodify N name command to rename the local server complex To list the current complex name issue the parstatus X command Procedure 6 15 Renaming a Server Complex Partition Manager You can rename a server complex from Par
100. the search results choose the HP Integrity Essentials Foundation Pack for Linux on Itanium R 2 based Servers entry from the list of products 4 Atthe HP Integrity Essentials Foundation Pack for Linux product details page in the to order section of the page where it states Click here to download choose the word here 5 To download the HP Integrity Essentials Foundation Pack for Linux CD image file choose download from the Web page You will use the iso file that you downloaded to create a usable CD 6 Go to the http docs hp com linux Web site to view documentation for the HP Integrity Essentials Foundation Pack for Linux Under the Linux for Itanium 2 based Servers and Workstations heading of the Linux documentation Web site view the HP Integrity Essentials Foundation Pack for Linux documentation 7 Record a CD using the HP Integrity Essentials Foundation Pack for Linux CD image file The CD image iso file is a complete CD image in one file Copying the file to a CD does not create a usable CD Instead use a software application that supports recording a CD from a CD image Partition Manager 22 Partition Manager provides a graphical interface for managing cell based servers Partition Manager Version 1 0 was distributed with HP UX 11i v1 B 11 11 releases prior to the December 2004 release Starting with the HP UX 11i v1 December 2004 release Partition Manager Version 2 0 replaces Partition Manager Versio
101. then use the BO command at the service processor Command menu to boot the nPartition If you have changed any cell from OFF n do not use on next boot to ON y use the cell on next boot then you must perform these two tasks this resets and reconfigures the nPartition and boots it 5 Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the BCH environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 7 9 Configuring and Deconfiguring Cells EFI Shell From the EFI Shell environment use the use the cel lconfig command to configure or deconfigure cells in the local nPartition The EFI Shell is available only on HP Integrity systems E NOTE Use of the cellconfig command at the EFI Shell is restricted See the help cellconfig command for details 1 Access the EFI Shell environment for the nPartition whose cells you want to configure or deconfigure Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If at another EFI menu select the Exit option from the sub menus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading From the EFI Boot Manager menu select the EFI Shell menu option to access the EFI S
102. these servers you can customize this behavior For details refer to ACPI Softpowerdown Configuration OS Shutdown Behavior page 93 On HP Integrity Superdome servers the Windows shutdown s command shuts down the system and keeps all cells at BIB the boot is blocked inactive state Procedure 5 21 Windows Shutdown from the Command Line From the Windows command line issue the shutdown command to shut down the OS 128 Booting and Resetting nPartitions Log in to Windows running on the system that you want to shut down For example access the system console and use the Windows SAC interface to start a command prompt from which you can issue Windows commands to shut down the the system Check whether any users are logged in Use the query user or query session command Issue the shut down command and the appropriate options to shut down the Windows Server 2003 on the system You have the following options when shutting down Windows e To shut down Windows and reboot shutdown r Alternatively you can choose the Start Shut Down action and choose Restart from the pull down menu e To shut down Windows and not reboot either power down server hardware or put an nPartition into a shutdown for reconfig state shutdown s Alternatively you can choose the Start Shut Down action and choose Shut down from the pull down menu e To abort a shutdown stop a shutdown that has been initiated shutdown a For example
103. to access the Virtual Front Panel menu then enter S to access the system VFP that displays the current status for all nPartitions 2 Check the VFP status to see whether any cabinet hardware is running an operating system OS Any nPartition whose state is OS heartbeat is running an OS and thus should not have its hardware powered off until after the OS is shut down Type b Control b to exit the VFP 3 Shut down the OS running on any cabinet hardware that you plan to power off 4 Confirm that nobody else is using or servicing the cabinet hardware you plan to power on or off Both physically inspect the hardware and check whether others are remotely accessing the service processor using the WHO command at the Command menu 5 Access the cabinet hardware and flip the power switch located on the front of the cabinet to the on or off position in order to power the cabinet on or off Procedure 7 2 Powering Server Cabinets On and Off Service Processor Use the Virtual Front Panel and then use the Command menu PE command to turn 48 volt cabinet power on or off from the service processor GSP or MP 1 Login to the service processor for the server and access the Virtual Front Panel for the system From the service processor Main menu enter VFP to access the Virtual Front Panel menu then enter S to access the system VFP that displays the current status for all nPartitions Powering Server Cabinets On and Off 205 2
104. vmunix on the nPartition ISL Initial System Loader Replying y yes do stop at ISL allows you to interact directly with the Initial System Loader ISL and the Secondary System Loader hpux for the boot device Enter all ISL commands from the ISL gt prompt hpux Secondary System Loader From the ISL prompt you also can enter commands that are executed by the Secondary System Loader hpux Preface your Secondary System Loader command with hpux For example hpux 1s stand to list the contents of the stand directory on the booted device Refer to the is 1M and hpux 1M manpages for details 3 Issue commands from the ISL prompt ISL gt or enter the EXIT command to leave the ISL interface and return to the BCH Menu Booting to the HP UX Initial System Loader ISL 149 4 Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the BCH environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Booting to the HP UX Loader HPUX EFI On HP Integrity servers you can boot to the HP UX Loader HPUX EFI by using the following procedure A NOTE The HP UX Loader HPUX EFI is available only on HP Integrity servers See Using HP UX Loader Commands page 151 for details on issuing commands from the HP UX Boot Loader HPUX EFI the HPUX gt prompt Procedure 5 51 HPUX EFI Acce
105. where is the cabinet number 1 Login to a system with the nPartition commands installed If using remote administration features to list cabinet details you can login to any system with Enhanced nPartition Commands installed 2 Issue commands to list details about cabinets in the target complex e parstatus B List all cabinets in the server complex e parstatus V b View a detailed status for the specified cabinet b where is the cabinet number Procedure 8 21 Listing Cabinets in a Server Complex Partition Manager You can list details about the cabinets in a server complex by using Partition Manager When using Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the Details Show Complex Details action the General tab and the Cabinet Info tab provide cabinet related information When using Partition Manager Version 2 0 select the Hardware tab for an overview of cabinets in the complex For complete details about all hardware in the complex select the Complex Show Complex Details action 1 Access Partition Manager For details on accessing Partition Manager or other tools see Tools for Listing Status page 223 2 List cabinet details for the server complex From Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the Details Show Complex Details action then select the Cabinet Info tab The General tab also provides cabinet related information 234 Listing nPartition and Hardware Status From Partition Manager Version 2 0 s
106. 0 and rx8640 servers this is the normal behavior for nPartitions with an ACPI configuration setting of default or single pci domain Available only on HP Integrity rx7620 rx7640 rx8620 and rx8640 servers reset Resets the local nPartition resetting all cells and then proceeding with the nPartition boot phase reconfigreset Performs a shutdown for reconfig of the local nPartition resetting all cells and then holding them at the wait at BIB state making the nPartition inactive e BCH menu support for managing nPartition booting includes the following commands BCH is available only on HP 9000 servers BOOT Initiate an operating system boot from a specified boot device path or path variable REBOOT Resets the local nPartition resetting all cells and then proceeding with the nPartition boot phase RECONFIGRESET Performs a shutdown for reconfig of the local nPartition resetting all cells and then holding them at the wait at BIB state making the nPartition inactive PATH List and set boot device path variables PRI HAA ALT Configuration menu PATHFLAGS command List and set the boot control flag for each boot path effectively determining the nPartition autoboot behavior Getting Started with nPartitions e HP UX includes the following commands for shutting down and rebooting the nPartition A shutdown r Shuts down HP UX and resets the local nPartition resetting cel
107. 0 and the second nPartition to be created is partition number 1 After you remove an nPartition no cells are assigned to the nPartition As a result the nPartition tools can reuse the partition number when creating a new nPartition For example after you remove partition number 2 the next time you create a new nPartition the parcreate command or Partition Manager will assign cells to partition number 2 when creating anew nPartition if all lower numbered nPartitions partition numbers 0 and 1 already are defined Assigned and Unassigned Cells Each cell in a server complex either is assigned to one of the nPartitions in the complex or it is unassigned and thus is not used by any of the nPartitions If an I O chassis is attached to an unassigned cell then the chassis likewise is not assigned to an nPartition Cells that are unassigned are considered to be available resources they are free to be assigned to any of the existing nPartitions or can be used to create new nPartitions Base Cells On both HP 9000 servers and HP Integrity servers all cells within an nPartition are base cells The nPartitions administration tools automatically set the cell type to base cell if you do not specify the cell type Core Cells 24 One cell in each nPartition must serve as the active core cell The core cell controls the nPartition until an operating system has booted and it provides console services and other boot and management abilities
108. 0 1 3 7 0 0 12 0 96 33 On No 0 1 3 8 0 0 11 0 88 33 On Yes 0 1 3 9 0 0 10 0 80 33 On No 0 1 3 10 0 0 9 0 72 33 On No 0 1 3 11 0 0 8 0 64 33 On No 8 0 3 0 2 0 0 0 33 On Yes 8 0 3 1 2 0 1 0 8 33 On No 8 0 3 2 2 0 2 0 16 33 On No 8 0 3 3 2 0 3 0 24 33 On No 8 0 3 4 2 0 4 0 32 33 On No 8 0 3 5 2 0 6 0 48 33 On No 8 0 3 6 2 0 14 0 L12 33 On Yes 8 0 3 7 2 0 12 0 96 33 On No 8 0 3 8 2 0 11 0 88 33 On No 8 0 3 9 2 0 10 0 80 33 On No 8 0 3 10 2 0 9 0 72 33 On No 8 0 3 11 2 0 8 0 64 33 On No Suspended No N A N A N A N A No N A N A No N A N A N A No N A N A N A N A N A No N A N A N A N A N A Driver s Capable No N A N A N A N A Yes N A N A Yes N A N A N A No N A N A N A N A N A Yes N A N A N A N A N A The parstatus I command reports cabinet 0 bay 1 chassis 3 as cab0 bay1 chassis3 The rad qcommand and olrad qcommand report cabinet 0 bay 1 chassis 3 as 0 1 3 Specifying Remote Management Options to Commands Two sets of remote management options are supported by the Enhanced nPartition Commands Specifying Remote Management Options to Commands 247 e The u h set of options may be specified to cause the command to send its management request using WBEM to an nPartition other than the local nPartition but can also be used as a loopback access to the local nPartition A NOTE When specifyingthe u h options the host specified by h must be ha
109. 0 Chipset for HP Servers page 49 e HP Integrity Superdome servers include the SD16B SD32B and SD64B models These models support up to 16 cells in a server complex e The HP Integrity rx8640 model supports up to four cells in a server complex e The HP Integrity rx7640 model supports up to two cells in a server complex For details see Server Hardware Details Cell Based HP Servers page 51 HP Superdome Hybrid Servers Intel ltanium 2 and PA RISC nPartition Mixing HP Superdome servers based on the HP sx1000 chipset can support hybrid configurations with both PA RISC nPartitions and Intel Itanium 2 nPartitions in the same server complex NOTE For details and restrictions on mixing PA RISC nPartitions and Intel Itanium 2 nPartitions on HP Superdome servers based on the HP sx2000 chipset see the HP Integrity Superdome sx2000 Service Guide On Superdome hybrid servers based on the HP sx1000 chipset each nPartition must have only PA RISC processor or Intel Itanium 2 processors However both types of nPartitions can reside in the same server complex Within each PA RISC nPartition all cells must have the same processor revision level Within each Intel Itanium 2 nPartition all cells must have the same cell compatibility value Introduction to nPartitions 17 A NOTE Specific firmware operating systems and management tools are required to supported mixing PA RISC nPartitions and Intel
110. 00 Superdome SD16A SD32A and SD64A e The HP sx1000 chipset based HP Integrity Superdome server SD16A SD32A and SD64A e The HP sx2000 chipset based HP 9000 Superdome server SD16B SD32B and SD32B and SD64B e The HP sx2000 chipset based HP Integrity Superdome server SD16B SD32B and SD64B A Support Management Station SMS is connected to each HP Superdome server through the service processor private LAN port The SMS is either an HP UX workstation or an HP ProLiant system running Microsoft Windows The SMS primarily is used for support and service purposes The Windows SMS supports Windows versions of Partition Manager and the nPartition commands thus enabling remote administration of nPartitions from the SMS For details see SMS Support Management Station for HP Superdome Servers page 67 You can add up to two Superdome I O expansion cabinets to the Superdome 32 way 64 way and Superdome 64 way 128 way server models Each I O expansion cabinet has up to six additional 12 slot I O chassis Figure 2 3 shows an overview of an HP Superdome server compute cabinet Figure 2 3 HP Superdome Server Cabinet Server Hardware Details Cell Based HP Servers 57 The HP Superdome server models include e HP Superdome 16 32 Way Servers SD16000 SD16A and SD16B page 58 e HP Superdome 32 64 Way Servers SD32000 SD32A and SD32B page 58 e HP Superdome 64 128 Way Servers SD64000 SD64A and SD64B p
111. 1 Login to a system with the nPartition commands installed If using remote administration features to modify an nPartition you can login to any system with Enhanced nPartition Commands installed If removing an inactive cell from an nPartition you can use local management from any nPartition in the complex For example you can login to HP UX running on any nPartition in the same server complex If removing an active cell from an nPartition and not using remote administration features you must login to the nPartition from which the cell is to be removed 2 Issue the parstatus c command to list the current nPartition assignments and status for each cell c where is the cell number that you plan to remove from its assigned nPartition Specify each cell you plan to remove with a separate c option For example to list details on cells 0 1 and 2 issue the parstatus c0 c1 c2 command The cells must all be assigned to the same nPartition in order to remove them using a single procedure Otherwise if the cells are assigned to different nPartitions you must perform this procedure separately for each nPartition 3 Remove the cell from the nPartition to which it is assigned by using the parmodify p d command Specify the nPartition p where is the nPartition number and each cell d where is the cell number that you want to remove from the nPartition If you are performing this task using the Enhanced nPartitio
112. 1 systems List I O chassis and card slot details parstatus B command List server cabinet summaries for the complex parstatus V b command List detailed server cabinet status parstatus X command List product and serial numbers parstatus P command List a configuration summary for all nPartitions parstatus V p command List detailed nPartition configuration information parstatus wcommand List the local nPartition number frupower d Ccommand or frupower d I command List power status for all cells C or all I O chassis 1 For further details and summaries see Table 8 1 page 224 28 Getting Started with nPartitions Basics of nPartition Creation Creating an nPartition involves using an nPartition administration tool to assign one or more cells ina complex to the new nPartition At the time an nPartition is created you also can optionally specify various configuration options for the nPartition such as its name cell use on next boot values and other details After an nPartition is created you can modify the nPartition as described in Basics of nPartition Modification page 30 For detailed procedures see Chapter 6 page 165 gt NOTE When creating an nPartition follow the HP nPartition requirements and guidelines HP recommends only specific sets of nPartition configurations For nPartition configuration requirements and recommendations see C
113. 1 OS loaders are ISL and hpux Issue commands from the ISL gt prompt Types of Booting and Resetting for nPartitions A HP cell based servers provide two special types of reboot and reset for managing nPartitions performing a reboot for reconfig and performing a shutdown for reconfig The following list summarizes all types of booting rebooting and resetting that are supported for HP nPartition systems See the Reboot for Reconfig and Shutdown for Reconfig State items for a discussion of these nPartition specific boot processes NOTE You can perform the Windows shutdown tasks either by using the shutdown command or by using the Start Shut Down action Reboot A reboot shuts down the operating system and reboots the nPartition On HP 9000 systems only the active cells in the nPartition are reset On HP Integrity systems all cells are reset To perform a standard reboot of an nPartition use the HP UX shutdown r command the Windows shutdown r command the Linux shutdown r time command or the OpenVMS SYS SYSTEM SHUTDOWN with an automatic system reboot Halt A halt shuts down the operating system halts all processing on the nPartition and does not reboot To halt the operating system use the HP UX shutdown h command To reboot an nPartition that was halted from HP UX use the RS command from the service processor Command menu Halting the system is supported only on HP 9000 servers On HP Integrity serve
114. 227 7013 for DOD agencies and subparagraphs c 1 and c 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 for other agencies HEWLETT PACKARD COMPANY 3000 Hanover Street Palo Alto California 94304 U S A Table of Contents About This DOGURIEM licstecsrcescstesernedetsaoaunversendseinosenssuccunan edeaincensssdocniss deinchaneddasoaaseunDexesanbuts 11 New and Changed Information in This Editioniw ccsscuiaszis gantesierceigcenysdonteousesd tuyenncesunncabe cde aaubdeaketns 11 Document Organization ces cette eat aerate neem pee a a ee 11 Typographic ConventioN hc een ese PO e ce eee POO e OR A PSRs AE ROE PCr or eee aren Se 12 Related Information eccdcdccceciacctecoetis tte vncdestethoss a e a aaan aa aa aaa biecbadeteeoneles tes 13 P blishing FIStOLY siya eka ose coat oss eea a veep seemern set valeeel divas neberecirectatunel evade a ia 13 HP Encourages Your Comments ieia is ie a ae eas bons sk anew hens notes aea e aai 13 1 Getting Started with nPartitions sssssssssssessssessssessseessseessseesssresssreessreessreessreessseesssee 15 Introduction to nPartitions ccccccccccccccsessscccsesesccseesssccseeessceseeussscsseuscesseusssessusesssssusssseseuessseesuesseeeenss 15 Operating Systems Supported on NPAT tonsa chacsctdass gota ed cd ict oie raage uate tia aaah 15 HP Server S ppott for Te art MOMS sissies inisa sieri E E EEE aE ii Eakas 16 HP Superdome Hybrid Servers Intel Itanium 2
115. 6K A Management Processor c Copyright 1995 2001 Hewlett Packard Co All Rights Reserved Version 0 23 MP MAIN MENU CO Consoles VFP Virtual Front Panel CM Command Menu CL Console Logs SL Show chassis Logs HE Help X Exit Connection MP gt Procedure 4 1 Logging in to a Service Processor This procedure connects to and logs in to the service processor MP or GSP for a server complex by using telnet to access the customer LAN If connecting through the local RS 232 port skip Step 1 instead establish a direct cable connection and begin with Step 2 Use the telnet command on a remote system to connect to the service processor for the server complex You can connect directly from the command line for example telnet sdome g or run telnet first and then issue the open command for example open sdome g at the telnet gt prompt All telnet commands and escape options are supported while you are connected to the service processor Login using your service processor user account name and password GSP login Username GSP password Password Accessing and Using the Service Processor 75 3 Use the service processor menus and commands as needed and log out when done To log out select the Exit Connection menu item from the Main menu enter X at the GSP gt prompt or MP gt prompt You also can terminate a login session by issuing the telnet escape key sequence type Control right bracket and ent
116. 8420 model which supports up to four cells in a server complex e HP 9000 rp7420 model which supports up to two cells in a server complex The following third generation cell based HP 9000 servers use the HP sx2000 chipset For details see sx2000 Chipset for HP Servers page 49 e HP 9000 Superdome servers including the SD16B SD32B and SD64B models These models support up to 16 cells in a server complex e HP 9000 rp8440 model which supports up to four cells in a server complex e HP 9000 rp7440 model which supports up to two cells in a server complex For details see Server Hardware Details Cell Based HP Servers page 51 HP Integrity Servers HP Integrity servers have Intel Itanium 2 processors The Intel Itanium processor family architecture was co developed by Hewlett Packard and Intel Cell based HP Integrity servers use either the HP sx1000 chipset or the HP sx2000 chipset The following cell based HP Integrity servers use the HP sx1000 chipset for details see sx1000 Chipset for HP Servers page 49 e HP Integrity Superdome servers include the SD16A SD32A and SD64A models These models support up to 16 cells in a server complex e The HP Integrity rx8620 model supports up to four cells in a server complex e The HP Integrity rx7620 model supports up to two cells in a server complex The following cell based HP Integrity servers use the HP sx2000 chipset for details see sx200
117. Booting and Resetting nPartitions Issue the shutdown command with the appropriate command line options The command line options you specify dictate the way in which HP UX is shut down whether the nPartition is rebooted and whether any nPartition configuration changes adding or removing cells take place Use the following list to choose an HP UX shutdown option for your nPartition e Shut down HP UX and halt the nPartition On HP 9000 servers only issue the shutdown h command to shut down and halt the nPartition This leaves the nPartition and all its cells in an active state after HP UX shuts down and halts To reboot a halted nPartition you must reset the nPartition using the RS command at the GSP command menu On cell based HP Integrity servers the shutdown h command puts an nPartition into the shutdown for reconfig state for details refer to the discussion of shutdown R Hin this list e Shut down HP UX and reboot the nPartition Issue the shutdown r command to shut down and reboot the nPartition On cell based HP Integrity servers the shutdown r command is equivalent to the shutdown R command e Perform a reboot for reconfig of the nPartition Issue the HP UX shutdown R command to perform a reboot for reconfig This shuts down HP UX reconfigures the nPartition if needed and reboots the nPartition e Reboot the nPartition and put it into the shutdown for reconfig state Use the HP UX shutdown R Hcommand to hold t
118. Booting to the HP UX Initial System Loader ISD scsess sok esicrtesscseeancetsvteenarienpstesntitecensuesterie testers isan 149 Booting to the HP UX Loader HPUX EFI ssesesssesssessseseessesseeseesseenseseesseeneeseessesneeseerseenseseesseesseenes 150 Using LP WX Toader Commands csostiesisisundsntes sebeiaesinencba toestecacintentoe e e aE aE 151 HPUX EFL Boot Loader Commands ccccccccccccccccsssccccccssccsscecsccsscessccssceusccsseuuecesseesessseeueessseuueeess 151 HPUX Boot Loader Commands Issued from ISL cccccccssessesecececececceaeeeseececececeaueneeeeceeeeeeeaaes 151 Booting to the Linux Loader ELILO EFI siirsi sss veshencictasns Sixes onvetel vibe Gevesyer cuales varcteiwivelbiibetvecce 152 Emux Boot Op hon Managements ioio eti n EE E evans taped a E ements 153 Linux Loader Configuration File GlUO COmME s ccsijuvescashesvters yetusteideeceerabevezcahayeiterguycestente Waxtoes 153 Using Linux Loader ELILO Command S ssssessssissiseesserssisessserssrsnssserssissreseenseesteserseenesnesseensesres 154 Configuring Boot Paths and OptionS e sesssesssssessserssissseseessessresesseesrisrerseesuesresseissisnesserssiesesseessees 155 Configuring Au toboot Options ssssvessis esiis aina ieaS EA SE a EEEE 158 Table of Contents 5 Configuring Boot Time System Leste x teciastvocuvetv seach vesudova caveubnat vote naw meee Sesuleta umlebonarouinsenenrsmpdvem 161 6 Creating and Configuring mPartitions
119. Check the VFP status to see whether any cabinet hardware is running an operating system OS Any nPartition whose state is OS heartbeat is running an OS and thus should not have its hardware powered off until after the OS is shut down Type b Control b to exit the VFP 3 Shut down the OS running on any cabinet hardware that you plan to power off 4 Confirm that nobody else is using or servicing the cabinet hardware you plan to power on or off Both physically inspect the hardware and check whether others are remotely accessing the service processor using the WHO command at the Command menu 5 Access the service processor Command menu issue the PE command then select the cabinet to power on or power off From the service processor Main menu enter CM to access the Command menu To exit the Command menu enter MA When using the PE command enter B to power on or off a cabinet specify the cabinet number and then enter ON power on OFF power off or Q quit without changing the power status GSP CM gt PE This command controls power enable to a hardware device Cabinet Cell IO Chassis Select Device b HAW Enter cabinet number 1 The power state is ON for Cabinet 1 In what state do you want the power ON OFF Powering Cells and I O Chassis On and Off You can power on or power off cells and I O chassis by using any one of the following procedures e Powering Cells and I O Chassis On and Off Service
120. Configuration Data On HP Integrity servers the P option unlocks the write lock that controls write access to a modifiable copy of the Stable Complex Configuration Data See also the s option A Unlock the Stable Complex Configuration Data Dynamic Complex Configuration Data and the Partition Configuration Data for all nPartitions in the complex On HP Integrity servers the A option unlocks both the read lock and write lock for the Stable Complex Configuration Data Canceling Pending Changes to the Complex Profile You can cancel a pending change to the Stable Complex Configuration Data for a cell based server by unlocking the the Stable Complex Configuration Data before the service processor has pushed out the revised data for the entry For example you can abort a cell assignment change when you have issued a request to unassign an active cell but manually unlock the effected Complex Profile entries before performing a reboot for reconfig of the nPartition to which the cell originally is assigned For background details see Complex Profile page 36 A CAUTION You should generally avoid manually unlocking Complex Profile entries because doing so can can result in the loss of configuration changes Procedure 6 26 Aborting Cell Assignment Changes You can cancel a pending change to an active cell by using this procedure Only changes involving the unassignment deletion of an active cell from an nPartition can practic
121. Distributed with the HP UX 11i v1 B 11 11 December 2004 release and later e Available for Windows 32 bit and Windows 64 bit Distributed with the Smart Setup CD e Available for Red Hat Enterprise Linux and SuSE Linux Enterprise Server Distributed with the HP Integrity Essentials Foundation Pack for Linux Table 1 4 describes the nPartition configuration commands and lists sections where you can find each command s syntax and details Table 1 4 nPartition Commands Descriptions Command parcreate parmodify Description Create a new nPartition root or IPMILAN access is required See parcreate Command page 249 Modify an existing nPartition root or IPMI LAN access is required See parmodify Command page 252 parremove Remove an existing nPartition root or IPMI LAN access is required See parremove Command page 256 parstatus Display nPartition information and hardware details for a server complex See parstatus Command page 258 parunlock Unlock Complex Profile data use this command with caution root or IPMI LAN access is required See parunlock Command page 260 fruled Blink the attention indicators LEDs or turn them off This command can control these indicators for cells I O chassis and cabinet numbers See fruled Command page 262 frupower Display status or turn power on or off for cells and I O chassis
122. EFI HP UX 11i adds an HP UX 11i item as the first entry in the boot options list See the help bcfg command for details 4 Exit the console and management processor interfaces if you are finished using them To exit the EFI environment press B Control B this exits the system console and returns to the management processor Main Menu To exit the management processor type X at the Main Menu Booting HP UX A This section covers the following methods of booting HP UX e HP UX Booting page 110 The standard ways to boot HP UX Typically this results in booting HP UX in multiuser mode e Single User Mode HP UX Booting page 114 How to boot HP UX in single user mode e LVM Maintenance Mode HP UX Booting page 116 How to boot HP UX in LVM maintenance mode Refer to Shutting Down HP UX page 117 for details on shutting down the HP UX OS CAUTION ACPI Configuration for HP UX Must Be default On cell based HP Integrity servers to boot the HP UX OS an nPartition must have its ACPI configuration value set to default At the EFI Shell interface enter the acpiconfig command with no arguments to list the current ACPI configuration If the acpiconfig value is not set to default then HP UX cannot boot in this situation you must reconfigure acpiconfig or booting will be interrupted with a panic when launching the HP UX kernel To set the ACPI configuration for HP UX At the EFI Shell interface e
123. EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If at another EFI menu select the Exit option from the sub menus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading From the EFI Boot Manager menu select the EFI Shell menu option to access the EFI Shell environment At the EFI Shell environment use the befg command to manage the boot options list for the local nPartition The bcfg command include the following options for managing the boot options list e bcfg boot dump Display all items in the boot options list for the local nPartition e bcfg boot rm Remove the item number specified by from the boot options list e bcfg boot mv a b Move the item number specified by a to the position specified by b in the boot options list e bcfg boot add file efi Description Add anew boot option to the position in the boot options list specified by The new boot option references file efi and is listed with the title specified by Description See the help bcfg command for details Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the EFI environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 5 58 Configuring Boot Paths and Options HP UX From the HP UX command line you can configure boot options for an nPartition by using the usr sbin setboot or usr sb
124. ER_OFF shutdown option 3 Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CM to access the Command Menu 4 At the service processor Command menu enter the RR command specify which nPartition is to be reset and confirm whether to reset it to the shutdown for reconfig state The service processor RR command resets all cells in the nPartition performs any nPartition reconfigurations and halts all cells at a boot is blocked state thus making the nPartition and all its cells inactive Be certain to select the correct nPartition to be reset If you are accessing the service processor using a single partition user account the RR command selects which nPartition is to be reset the nPartition that your account allows you to access If using an operator or administrator account you can select which nPartition in the server complex you want to reset 5 To exit the service processor Command Menu enter MA to return to the service processor Main Menu At the Main Menu enter X to exit the service processor interface 144 Booting and Resetting nPartitions A A Procedure 5 43 Shutting Down to Shutdown for Reconfig Windows From the Windows command line issue the shutdown s command or select the Start Shut Down action and choose Shut down from the pull down menu to shut an nPartition down to a shutdown for reconfig inactive state or power off the nPartition hardware CAUTION Do not shut down Windows using Special Adm
125. F as needed The DIMMs in the rank or echelon are lettered A to D For example rank 0 includes DIMMs 0A OB 0C and OD echelon 1 has DIMMs 1A and 1B After the DIMM configuration is changed the nPartition in which it resides must be rebooted to use the new configuration e BCH Menu Service Menu DIMMDEALLOC command DIMMDEALLOC cell dimm OFF deconfigures the specified DIMM dimm on the cell cell indicated DIMMDEALLOC cell dimm ON configures the DIMM on the cell Use DIMMDEALLOC cell to display the DIMM configuration for the specified cell e EFI Shell dimmconfig command dimmconfig cell dimm OFF deconfigures the specified DIMM dimm on the cell cell indicated dimmconfig cell dimm ON configures the DIMM on the cell Use dimmconfig cell to display the DIMM configuration for the specified cell See Configuring and Deconfiguring Memory DIMMs page 220 Complex Health e Complex health analysis provides both an evaluation of the complex hardware and Analysis of a Server an evaluation its nPartition configurations e Partition Manager Use the Complex Analyze Complex Health action See Complex Health Analysis of a Server page 222 204 Managing Hardware Resources Powering Server Cabinets On and Off You can power on or power off server cabinets by using any one of the following procedures e Powering Server Cabinets On and Off Cabinet Power Switch page 205 e P
126. FI menu choose the Exit option from the submenus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading 2 At the EFI Boot Manager menu choose an item from the boot options list Each item in the boot options list references a specific boot device and provides a specific set of boot options or arguments to be used when booting the device 3 Press Enter to initiate booting using the chosen boot option 4 Exit the console and management processor interfaces if you are finished using them To exit the EFI environment press B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the management processor Main Menu To exit the management processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 5 9 HP UX Booting EFI Shell From the EFI Shell environment to boot HP UX on a device first access the EFI System Partition for example fs0 for the root device and then enter HPUX to initiate the loader The EFI Shell is available only on HP Integrity servers Refer to ACPI Configuration for HP UX Must Be default page 110 for required configuration details 112 Booting and Resetting nPartitions Access the EFI Shell environment for the nPartition on which you want to boot HP UX Log in to the management processor MP and enter CO to access the Console list Choose the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If you are at another EFI menu choose t
127. GSP utility hardware is an independent support system for cell based servers It provides a way for you to connect to a server complex and perform administration or monitoring tasks for the server hardware and its nPartitions The main features of the service processor include e Command Menu e nPartition Consoles e Console Logs e Chassis Code Viewer on HP 9000 servers with HP PA 8700 processors or Event Log Viewer on servers based on the HP sx1000 chipset or HP sx2000 chipset e Virtual Front Panels live displays of nPartition and cell states These features are described in more detail in Service Processor MP or GSP Features page 68 The service processor is available when its cabinet has standby power even if the main 48 volt cabinet power switch is turned off Access to the service processor is restricted by user accounts Each user account is password protected and provides a specific level of access to the server complex and service processor commands SMS Support Management Station for HP Superdome Servers 67 Multiple users can independently interact with the service processor because each service processor login session is private However some output is mirrored the Command menu and each nPartition console permit one interactive user at a time and mirror output to all users accessing those features Likewise the service processor mirrors live chassis codes to all users accessing the Live Chassis Logs feature
128. HP servers built around the HP sx2000 chipset include management processor MP support for access to the server using IPMI over LAN For details see Remote and Local Management of nPartitions page 41 Model Identifiers for Machine Hardware The machine hardware model identifies the server hardware type sx1000 Chipset for HP Servers 49 50 A summary of the supported cell based servers and their corresponding model identifiers appears in Server Hardware Details Cell Based HP Servers page 51 You can report the machine hardware model for the local server complex using the following methods e From HP UX 11i use either the usr bin model command or the usr bin getconf MACHINE MODEL command e From the Windows command line use the systeminfo command to report system details including the system model Different methods are used to establish the machine hardware model on HP 9000 servers and HP Integrity servers e For HP 9000 servers the reported machine hardware model is the Model String component of the Stable Complex Configuration Data e For HP Integrity servers the machine hardware model is based on the Creator Manufacturer and Creator Product Name complex wide settings On OEM versions of cell based HP Integrity servers the OEM Manufacturer and OEM Product Name are the machine hardware model if they are set See Complex Profile page 36 for details on the Model String and Creator complex wide setting
129. I Boot Manager heading From the EFI Boot Manager menu select the EFI Shell menu option to access the EFI Shell environment 190 Creating and Configuring nPartitions A 2 Usethecellconfig command to list or set the use on next boot value for each cell e To list the use on next boot values for all cells in the nPartition issue the cellconfig command with no arguments e To change the use on next boot value for a cell issue the following command cellconfig cell on off where cell is the cell number on sets the cell use on next boot value to y yes do use the cell or of sets the cell use on next boot value to n no do not user the cell A cell that boots with a y on use on next boot value is permitted to rendezvous and join its nPartition thus becoming an active cell whose resources are used A cell that boots with a n of use on next boot value does not rendezvous and thus becomes an inactive cell whose resources are not used by its nPartition although the cell still is assigned to its nPartition 3 Reboot the nPartition to use the cells new use on next boot settings If you have changed any cell use on next boot settings for the nPartition then reboot the nPartition in either of two ways e Use the reset command at the EFI Shell to perform a reboot If you have only changed cell configurations from on to of then perform a reboot using the reset command Any cells set to not be used will still be ass
130. IB is a hardware flag on the cell board When BIB is set the cell is considered to be inactive b Firmware on the cell performs self tests and discovery operations on the cell hardware components Operations at this point include processor self tests memory tests I O Getting Started with nPartitions discovery and discovery of interconnecting fabric connections between the cell and other cells I O and system crossbars c After the firmware completes cell self tests and discovery it reports the cell hardware configuration to the service processor GSP or MP informs the service processor it is waiting at BIB and then waits for the cell BIB flag to be cleared 2 nPartition Boot Phase of the nPartition Boot Process The nPartition boot phase occurs when an nPartition is booted after its cells have completed self tests During this phase nPartition rendezvous occurs however not all cells assigned to an nPartition are required to participate in rendezvous A minimum of one core capable cell that has completed its cell boot phase is required before the nPartition boot phase can begin By default all cells assigned to the nPartition that have a y use on next boot value are expected to participate in rendezvous and the service processor will wait for up to ten minutes for all such cells to reach the waiting at BIB state Cells that have a n use on next boot value do not participate in rendezvous and remain waiting at BIB The main
131. Itanium 2 nPartitions on Superdome hybrid servers For details refer to HP Superdome Hybrid Servers which is available from the http docs hp com en hw html Web site under the HP 9000 Superdome Server and HP Integrity Superdome Server links Hardware Components of nPartition Capable Servers All hardware within a cell based server including all cells I O chassis cables cabinet hardware fans and power and utility components is considered to be a server complex Within each cell based server cabinet are one or more cells each of which contains processors and memory Each cell based server cabinet can have multiple I O chassis that provide PCI slots for I O cards T O resources also include any I O devices attached to I O cards within the I O chassis Core I O is required for each nPartition to provide console services and other boot and management abilities On first generation cell based servers and HP sx1000 chipset based servers core I O is provided by a PCI card residing in an I O chassis On HP sx2000 chipset based servers core I O is provided on each cell On all cell based servers each nPartition has only one core I O active at a time Each I O chassis connects to only one cell in the server Some cell based servers also support optional I O expansion cabinets to provide additional I O chassis An HP Superdome complex can consist of one cabinet or two server cabinets and can also include one or two I O expansion
132. Linux has shut down Issue the shutdown command with the desired command line options and include the required time argument to specify when the operating shutdown is to occur For example shutdown r 20 will shut down and reboot the system starting in 20 minutes Rebooting and Resetting nPartitions You can reboot and reset nPartitions by using any one of the following procedures A Rebooting and Resetting nPartitions Service Processor page 135 Rebooting and Resetting nPartitions BCH Menu page 136 Rebooting and Resetting nPartitions EFI Boot Manager page 136 Rebooting and Resetting nPartitions EFI Shell page 137 Rebooting and Resetting nPartitions HP UX page 137 Rebooting and Resetting nPartitions OQpenVMS page 137 Rebooting and Resetting nPartitions Windows page 138 Rebooting and Resetting nPartitions Linux page 138 When you perform a reboot or reset of an nPartition all active cells in the nPartition reboot and the nPartition returns to the system boot environment BCH or EFI On PA RISC systems any inactive cells in the nPartition are not rebooted in this procedure NOTE If possible shut down the operating system before resetting an nPartition Procedure 5 26 Rebooting and Resetting nPartitions Service Processor From the service processor issue the RS command to reset an nPartition Under normal operation you first shut down the operating
133. Main Menu 2 Boot the desired device using the BOOT command at the BCH interface and specify that the nPartition stop at the ISL prompt prior to booting reply y to the stop at the ISL prompt question Main Menu Enter command or menu gt BOOT 0 0 2 0 0 13 BCH Directed Boot Path 0 0 2 0 0 13 Do you wish to stop at the ISL prompt prior to booting y n gt gt y Initializing boot Device ISL Revision A 00 42 JUN 19 1999 ISL gt 3 From the ISL prompt issue the appropriate Secondary System Loader hpux command to boot the HP UX kernel in the desired mode Use the hpux loader to specify the boot mode options and to specify which kernel such as stand vmunix to boot on the nPartition e To boot HP UX in single user mode ISL gt hpux is boot stand vmunix e To boot HP UX at the default run level ISL gt hpux boot stand vmunix 114 Booting and Resetting nPartitions To exit the ISL prompt and return to the BCH interface issue the EXIT command instead of specifying one of the hpux loader commands Refer to the hpux 1M manpage for a detailed list of hpux loader options Example 5 1 Single User HP UX Boot ISL Revision A 00 42 JUN 19 1999 ISL gt hpux is stand vmunix Boot Gdisk 0 0 2 0 0 13 0 0 0 0 0 0 stand vmunix 8241152 1736704 1402336 start 0x21a0e8 INIT Overriding default level with level s INIT SINGLE USER MODE INIT Running sbin sh Exit the console and management processor i
134. NFIGRESET command at the BCH interface to put the nPartition in the shutdown for reconfig state then use the BO command at the service processor Command menu to boot the nPartition If you have changed any cell from OFF n do not use on next boot to ON y use the cell on next boot then you must perform these two tasks this resets and reconfigures the nPartition and boots it 5 Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the BCH environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 6 17 Setting Cell Attributes EFI Shell From the EFI Shell environment use the cel 1 config command to list or set the use on next boot value for each cell in the local nPartition The EFI Shell is available only on HP Integrity systems A NOTE Use of the cellconfig command at the EFI Shell is restricted See the help cellconfig command for details 1 Access the EFI Shell environment for the nPartition whose cell use on next boot attributes you want to list or set Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If at another EFI menu select the Exit option from the sub menus until you return to the screen with the EF
135. OpenVMS running on the system that you want to shut down You should log in to the MP for the server and use the Console menu to access the system console Accessing the console through the MP enables you to maintain console access to the system after HP OpenVMS has shut down Rebooting and Resetting nPartitions 137 2 At the OpenVMS command line issue the SYS SYSTEM SHUTDOWN command and enter Yes at the Should an automatic system reboot be performed prompt gt SYSSSYSTEM SHUTDOWN SHUTDOWN Perform an Orderly System Shutdown on node RSNVMS How many minutes until final shutdown 0 Reason for shutdown Standalone Do you want to spin down the disk volumes NO Do you want to invoke the site specific shutdown procedure YES Should an automatic system reboot be performed NO yes When will the system be rebooted shortly via automatic reboot Shutdown options enter as a comma separated list REBOOT CHECK Check existence of basic system files SAVE_FEEDBACK Save AUTOGEN feedback information from this boot DISABLE AUTOSTART Disable autostart queues POWER_OFF Request console to power off the system Shutdown options NONE SHUTDOWN I OPERATOR this terminal is now an operator s console A NOTE HP OpenVMS 164 currently does not support the POWER_OFF shutdown option Procedure 5 32 Rebooting and Resetting nPartitions Windows To reset the local nPartition from Windows issue the shutdown r command or
136. P Main menu e To force console write access type ec f Control e c f e To exit the console type b Control b to return to the Main Menu Windows Special Administration Console SAC After an nPartition has successfully loaded Microsoft Windows Server 2003 you can access a text based Windows administration interface at the nPartition console 72 Using Management Interfaces and Tools The Special Administration Console SAC interface lets you interact with the Windows operating system running on an nPartition by using the SAC gt command prompt that is provided at the nPartition console interface The SAC commands listed in Table 4 1 page 73 are provided for managing Windows The SAC interface enables you to have administrative access to Windows on an nPartition even if Windows networking is not functional Tips for using the SAC interface and a table of SAC commands follow SAC Interface Tips for Interacting with Windows Special Administration Console When using the Windows SAC interface through an nPartition console you can use the commands in Table 4 1 page 73 You also can use the following tips to help complete tasks with the SAC e To list all commands available from the SAC issue the or help command at the SAC gt prompt e To list basic identification and boot information about the instance of Windows running on the nPartition whose console you are using issue the id command e Toswitch among the chann
137. P nPartition Commands Bundle Windows Server 2003 64 Bit or choose HP nPartition Commands Bundle Windows Server 2003 32 Bit from the Utility Partition Management heading After you choose the nPartition commands bundle the HP nPartition Commands Bundle Web page displays information about the software bundle and provides options for downloading the software and for viewing the release notes 5 To view the release notes choose the Release Notes tab Read the Installation instructions section of the release notes and the features summary before downloading and installing the software Administration Tools for nPartitions 21 6 To download the Enhanced nPartition Commands for Windows choose download from the Web page Enhanced nPartition Commands for Linux The HP Integrity Essentials Foundation Pack for Linux is a CD that includes Enhanced nPartition Commands for use with Red Hat Enterprise Linux or SuSE Linux Enterprise Server Procedure 1 2 Downloading the HP Integrity Essentials Foundation Pack for Linux You can download the HP Integrity Essentials Foundation Pack for Linux from the http www hp com go softwaredepot Web site The downloadable CD image is an iso file that you can use to record a usable CD 1 Go to the http www hp com go softwaredepot Web site 2 At the Software Depot home page enter Foundation Pack for Linux in the Search field to search the Software Depot 3 At the product catalog page that displays
138. P or GSP and enter CM to access the Command Menu 2 From the Command menu enter the BO command and specify which nPartition is to be booted released from boot is blocked As a result of the BO command the service processor for the complex releases the cells assigned to the selected nPartition from boot is blocked the cells proceed to rendezvous to form an active nPartition which no longer is in the shutdown for reconfig state GSP CM gt BO This command boots the selected partition Name 0 julesoo 1 julesol Select a partition number 0 Do you want to boot partition number 0 Y I N y gt The selected partition will be booted GSP CM gt Any of the cells assigned to the nPartition that are not configured those with a n use on next boot value remain inactive at boot is blocked When the nPartition becomes active it proceeds through the normal boot process 3 To exit the service processor Command Menu enter MA to return to the service processor Main Menu At the Main Menu enter X to exit the service processor interface 146 Booting and Resetting nPartitions Procedure 5 46 Booting an Inactive nPartition nPartition Commands You can cause an inactive nPartition to be booted made active by using the parmodify command with the B option when changing the configuration of an inactive nPartition 1 Login to HP UX running on any nPartition in the server complex or login to any remote system with the En
139. Partition do not affect other nPartitions or the MP e Service Processor MP or GSP DATE command configures the MP date and time e BCH Menu Configuration menu TIME command configures the local nPartitions date and time The BCH time is set and presented in GMT Greenwich mean time e EFI Shell date command and time command configure the local nPartition date and time The EFI time is set and presented in GMT Greenwich mean time e HP UX date command configures the local nPartition date and time Use set_parms timezone to set the HP UX system time zone Restricting nPartition Configuration Privilege e NOTE nPartition Configuration Privilege is supported on servers based on the HP sx1000 chipset or HP sx2000 chipset When the nPartition Configuration Privilege for a complex is restricted the following nPartition configuration actions are prohibited except when using the MP IMPI LAN access Changes to the complex name cell assignments and cell local memory parameters Powering on off non local cells Changes to Partition Configuration Data for non local nPartitions When nPartition Configuration Privilege is unrestricted the above actions are permitted e Service Processor MP or GSP the PARPERM command restricts and unrestricts nPartition Configuration Privilege Task Summaries for Creating and Configuring nPartitions 169 Table 6 1 nPartition Configuration Task Summaries continued
140. Power Cooling tab Version 2 0 Power and Cooling tab See Listing Power Status and Power Supplies page 238 Listing Fan and Blower e Service Processor MP or GSP PS command B option for detailed fan and blower Status status for the specified cabinet e nPartition Commands parstatus B command fora summary of fans and blowers for all cabinets or parstatus V b for detailed fan and blower status for the specified cabinet b where is the cabinet number e Partition Manager Version 1 0 Details Show Complex Details action Power Cooling tab Version 2 0 Power and Cooling tab See Listing Fan and Blower Status page 240 Listing Cell Configurations You can list the cell configurations in a cell based server by using any one of the following procedures e Listing Cell Configurations Service Processor page 226 e Listing Cell Configurations nPartition Commands page 226 e Listing Cell Configurations Partition Manager page 227 Cell configuration details include the list of the cells installed in the server and cell assignments to nPartitions Procedure 8 1 Listing Cell Configurations Service Processor From the service processor Command Menu use the CP and PS commands to list cell configuration details 1 Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CM to access the Command Menu 2 At the Command Menu enter the CP comman
141. Reconfig Inactive State 143 reboot be performed prompt then access the MP and from the MP Command Menu issue the RR command and specify the nPartition that is to be shutdown for reconfig 1 Login to HP OpenVMS running on the system that you want to shut down You should log in to the MP for the server and use the Console menu to access the system console Accessing the console through the MP enables you to maintain console access to the system after HP OpenVMS has shut down 2 At the OpenVMS command line issue the SYS SYSTEM SHUTDOWN command and enter No at the Should an automatic system reboot be performed prompt gt SYSSSYSTEM SHUTDOWN SHUTDOWN Perform an Orderly System Shutdown on node RSNVMS How many minutes until final shutdown 0 Reason for shutdown Standalone Do you want to spin down the disk volumes NO Do you want to invoke the site specific shutdown procedure YES Should an automatic system reboot be performed NO no When will the system be rebooted shortly via automatic reboot Shutdown options enter as a comma separated list REBOOT CHECK Check existence of basic system files SAVE_FEEDBACK Save AUTOGEN feedback information from this boot DISABLE AUTOSTART Disable autostart queues POWER_OFF Request console to power off the system Shutdown options NONE SHUTDOWN I OPERATOR this terminal is now an operator s console A NOTE HP OpenVMS 164 currently does not support the POW
142. UX EFI loader on the device you are accessing Boot to the HP UX Boot Loader prompt HPUX gt by pressing any key within the 10 seconds given for interrupting the HP UX boot process You will use the HPUX EFI loader to boot HP UX in single user mode in the next step After you press any key the HPUX EFI interface the HP UX Boot Loader prompt HPUX gt is provided For help using the HPUX EFI loader enter the help command To return to the EFI Shell enter exit Booting and Shutting Down HP UX 115 fs0 gt hpux c Copyright 1990 2002 Hewlett Packard Company All rights reserved HP UX Boot Loader for IA64 Revision 1 723 Press Any Key to interrupt Autoboot efi hpux AUTO gt boot vmunix Seconds left till autoboot 9 User Types A Key to Stop the HP UX Boot Process and Access the HPUX EFI Loader Type help for help HPUX gt 5 At the HPUX EFI interface the HP UX Boot Loader prompt HPUX gt enter the boot is vmunix command to boot HP UX the stand vmunix kernel in single user is mode HPUX gt boot is vmunix gt System Memory 4063 MB loading section 0 cesta E doesn ght gOS ices Woes terrae ates Seton As Reis A EE EEE N AEE E complete loading section 1 A S complete loading symbol table loading System Directory boot sys to MFS loading MFSFILES Directory bootfs to MFS Launching stand vmunix SIZE Text 25953K Data 3715K BSS 3637K Total 33306K Console is on a Serial Device Booting
143. a cell type use_on next boot failure usage a m cell type use_on_next_ boot failure_usage m I IPaddress r cell r d cell d b path t path s path P PartitionName B Enhanced nPartition Commands parmodify p PartitionNumber a cell type use_on_ next boot failure _usage clm a m cell type use_on next boot failure _usage clm m I IPaddress r cell r d cell d b path t path s path P PartitionName B T flag u username h IPaddress hostname g h IPaddress hostname e The u h set of options may be specified to cause the command to send its management request using WBEM to an nPartition other than the local nPartition but can also be used as a loopback access to the local nPartition e The g h options may be specified to cause the command to send its management request using IPMI over LAN to a service processor in another server complex but can also be used as a loopback access to the service processor in the local complex The u and g options are mutually exclusive The p option is required Options The parmodify command supports the following command line options 252 nPartition Commands p PartitionNumber a dl hye ue o not bod fine uag di1 m dl hye ue o not bol fine vee L dm I IPaddress r cell Specifies the nPartition to b
144. ach boot path as desired by using the PATHFLAGS command At the BCH Configuration menu you can list the path flags boot actions for all boot path variables by entering PATHFLAGS with no arguments To set the boot action for each of the boot paths enter PATHFLAGS VAR action where VAR is the boot path variable PRI HAA or ALT and action is the boot action 0 for go to BCH 1 for boot if fail go to BCH 2 for boot if fail try next path or 3 for skip this path try next path For example to configure an nPartition to boot from the PRI device or if PRI fails to boot the HAA device use the following two BCH Configuration commands PATHFLAGS PRI 2 and PATHFLAGS HAA 1 as shown below Configuration Menu Enter command gt PATHFLAGS PRI 2 Primary Boot Path Action Boot Actions Boot from this path If unsuccessful go to next path Configuration Menu Enter command gt PATHFLAGS HAA 1 HA Alternate Boot Path Action Boot Actions Boot from this path If unsuccessful go to BCH Configuration Menu Enter command gt For other help in setting path flags enter HELP PATHFLAGS at the BCH Configuration menu prompt Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the BCH environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 5 60 Configuring Autoboot Options EFI
145. ach nPartition console can display a variety of information about the nPartition including e Partition startup shutdown and reset output e The system boot environment either Boot Console Handler BCH on HP 9000 servers or Extensible Firmware Interface EFI on HP Integrity servers The system boot environment is available when the nPartition has not yet booted an operating system and has completed Power On Self Tests POST and completed nPartition rendezvous to become active e The HP UX login prompt and console shell access A CAUTION When you use an nPartition console connection to login to an operating system running on the nPartition logout from the operating system when you have finished using it before you type B Control b to disconnect from the nPartition console If you fail to logout from the operating system console session then any other service processor user who has permission to access the nPartition could connect to the nPartition console and use the open login session Disconnecting from an nPartition console does not close any open operating system login sessions nPartition Console Access versus Direct OS Login You may need to consider the following factors when deciding whether to interact with an nPartition through the service processor console interface or a direct operating system OS login session e Whether you want to log your activity to the console log for the nPartition all console activit
146. active cells from the nPartition and whenever you need to allow an inactive cell to join the nPartition such as after changing a cell use on next boot value from n to y Procedure 5 34 Reboot for Reconfig from HP UX sbin shutdown R command From the HP UX command line use the shutdown R command to perform a reboot for reconfig for an nPartition 1 Login to HP UX running on the nPartition where you want to perform the reboot for reconfig 2 Issue the shutdown R command to perform a reboot for reconfig of the nPartition The shutdown R command shuts down HP UX reboot all cells assigned to the nPartition performs any nPartition reconfigurations and boot all cells that have y use on next boot values Procedure 5 35 Reboot for Reconfig from OpenVMS To perform a reboot for reconfig of the local nPartition from the HP OpenVMS command line issue the SYS SYSTEM SHUTDOWN command to shut down OpenVMS then enter Yes at the Should an automatic system reboot be performed prompt 1 Login to HP OpenVMS running on the system that you want to shut down You should log in to the MP for the server and use the Console menu to access the system console Accessing the console through the MP enables you to maintain console access to the system after HP OpenVMS has shut down Performing a Reboot for Reconfig 139 2 At the OpenVMS command line issue the SYS SYSTEM SHUTDOWN command and enter Yes at the Should an automatic system reboot be
147. affect other nPartitions HP provides the nPartition Configuration Privilege on sx1000 based or sx2000 based servers You can control the nPartition Configuration Privilege by using the PARPERM command at the service processor Command menu The nPartition Configuration Privilege has two settings e Unrestricted The default setting which allows the behavior described above e Restricted Restricts use of the IPMI BT interface to the following capabilities Retrieving information about the server Everything that is normally displayed by Partition Manager and the parstatus command is still available Making changes to the local nPartition s Partition Configuration Data Details on local versus remote nPartitions is provided later Manipulating any of the attention indicators LEDs Powering on off cells and I O chassis that belong to the local nPartition Restricting the nPartition Configuration Privilege does not restrict deallocation of processors across nPartition boundaries By restricting the nPartition Configuration Privilege you limit someone with superuser privileges on an nPartition to doing things that affect only that nPartition However when the nPartition Configuration Privilege is restricted certain changes can only be made by using the nPartition management tools in the mode that utilizes IPMI over LAN IPMI over LAN 42 IPMI requests can be sent to the service processor s LAN port thus eliminating th
148. age 59 Details on these models are given in the following sections HP Superdome 16 32 Way Servers SD16000 SD16A and SD16B The HP Superdome 16 way 32 way server is a single cabinet server that has from two to four cells each with four processor sockets and up to 32 DIMMs The models of HP Superdome 16 way 32 way servers are SD16000 SD16A SD16B e The HP 9000 Superdome SD16000 server has single core HP PA RISC processors The model string for the SD16000 server is 9000 800 SD16000 e The HP 9000 Superdome SD16A server has dual core HP PA RISC processors PA 8800 processors which provide two processor cores per processor socket The model string for the HP 9000 SD16A server is 9000 800 SD16A e The HP 9000 Superdome SD16B server has dual core HP PA RISC processors PA 8900 processors which provide two processor cores per processor socket The model string for the HP 9000 SD16B server is 9000 800 SD16B e The HP Integrity Superdome SD16A server has Intel Itanium 2 processors either single processor modules or HP mx2 dual processor modules Both HP mx2 dual processor modules and single Itanium 2 processors can exist in the same complex but they cannot be mixed in the same nPartition The model command output for the HP Integrity SD16A server is ia64 hp superdome server SD16A e The HP Integrity Superdome SD16B server has single core or dual core Intel Itanium 2 processors The model command output for the HP Integ
149. ager Version 2 0 select an inactive cell or I O chassis and use the Cell Power Off Cell or O Power Off Chassis action or a similar Power On action 208 Managing Hardware Resources A NOTE You can use Partition Manager to power on or off inactive cells You cannot power off active cells To power on or off cells assigned to a remote nPartition when using Partition Manager you must use Partition Manager Version 2 0 remote administration features 1 Access Partition Manager For details on accessing Partition Manager or other tools see Tools for Managing Hardware page 201 2 Select the cell or I O chassis you want to power on or off In Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the nPartition containing the item you want to power on or off then select the item In Partition Manager Version 2 0 select the cell or I O chassis that you want to power on or off 3 Select the Partition Manager action to power on or off the selected item Select the Cell Power On Cell action or select the Cell Power Off Cell action If powering on or off an I O chassis instead use the I O gt Power On or O gt Power Off actions 4 Exit Partition Manager From Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the File Exit action From Partition Manager Version 2 0 select Log off parmgr or exit the Web browser when finished Turning Attention Indicators LEDs On and Off You can turn hardware attention indicators LED
150. ailable without requiring anything to be typed e timeout tsecs Sets the timeout duration in tenths of seconds Following the timeout period either the default boot entry is selected or if no default is specified the first boot entry is selected e default name Sets the boot option entry that is selected by default The name listed must match the name specified by a label option in the same elilo conf file When no default is specified then the first boot entry is chosen if no other boot entry is requested e images kernel Specifies the Linux kernel to boot Typically the kernel specified is a vml inuz file For example the file vnlinuz 2 4 18 e 12smp is a kernel that resides on the EFI partition as efi redhat vmlinuz 2 4 18 e 12smp e label name The name defined by the label option is the identifier you can reference to invoke the boot entry for loading You can use the specified name at the ELILO boot prompt or ina default option line in the same elilo conf file to cause the boot entry to be used for loading Linux e initrd image Specifies the initial RAM disk image used to initialize and start services for booting the Linux kernel The image file typically resides on the EFI partition in the same directory as the corresponding Linux kernel file specified by the image option e read only Specifies that the root disk partition specified by the root option cannot be modified during the Linux boot process e roo
151. al shutdown 0 Reason for shutdown Standalone Do you want to spin down the disk volumes NO Do you want to invoke the site specific shutdown procedure YES Should an automatic system reboot be performed NO yes When will the system be rebooted shortly via automatic reboot Shutdown options enter as a comma separated list REBOOT CHECK Check existence of basic system files SAVE_FEEDBACK Save AUTOGEN feedback information from this boot DISABLE AUTOSTART Disable autostart queues POWER_OFF Request console to power off the system Shutdown options NONE SHUTDOWN I OPERATOR this terminal is now an operator s console EY NOTE HP OpenVMS 164 currently does not support the POWER_OFF shutdown option The SYS SYSTEM SHUTDOWN COM command prompts establish the shutdown behavior including the shutdown time and whether the system is rebooted after it is shut down e To perform a reboot for reconfig from OpenVMS 164 running on an nPartition issue SYSSSYSTEM SHUTDOWN COM from OpenVMS and then enter Yes at the Should an automatic system reboot be performed prompt e To perform a shutdown for reconfig of an nPartition running OpenVMS 164 first issue SYSS SSYSTEM SHUTDOWN COM from OpenVMS and enter No at the Should an automatic system reboot be performed prompt then access the MP and from the MP Command Menu issue the RR command and specify the nPartition that is to be shutdown for reconfig Booting and Shu
152. all cells are in a boot is blocked state The normal OS shutdown behavior on these servers depends on the ACPI configuration for the nPartition You can run the acpiconfig command with no arguments to check the current ACPI configuration setting however softpowerdown information is displayed only when different from normal behavior To change the nPartition behavior when an OS is shut down and halted use either the acpiconfig enable softpowerdown EFI Shell command or the acpiconfig disable softpowerdown command and then reset the nPartition to make the ACPI configuration change take effect acpiconfig enable softpowerdown When set on HP rx7620 rx7640 rx8620 and rx8640 servers acpiconfig enable softpowerdown causes nPartition hardware to be Overview of nPartition System Booting 93 94 powered off when the OS issues a shutdown for reconfig command for example shutdown hor shutdown s This is the normal behavior on HP rx7620 rx7640 rx8620 and rx8640 servers with a windows ACPI configuration setting When softpowerdown is enabled on HP rx7620 rx7640 rx8620 and rx8640 servers if one nPartition is defined in the server then halting the OS powers off the server cabinet including all cells and I O chassis On HP rx7620 rx7640 rx8620 and rx8640 servers with multiple nPartitions halting the OS from an nPartition with softpowerdown enabled causes only the resources on the local nPartition to be powered off To power
153. all hardware and nPartitions See Command Reference for Service Processor Commands page 80 e EFI Boot Manager and EFI Shell On HP Integrity servers only the EFI Extensible Firmware Interface Boot Manager and Shell are the methods for interacting with an nPartition before it has booted an operating system See Command Reference for EFI Shell Commands page 81 e Boot Console Handler BCH Menu Commands On PA RISC servers the BCH interface is the method for interacting with an nPartition before it has booted an operating system See Command Reference for BCH Menu Commands page 84 e nPartition Commands HP nPartition commands allow you to configure manage and monitor nPartitions and hardware within a server complex The Enhanced nPartition Commands also can remotely manage complexes based on the HP sx1000 chipset or HP sx2000 chipset See Commands for Configuring nPartitions page 19 for details e Partition Manager opt parmgr bin parmgr Partition Manager provides a graphical interface for managing and monitoring nPartitions and hardware within a server complex See Partition Manager page 22 Task Summaries for Creating and Configuring nPartitions Table 6 1 describes the main nPartition configuration tasks and provides brief summaries and references for detailed procedures You can perform the tasks in Table 6 1 nPartition Configuration Task Summaries using various tools in
154. ally be canceled 1 After issuing a request to unassign an active cell from its nPartition do not perform a shutdown or reset of the nPartition When the cell assignment of an active cell is pending the Stable Complex Configuration Data is not pushed out until the cell is at the boot is blocked BIB state which occurs during a reboot for reconfig or shutdown for reconfig of its nPartition 2 Issue a request to unlock the Stable Complex Configuration Data for the server where the cell assignment change is pending Use one of the the procedures given in Unlocking Complex Profile Entries page 198 Canceling Pending Changes to the Complex Profile 199 200 7 Managing Hardware Resources This chapter covers the procedures for managing the hardware resources in nPartitions and their server complexes The topics covered include power and LED attention indicator management hardware configuration and deconfiguration and analysis of the current complex status Tools for Managing Hardware You can list and manage server hardware using the following tools Service Processor MP or GSP Menus Service processor menus provide a complex wide service interface that can allow access to all hardware and nPartitions See Command Reference for Service Processor Commands page 80 EFI Boot Manager and EFI Shell On HP Integrity servers only the EFI Extensible Firmware Interface Boot Manager and Shell are the methods
155. alue The contents are optional in syntax If the contents are a list separated by you must choose one of the items The contents are required in syntax If the contents are a list separated by you must choose one of the items The preceding element can be repeated an arbitrary number of times Separates items in a list of choices A warning calls attention to important information that if not understood or followed will result in personal injury or nonrecoverable system problems A caution calls attention to important information that if not understood or followed will result in data loss data corruption or damage to hardware or software This alert provides essential information to explain a concept or to complete a task A note contains additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text Related Information You can find information on nPartition server hardware management operating system administration and diagnostic support tools in the following publications and Web sites Web Site for HP Technical Documentation http docs hp com The HP Technical Documentation Web site is at http docs hp com and has complete information available for free Server Hardware Information http docs hp com hpux hw The systems hardware portion of the docs hp com Web site is at http docs hp com hpux hw It provides server hardware management information including site preparation and installation
156. alue for each cell e To list the use on next boot values for all cells in the nPartition issue the CELLCONFIG command with no arguments e To change a cell use on next boot value issue the following command CELLCONFIG cell ON OFF Woo where cell is the cell number ON sets the cell use on next boot value to y yes do use the cell or OFF sets the cell use on next boot value to n no do not user the cell A cell that boots with a y ON use on next boot value is permitted to rendezvous and join its nPartition thus becoming an active cell whose resources are used A cell that boots with a n OFF use on next boot value does not rendezvous and thus becomes an inactive cell whose resources are not used by its nPartition although the cell still is assigned to its nPartition Configuring and Deconfiguring Cells 213 4 Reboot the nPartition to use the cells new use on next boot settings If you have changed any cell use on next boot settings for the nPartition then reboot the nPartition in either of two ways e Use the REBOOT command at the BCH interface to perform a reboot If you have only changed cell configurations from ON to OFF then perform a reboot using the REBOOT command Any cells set to not be used will still be assigned to the nPartition but will not be used will not rendezvous in the nPartition e Use the RECONFIGRESET command at the BCH interface to put the nPartition in the shutdown for reconfig state
157. anced nPartition Commands only Unlocks the Dynamic Complex Configuration Data of the target complex c cell Enhanced nPartition Commands only Unlocks the cell data of the specified cell P Enhanced nPartition Commands only Cancels any pending changes to the Stable Complex Configuration Data of the target complex 260 nPartition Commands u username h I Paddress hostname This option differs slightly for the Original nPartition Commands and Enhanced nPartition Commands releases e For the Original nPartition Commands release A unlocks the Stable Complex Configuration Data and the Partition Configuration Data of all the nPartitions in the complex e For the Enhanced nPartition Commands release A unlocks the Complex Configuration Data the Dynamic Complex Configuration Data and the Partition Configuration Data of all the nPartitions in the target complex Enhanced nPartition Commands only Specifies the account and authorization to access an nPartition other than the local nPartition The h option is required if this option is used username specifies a configured user name on the target nPartition Enhanced nPartition Commands only Allows access to the complex specified by the h option The accessed complex is then considered the target complex Access is through the service processor LAN port The h option is required if this option is used Enhanced nPartition Commands only This option is only used in comb
158. and it should be on the device you are accessing 130 Booting and Resetting nPartitions 3 At the EFI Shell environment use the bc g command to manage the boot options list The bcfg command includes the following options for managing the boot options list e bcfg boot dump Display all items in the boot options list for the system e bcefg boot rm Remove the item number specified by from the boot options list e bcfg boot mv a b Move the item number specified by a to the position specified by b in the boot options list e bcfg boot add file efi Description Add anew boot option to the position in the boot options list specified by The new boot option references file efi and is listed with the title specified by Description For example bcfg boot add 1 EFI redhat elilo efi Red Hat Enterprise Linux adds a Red Hat Enterprise Linux item as the first entry in the boot options list Likewise bcfg boot add 1 efi SuSE elilo efi SLES 9 addsa SuSE Linux item as the first entry in the boot options list See the help bcfg command for details 4 Exit the console and management processor interfaces if you are finished using them To exit the EFI environment press B Control B this exits the system console and returns to the management processor Main Menu To exit the management processor type X at the Main Menu Booting Red Hat Enterprise Linux You can boot the Red Hat Enterprise Linux OS on HP Integrity se
159. and PA RISC nPartition Mixing 17 Hardware Components of nPartition Capable Serversi w2 biota ee alien ids 18 Administration Tools for nPartitions cc c cccccccccccssesccceesssccceesssccseeesceseuessessusesseseusesssseeneesessuesceeeuess 18 Commands for Configuring nPar aims uicesscss sieved vancshessngseveanvicneuny sbsuee annessbadtvevnadsusesuearsdbnieed nest 19 Availability of nPartition OMimniaM swig yctastis ses scence cate pltbeah sec uabin cok aye isenedote ean cdeoten cel xis 21 Enhanced nPartitions Commands for WindOWS cccccccccceccccceesscscceecssccesesssceusessseuuseesseuueess 21 Enhanced nPartition Commands for Linux cccccccccccccccccceeeccccessescceuecesscesessscesecsseuusessseuueeess 22 Paper Gn IM aria Oty escrin are ieies eohi eieo Ae p tiene van aves ers eo gunned vendeona a Aaa uve Ees 22 Partition Manager Version 2 0 for WinOWSccseeicocterre hate tei ceatek ies tdeereat seater ote al 23 Parution ye ROP Ores sen aiet instead ioe eS ae ae eel ee earns 23 Poro Horn NADOS SemNet A A e E A a TE Ea A A EA 24 Assigned and Unassigned Cellssceniunnseicinenen in a Aa siete pide E E E T 24 Base Co eR a eA EA E E EA R 24 Core Ce nn a T RAE a I cet T a A E TAa ase 24 Active and Inactive Celen iea E Ea A AARATI E EAE aE EA AAA EEEE 25 Cell Local Memory nikiirear conn as a Ea a neon SE E E E NE AN NES 25 Cell Property Detailseite erea EOE e EEA ANS Ea E a E aE E AE S E yee 25 Active and Inactive nPartition Boot
160. any cell use the Show Details button From Partition Manager Version 2 0 select the Cells tab to view details about all cells in the complex including processor details 3 Exit Partition Manager From Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the File Exit action From Partition Manager Version 2 0 select Log off parmgr or exit the Web browser when finished Listing Memory Configurations You can list memory configurations by using any one of the following procedures e Listing Memory Configurations Service Processor page 229 e Listing Memory Configurations BCH Menu page 229 e Listing Memory Configurations EFI Shell page 230 e Listing Memory Configurations nPartition Commands page 230 e Listing Memory Configurations Partition Manager page 231 Memory configuration details include summaries of the total memory in a cell or nPartition the amounts of interleaved memory and cell local memory where supported per cell or nPartition and the number and locations of memory modules DIMMs within the cells in a server complex Procedure 8 9 Listing Memory Configurations Service Processor From the service processor Command Menu use the PS command to list details about the cell whose memory configuration you want to view 1 Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CM to access the Command Menu 2 At the Command Menu enter the PS command select the C option and specify the
161. ardware Resources Use the ruled command and either the rad command HP UX B 11 11 or the olrad command HP UX B 11 23 and HP UX B 11 31 to manage turn on off or blink the attention indicator for a system hardware component From the command line you can manage LEDs for the following hardware components e Cells Use fruled to blink or turn off a cell attention indicator Turn Off The fruled f c command turns off the attention indicator for the specified cell c To turn off all cell attention indicators use the fruled f C command Blink The fruled o c command blinks the attention indicator for the specified cell c e I O Chassis Use fruled to blink or turn off HP Superdome I O chassis attention indicators Specify the I O chassis using cabinet bay chassis notation Turn Off The fruled f 1i command turns off the attention indicator for the specified I O chassis i To turn off all I O chassis attention indicators use the fruled f I command Blink The fruled o i command blinks the attention indicator for the specified I O chassis i e Cabinet Numbers Use f ruled to blink or not blink keep lit the cabinet number LCD for an HP Superdome cabinet Not Blink The fruled f b command stops blinking keeps it lit the cabinet number LCD for the specified cabinet b Blink The fruled o b command blinks the cabinet number LCD for the specified cabinet b
162. artition capable servers each cell attention indicator is located on the cell hardware to the outside of the power LEDs for the cell e 1 OChassis LEDs On HP Superdome servers only each I O chassis has a attention indicator which is located on the cabinet above the I O chassis e PCI Card Slot LEDs On all HP nPartition systems each PCI card slot has an attention indicator that you can use to select the card slot You can view the attention indicator for a PCI card slot when accessing the card cage On HP rp7405 rp7410 rp7420 rx7620 rp8400 rp8420 and rx8620 servers only you also can view the attention indicator for each PCI slot beneath the corresponding slot on the external chassis at the rear of the server cabinet e Cabinet Number LCDs On HP Superdome servers only each cabinet has a cabinet number LCD that serves as the attention indicator for the cabinet A NOTE The cabinet attention light on HP s nPartition capable servers is not user controllable The cabinet attention light automatically turns on when one or more alert level 6 or higher chassis codes has been recorded in the error logs and has not yet been read This light automatically turns off when a user enters the service processor GSP or MP chassis logs or event logs viewer Procedure 7 6 Turning Attention Indicators On and Off nPartition Commands From the command line you can turn attention indicators on or off by using the fruled command the rad com
163. artition commands releases the Original nPartition Commands and the Enhanced nPartition Commands The nPartition commands include parcreate parmodify parremove parstatus parunlock fruled frupower and cplxmodify Table 1 4 nPartition Commands Descriptions briefly describes each of the commands When using these commands specify cells and I O chassis using the notations in Specifying Cells and I O Chassis to Commands page 243 Administration Tools for nPartitions 19 Remote management using the commands is supported as described in Specifying Remote Management Options to Commands page 247 Table 1 3 nPartition Commands Releases Original nPartition Commands Support only local management of nPartitions and complexes Were distributed with HP UX 11i v1 B 11 11 releases prior to the December 2004 release Supported by HP UX kernels built with nPartition support enabled the hd_fabric driver and use the libfab 1 library Installed as part of the HP UX 11i Version 1 operating system installation prior to the December 2004 release Enhanced nPartition Commands Support both local management and remote management of nPartitions and complexes Distributed with the HP UX 11i v3 B 11 31 release Installed and supported for use on all systems that run HP UX 11i Version 3 Distributed with the HP UX 11i v2 B 11 23 release Installed and supported for use on all systems that run HP UX 11i Version 2
164. artition tools when used on nPartitions in an sx1000 based or sx2000 based server but not when used on nPartitions in the first generation cell based servers Remote Management Using WBEM WBEM enables one form of remote management of an nPartition complex using nPartition management tools WBEM client applications that are running on one system to communicate with the nPartition Provider a WBEM agent running on an nPartition in the complex to be managed When performing remote management using WBEM the following terminology is used e The complex being managed is referred to as a remote complex because it is remote with respect to the system where the tools are being run e The remote complex is also the target complex as it is the complex that will be affected by any changes requested by the tools e The nPartition that the tools communicate with using WBEM is referred to as a remote nPartition because it is remote with respect to the system where the tools are being run e If the tools are used to retrieve information about or to make a change to a specific nPartition in the target complex then that nPartition is the target nPartition The target nPartition and the remote nPartition might be the same but don t have to be the same nPartition For example the parmodify command could be used in a way where it sends requests to an nPartition in the target complex but the p option identifies a different nPartition to be modified
165. artitions 2 Boot the desired device using the BOOT command at the BCH interface and specify that the nPartition stop at the ISL prompt prior to booting reply y to the stop at the ISL prompt question 3 From the ISL prompt issue the appropriate Secondary System Loader hpux command to boot the HP UX kernel in the desired mode To boot HP UX in LVM maintenance mode ISL gt hpux lm boot stand vmunix 4 Exit the console and management processor interfaces if you are finished using them To exit the BCH environment press B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the management processor Main Menu To exit the management processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 5 13 LVM Maintenance Mode HP UX Booting EFI Shell From the EFI Shell environment boot in LVM maintenance mode by stopping the boot process at the HPUX EFI interface the HP UX Boot Loader prompt HPUX gt entering the boot 1m vmunix command The EFI Shell is available only on HP Integrity servers Refer to ACPI Configuration for HP UX Must Be default page 110 for required configuration details 1 Access the EFI Shell environment for the nPartition on which you want to boot HP UX in LVM maintenance mode Log in to the management processor MP and enter CO to access the Console list Choose the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If you are at another EFI m
166. ase locks as needed when modifying Complex Profile entries You do not directly manage Complex Profile locks under normal circumstances but you can force an entry to be unlocked if required How the Complex Profile is Updated A server Complex Profile is updated when you use one of the nPartition administration tools such as Partition Manager or commands to create modify or delete an nPartition or modify complex wide data The general process by which changes to the Complex Profile occur is as follows 1 An administrator uses an nPartition administration tool to request that a specific configuration change occurs This is a request to create modify or delete an nPartition or modify complex wide data such as the complex name 2 The tool acquires a lock from the service processor MP or GSP for the Complex Profile entry that will be revised The lock ensures that no other changes to the Complex Profile entry will occur while the tool revises it If the entry already is locked that Complex Profile entry cannot be updated and the request will fail and the tool exits with an error message 3 The tool reads the Complex Profile entry whose lock it has acquired 4 The tool revises the Complex Profile entry according to the administrator request Complex Profile 37 5 The tool sends the revised Complex Profile entry back to the service processor along with the corresponding lock key 6 The service processor then pushes out t
167. ation boottest Set view BootTest bits dbprofile Display modify direct boot profiles for use by lanboot lanboot Boot over the LAN reconfigreset Reset the system nPartition for reconfiguration the nPartition remains inactive in the shutdown for reconfig state reset Reset the system nPartition search Connect drivers for bootables devices Configuration Commands EFI Shell Commands for changing and retrieving system nPartition information acpiconfig Set view ACPI configuration mode cellconfig Deconfigure reconfigure cells Set cell use on next boot values cpuconfig Deconfigure reconfigure processors and processor cores date Display the current date or set the date of the system nPartition Command Reference for EFI Shell Commands 81 82 Table 4 3 EFI Shell Command Reference continued Command Description dimmconfig Deconfigure reconfigure memory DIMMs err Display change the error level errdump View clear logs fru View FRU data info Display hardware information monarch Set view a monarch processor palproc Make a PAL call romdrivers Enable disable PCI expansion ROM drivers rootcell Set view preferred root cells Set nPartition core cell choices salproc Make a SAL call tftp Performs TFTP operation to a bootp DHCP enabled Unix boot server time Display the current time or set the time of the system nPartition EFI time is se
168. ation presented in the Notes and Warnings the Summary of Changes and the HA Checks tabs 6 Either check or leave unchecked the option for booting the nPartition after the reconfiguration occurs For Partition Manager Version 1 0 this option is the Automatically boot partition checkbox For Partition Manager Version 2 0 this option is the Boot nPartition to system firmware checkbox If removing an active cell leaving this option unchecked not selected results in the nPartition being inactive after its reboot for reconfig occurs If removing a cell from an inactive nPartition selecting this option results in the nPartition becoming active after its reconfiguration occurs 7 Either cancel or proceed with the changes the removal of cell Click the Cancel button to cancel the changes To proceed with removing the cells click the Finish button or click the OK button 8 Asneeded perform a reboot for reconfig on the modified nPartition HP UX shutdown R Windows shutdown r Linux shutdown r time OpenVMS SYSS SSYSTEM SHUTDOWN with an automatic system reboot e If you have removed only inactive cells from an nPartition then you do not need to perform a reboot for reconfig of the nPartition e If you have removed any active cells from the nPartition then you must perform a reboot for reconfig and will have seen a detailed message about rebooting from Partition Manager Issue the reboot for reconfig command If y
169. atus Hyper Threading will not be enabled or disabled until after the nPartition is reset e EFI Shell cpuconfig threads command cpuconfig threads on to schedule Hyper Threading to be enabled after the nPartition is reset cpuconfig threads off to schedule Hyper Threading to be disabled after the nPartition is reset e HP UX setboot command setboot m on to schedule Hyper Threading to be enabled after the nPartition is reset setboot m off to schedule Hyper Threading to be disabled after the nPartition is reset e Enhanced nPartition Commands parmodify pn T y n command to enable T y or disable T n Hyper Threading for the specified nPartition pn where n is the nPartition number the next time the nPartition is reset e Partition Manager When performing the Create nPartition or Modify nPartition tasks select or deselect the Enable Hyper Threading check box on the Configure Memory tab to configure the Hyper Threading status the next time an nPartition is reset See Enabling and Disabling Hyper Threading on Dual Core Intel Itanium 2 Processors page 218 four eee Ean A ory e NOTE DIMMs operate either in ranks of four or echelons of two depending on the DIMMs memory architecture of the server When you deallocate a DIMM all other DIMMs in the rank or echelon also will not be used the next time the nPartition boots Each rank or echelon is numbered 0 1 2 and so on up to hexadecimal number
170. available only on HP 9000 servers for listing hardware and nPartition status include the following commands Hardware and nPartition information displayed by the BCH menu is limited to the local nPartition in most cases Information menu PR command List processor configuration details Information menu ME command List memory configuration details Information menu IO command List I O configuration details Information menu CID command List complex product and serial numbers Configuration menu PD command List the local nPartition number and name e nPartition administration tools for listing hardware and nPartition status include the following features Partition Manager Version 1 0 The Complex Show Complex Details action provides complex status information use the Cells tab CPUs Memory tab I O Chassis tab and Cabinet Info tab to display selected details Partition Manager Version 2 0 The following user interface features provide nPartition and complex status General tab Hardware tab nPartitions tab Cells tab I O tab CPUs Memory tab Power and Cooling tab Also the Complex Show Complex Details action parstatus C command List cell configurations parstatus V c command List detailed cell information parstatus I command rad qcommand on HP UX 11i v1 B 11 11 systems and olrad q command on HP UX 11i v2 B 11 23 and HP UX 11i v3 B 11 3
171. based HP 9000 servers the configurable system boot options include boot device paths PRI HAA and ALT and the autoboot setting for the nPartition To set these options from HP UX use the set boot command From the BCH system boot environment use the PATH command at the BCH Main menu to set boot device paths and use the PATHFLAGS command at the BCH Configuration menu to set autoboot options For details issue HELP command at the appropriate BCH menu where command is the command for which you want help HP Integrity Boot Configuration Options On cell based HP Integrity servers you must properly specify the ACPI configuration value which affects the OS startup process and on some servers can affect the shutdown behavior You also can configure boot device paths and the autoboot setting for the nPartition Details are given in the following list Boot Options List The boot options list is a list of loadable items available for you to select from the EFI Boot Manager menu Ordinarily the boot options list includes the EFI Shell and one or more operating system loaders The following example includes boot options for HP OpenVMS Microsoft Windows HP UX and the EFI Shell The final item in the EFI Boot Manager menu the Boot Configuration menu is not a boot option The Boot Configuration menu allows system configuration through a maintenance menu EFI Boot Manager ver 1 10 14 61 Please select a boot option HP OpenVMS 8 2 1 EFI Shell Built
172. bers and their IP addresses i ip sub gate Set IP address subnet and gateway for an IP network number Windows Special Administration Console SAC 73 Table 4 1 Windows SAC Commands continued SAC Command Description id Display the Windows nPartition identification information k pid Kill the given process l pid Lower the priority of a process to the lowest possible lock Lock access to Command Prompt channels m pid MB allow Limit the memory usage of a process to MB allow P Toggle paging the display r pid Raise the priority of a process by one s Display the current time and date 24 hour clock used s mm dd yyyy hh mm Set the current time and date 24 hour clock used t Display tlist info a list of Windows processes running on the nPartition restart Restart the system immediately shutdown Shutdown the system immediately This puts the nPartition in a shutdown for reconfig inactive state To boot the nPartition make it active use the BO command at the service processor Command menu crashdump Crash the Windows system running on the nPartition You must have crash dump enabled Accessing and Using the Service Processor 74 This section describes how to login to the service processor MP or GSP for a server complex You can connect to the service processor for a server complex by using the following methods e Connecting through
173. ble PRI HAA or ALT and hwpath is a boot device hardware path For example to set the PRI boot path to a new value 4 0 2 0 0 10 in this case enter PATH PRI 4 0 2 0 0 10 as shown below Main Menu Enter command or menu gt PATH PRI 4 0 2 0 0 10 0 Primary Boot Path 4 0 2 0 0 10 4 0 2 0 0 a hex Main Menu Enter command or menu gt 3 Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the BCH environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 5 56 Configuring Boot Paths and Options EFI Boot Manager From the EFI Boot Manager environment use the use Boot Option Maintenance operations to add or delete boot options or to change the order of items in the boot options list The EFI Boot Manager is available only on HP Integrity systems 1 Access the EFI Boot Manager menu for the nPartition whose boot paths the EFI boot options list items and options you want to configure Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If at another EFI menu select the Exit option from the sub menus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading 2 Select the Boot Option Maintenance option from the ma
174. ble only on HP Integrity systems 1 Access the EFI Shell environment for the nPartition whose I O configuration you want to list Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If at another EFI menu select the Exit option from the sub menus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading From the EFI Boot Manager menu select the EFI Shell menu option to access the EFI Shell environment 2 Enter the info io command to list I O details for all active cells in the local nPartition The info io command reports details that include I O chassis information I O module PCI card slot details and information about PCI devices installed PCI cards 3 Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the EFI environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu 232 Listing nPartition and Hardware Status Procedure 8 17 Listing Input Output I O Configurations nPartition Commands From the command line use the parstatus I command to list details about all I O chassis in the server complex From HP UX B 11 11 use the rad q command or from HP UX B 11 23 and HP UX B 11 31 use the olrad q command to list
175. cabinets to provide additional I O chassis The two cell HP servers consists of a single server cabinet only The four cell servers consists of a single server cabinet and can optionally include one I O expansion cabinet to provide two additional I O chassis For details on listing and managing nPartition hardware components see Chapter 7 page 201 Administration Tools for nPartitions 18 The main administration tools for nPartitions are Partition Manager which provides a graphical interface and the nPartition Commands which provide a command line interface Some nPartition configuration and management also can be accomplished using the service processor interface to a cell based server or by using the boot interface available through an nPartition console Slightly different toolsets and capabilities are available the different server models However the same basic administration tasks are supported on all cell based servers The following tools can perform nPartition administration tasks e Service Processor MP or GSP Menus Service processor menus provide a service interface for the entire complex It allows access to all hardware and nPartitions defined within the complex The service processor is always available regardless of whether any nPartitions are configured or booted in the complex The service processor includes the Command menu nPartition consoles nPartition Virtual Front Panels nPartition console logs and the Cha
176. ccessed complex is then considered the target complex Access is through the service processor LAN port The h option is required if this option is used 256 nPartition Commands Enhanced nPartition Commands only This option is only used in combination with either the u or g option IPaddress hostname specifies the IP address or hostname of the target nPartition u or service processor g h I Paddress hostname parremove Command 257 parstatus Command The parstatus command displays information about the nPartitions or hardware within a server complex If you specify no arguments parstatus lists information about several of the major components of the server complex You can specify an individual entity cell I O chassis cabinet or nPartition to restrict the output to information about that component All users can issue this command Refer to the parstatus 1 manpage for complete details Synopsis parstatus s parstatus w parstatus X parstatus A M C I parstatus M B P parstatus M i IOchassis i parstatus V M c cell c parstatus V M b cabinet b parstatus V M p PartitionNumber p parstatus T Enhanced nPartition Commands Notes e The u h set of options may be specified to cause the command to send its management request using WBEM to an nPartition other than the local nPartition but can also be used as a loopback access to the local nPar
177. cell choice 1 and the subsequent cells are lower priority core cell choices choices 2 through 4 if specified Procedure 6 23 Setting Core Cell Choices Partition Manager You can set core cell choices by using Partition Manager When using Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the nPartition to configure select the Partition Modify Partition action and use the Core Cell Choices tab When using Partition Manager Version 2 0 select the nPartition to configure select the nPartition Modify nPartition action select the Set Cell Options tab and use the Core Cell Choice column to set priorities 1 Access Partition Manager For details on accessing Partition Manager or other tools see Tools for Configuring nPartitions page 165 Select the nPartition whose core cell choices you want to configure Initiate the nPartition modify action If using Partition Manager Version 1 0 the Partition Modify Partition action If using Partition Manager Version 2 0 select the nPartition Modify nPartition action Access the Partition Manager area for setting core cell choices and then make any changes to the core choices for the nPartition From Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the Core Cell Choices tab Highlight the cell whose core cell choice you want to configure select the desired choice priority 1st 2nd none etc from the Core Cell Choice pop up list and click the Modify button to modify the priority From
178. cell failure usage For the Original nPartition Commands all attributes are optional and if not specified the default values base y ri are assigned Enhanced nPartition Commands For the m option m base y n ril clm where all Original nPartition Commands attributes are supported and clm is the cell local memory value the amount of memory on the cell that is not interleaved The clm attribute may be an absolute number of GBytes in 0 5 GByte increments or a percentage in 12 5 increments or in 25 increments for cells with less than 4 GBytes e Partition Manager Version 1 0 Select the nPartition to which the cell belongs select the Partition Modify Partition action Change Cell Attributes tab select the cell s and click Modify Cell s Version 2 0 Select the nPartition to which the cell belongs select the nPartition Modify nPartition action and then configure attributes using the Set Cell Options tab and the Configure Memory tab See Setting Cell Attributes page 189 Setting nPartition Core Cell Choices e BCH Menu Configuration menu COC command Coc choice cell where choice is 0 3 with 0 being the highest priority choice and where cell is the cell number e EFI Shell root cell command rootcell clear to clear the list of preferred core cells rootcell c0 cl tospecify up to four choices with c0 being the highest priority choice and c0 c3 being the
179. cell whose memory configuration you want to view 3 To exit the service processor Command Menu enter MA to return to the service processor Main Menu At the Main Menu enter X to exit the service processor interface Procedure 8 10 Listing Memory Configurations BCH Menu From the BCH Information Menu use the ME command to list memory details for the local nPartition The BCH Menu is available only on HP 9000 systems Listing Memory Configurations 229 1 Access the BCH Main Menu for the nPartition whose memory configuration you want to list Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the BCH Main Menu the Main Menu Enter command or menu gt prompt If ata BCH menu other than the Main Menu then enter MA to return to the BCH Main Menu 2 Enter IN to access the BCH Information Menu Enter the ME command to list memory details for all active cells in the local nPartition 4 Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them o To exit the BCH environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 8 11 Listing Memory Configurations EFI Shell From the EFI Shell environment use the info mem command to list memory details for the local nPartition Also use the
180. ch cell assigned to the nPartition The VFP display updates as the cell or nPartition state and activities change E indicates error since last boot Partition 1 state Activity Cell s Booting 57 Logs Cell state Activity 4 Booting Cell firmware test 28 Logs 6 Booting Cell firmware test 28 Logs GSP VFP B to Quit gt At the service processor MP or GSP Main Menu enter X to exit the service processor interface Monitoring nPartition Boot Activity 105 Finding Bootable Devices You can find bootable devices by using any one of the following procedures e Finding Bootable Devices BCH Menu page 106 e Finding Bootable Devices EFI Shell page 107 Procedure 5 3 Finding Bootable Devices BCH Menu From the BCH Main Menu issue the SEARCH command to find bootable devices The BCH Menu is available only on HP 9000 systems 1 Access the BCH Main Menu for the nPartition whose bootable devices you want to list Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the BCH Main Menu the Main Menu Enter command or menu gt prompt If ata BCH menu other than the Main Menu then enter MA to return to the BCH Main Menu 2 From the BCH Main Menu issue the SEARCH command to find and list bootable devices in the nPartition The SEARCH command reports all potential boot devices it locates Mai
181. cluding the service processor MP or GSP Boot Console Handler BCH available only on PA RISC servers Extensible Firmware Interface EFI available only on HP Integrity servers nPartition commands or Partition Manager opt parmgr bin parmgr See Tools for Configuring nPartitions page 165 for details Tools for Configuring nPartitions 165 Table 6 1 nPartition Configuration Task Summaries Task Creating a Genesis Partition Summary e Creating a Genesis Partition overwrites all nPartition related complex profile data for the server and establishes one single cell nPartition e Service Processor MP or GSP CC command See Creating a Genesis Partition page 170 Creating a New nPartition e nPartition Commands parcreate command e Partition Manager Version 1 0 Partition Create Partition action Version 2 0 nPartition Create nPartition action See Creating a New nPartition page 172 Removing Deleting an nPartition e NOTE When an inactive nPartition is specified to be removed its removal occurs immediately When an active nPartition is specified to be removed for the nPartition removal deletion to occur the nPartition must be put into a shutdown for reconfig state HP UX shutdown R H Windows shutdown s Linux shutdown h time OpenVMS SYS SYSTEM SHUTDOWN with no automatic system reboot then MP Command menu RR command e nParti
182. condary boot path For HP 9000 servers this is the HAA boot path For HP Integrity servers only boot options for the local nPartition can be modified therefore boot paths for a newly created nPartition cannot be set using parcreate Instead use the EFI system boot interface available through the nPartition console rcell T flag u username h I Paddress hostname Specifies the core cell choices One to four cells can be specified Specifies whether Hyper Threading should be enabled or not only if cells support this feature By default Hyper Threading is disabled The valid values for flag are y Enable Hyper Threading which allows multiple threads to run concurrently on each processor core n Disable Hyper Threading This is the default value Specifies to boot the nPartition The default is not to boot the nPartition and leave it in the shutdown for reconfig state Enhanced nPartition Commands only Specifies the account and authorization to access an nPartition other than the local nPartition The h option is required if this option is used username specifies a configured user name on the target nPartition Enhanced nPartition Commands only Allows access to the complex specified by the h option The accessed complex is then considered the target complex Access is through the service processor LAN port The h option is required if this option is used Enhanced nPartition Commands only This o
183. configuration details 1 Access the EFI Shell From the system console choose the EFI Shell entry from the EFI Boot Manager menu to access the shell 2 Access the EFI System Partition for the Red Hat Enterprise Linux boot device Use the map EFI Shell command to list the file systems 0 s1 and so on that are known and have been mapped To choose a file system to use enter its mapped name followed by a colon For example to operate with the boot device that is mapped as fs3 enter s3 at the EFI Shell prompt 3 Enter ELILO at the EFI Shell command prompt to launch the ELILO EFT loader If needed you can specify the loader s full path by entering EFI redhat elilo at the EFI Shell command prompt 4 Allow the ELILO EFI loader to proceed with booting the Red Hat Enterprise Linux kernel By default the ELILO EFI loader boots the kernel image and options specified by the default item in the elilo conf file To interact with the ELILO EFI loader interrupt the boot process for example type a space at the ELILO boot prompt To exit the loader use the exit command Booting SuSE Linux Enterprise Server You can boot the SuSE Linux Enterprise Server OS on HP Integrity servers using either of the methods described in this section 132 Booting and Resetting nPartitions Refer to Shutting Down Linux page 134 for details on shutting down the SuSE Linux Enterprise Server OS CAUTION ACPI Configurat
184. d allocated cell local memory CLM amounts Procedure 8 13 Listing Memory Configurations Partition Manager You can list the memory configuration for any of the cells or nPartitions in a server complex by using Partition Manager When using Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the Details Show Complex Details action then select the CPUs Memory tab When using Partition Manager Version 2 0 select the Cells tab 1 Access Partition Manager For details on accessing Partition Manager or other tools see Tools for Listing Status page 223 2 List memory configuration details for any cell in the complex you currently are accessing From Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the Details Show Complex Details action then select the CPUs Memory tab to view memory details about all cells in the complex For additional details on any cell use the Show Details button From Partition Manager Version 2 0 select the Cells tab to view details about all cells in the complex including memory details 3 Exit Partition Manager From Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the File Exit action From Partition Manager Version 2 0 select Log off parmgr or exit the Web browser when finished Listing Input Output I O Configurations You can list I O configurations by using any one of the following procedures e Listing Input Output I O Configurations Service Processor page 231 e Listing Input Output Configurations BCH Men
185. d olrad is available with HP UX B 11 23 and HP UX B 11 31 In Example A 1 both the parstatus and rad commands show details for various chassis and slots including chassis 0 1 3 246 nPartition Commands Example A 1 I O Specification Formats for Cabinets Bays and Chassis parstatus I H Chassis Core Connected Par Hardware Location Usage IO To Num cab0 bay0 chassisO absent cab0 bay0 chassisl absent cab0 bay0 chassis2 absent cab0 bay0 chassis3 inactive yes cab0O cell4 cab0 bayl chassisO absent cab0 bayl chassisl absent cab0 bayl chassis2 absent cab0 bayl chassis3 active yes cab0O cello 0 cabl bay0 chassisO absent cabl bay0 chassisl inactive cabl bay0 chassis2 absent cab1l bay0 chassis3 absent cabl bayl chassisO absent cabl bayl chassisl absent cabl bayl chassis2 absent cab1 bay1l chassis3 active yes cabl cell2 1 cab8 bay0 chassisl inactive cab8 bay0 chassis3 active yes cab0 cell2 0 cab8 bayl chassisl inactive yes cabl1 cell0 cab8 bayl chassis3 inactive cab8 bay2 chassisl absent cab8 bay2 chassis3 absent cab8 bay3 chassisl absent cab8 bay3 chassis3 absent rad q B Slot Path Bus Speed Power Occupied 0 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 33 On Yes 0 1 3 1 0 0 1 0 8 33 On No 0 1 3 2 0 0 2 0 16 33 On No 0 1 3 3 0 0 3 0 24 33 On No 0 1 3 4 0 0 4 0 32 33 On No 0 1 3 5 0 0 6 0 48 33 On Yes 0 1 3 6 0 0 14 0 112 33 On No
186. d to I O in an expansion cabinet can be used to create additional nPartitions 56 nPartition Server Hardware Overview The four cell HP servers include these features e A single server cabinet that includes cells I O chassis processors memory PCI cards and core I O Two PCI I O chassis in the server cabinet share the same chassis hardware One I O chassis is connected to cell 0 the other is connected to cell 1 Each I O chassis has 8 PCI card slots numbered from 1 to 8 e An optional I O expansion cabinet that provides an additional two core I O cards and an additional two I O domains each containing eight PCI card slots for a total of 16 more PCI card slots Two PCI I O chassis in the I O expansion cabinet share the same chassis hardware One I O chassis is connected to cell 2 the other is connected to cell 3 e From one to four cells Each cell has four processor sockets and up to 16 DIMMs e A total server complex capacity of 4 cells 16 processor sockets 64 DIMMs and either 16 or 32 PCI card slots Four cell HP servers include a single server cabinet that can be rack mounted or stand alone An optional I O expansion cabinet may also be used to provide I O connected to cell 2 and cell 3 Superdome Server Models HP Superdome servers scale up to 16 cells The following types of HP Superdome servers are supported e The first generation HP 9000 Superdome SD16000 SD32000 and SD64000 e The HP sx1000 chipset based HP 90
187. d to list cell nPartition assignments or use the PS command to list details about the individual cells in the server complex The PS command s C option displays detailed information about a specified cell 3 To exit the service processor Command Menu enter MA to return to the service processor Main Menu At the Main Menu enter X to exit the service processor interface Procedure 8 2 Listing Cell Configurations nPartition Commands From the command line use the parstatus C command to list cell configuration details 1 Login to a system with the nPartition commands installed If using remote administration features to list cell configurations you can login to any system with Enhanced nPartition Commands installed 226 Listing nPartition and Hardware Status 2 Issue the parstatus C command to list details about the cells installed in the server complex and their nPartition assignments Procedure 8 3 Listing Cell Configurations Partition Manager From Partition Manager select the Cells tab to list cell configuration details When using Partition Manager Version 1 0 first select the Details Show Complex Details action then select the Cells tab 1 Access Partition Manager For details on accessing Partition Manager or other tools see Tools for Listing Status page 223 2 Use the Cells tab to list cell configurations including details about which cell are installed in the server and any cell nPartition assignments
188. d will still be assigned to the nPartition but will not be used will not rendezvous in the nPartition e Perform a reboot for reconfig HP UX shutdown R Windows shutdown r Linux shutdown r time OpenVMS SYSSSYSTEM SHUTDOWN with an automatic system reboot If you have changed any use on next boot values from n do not use on next boot to y use the cell on next boot then you must perform a reboot for reconfig to allow the currently inactive cells to reboot and rendezvous when the nPartition reboots Procedure 7 11 Configuring and Deconfiguring Cells Partition Manager You can set configure and deconfigure cell by using Partition Manager to set each cell use on next boot value When using Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the nPartition to which the cell belongs select the Partition Modify Partition action Change Cell Attributes tab select the cell s and click Modify Cell s When using Partition Manager Version 2 0 select the nPartition to which the cell belongs select the nPartition Modify nPartition action and then configure attributes using the Set Cell Options tab 1 Access Partition Manager For details on accessing Partition Manager or other tools see Tools for Managing Hardware page 201 Select the nPartition whose cells you want to configure or deconfigure Initiate the nPartition modify action If using Partition Manager Version 1 0 the Partition Modify Partition action If us
189. d with a panic when launching Windows To set the ACPI configuration for Windows At the EFI Shell enter the acpiconfig windows command and then enter the reset command for the nPartition to reboot with the proper windows configuration for Windows NOTE Microsoft Windows Booting on HP Integrity Servers The recommended method for booting Windows is to use the EFI Boot Manager menu to choose a Windows entry from the boot options list Using the ia641dr ef i Windows loader from the EFI Shell is not recommended Procedure 5 20 Windows Booting From the EFI Boot Manager menu choose an item from the boot options list to boot Windows using that boot option The EFI Boot Manager is available only on HP Integrity servers Refer to ACPI Configuration for Windows Must Be windows page 127 for required configuration details 1 Access the EFI Boot Manager menu for the system on which you want to boot Windows Log in to the management processor and enter CO to access the Console list Choose the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If you are at another EFI menu choose the Exit option from the submenus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading 2 At the EFI Boot Manager menu choose an item from the boot options list Each item in the boot options list references a specific boot device and provides a specific set of boot o
190. der Commands HP Integrity Servers Issue HP UX Loader commands directly from the HPUX gt prompt The EFI system boot environment and HPUX EFI boot loader are available only on HP Integrity systems 1 Access the nPartition console EFI Shell and desired boot device then boot to the HP UX Loader HPUX EFI interface See HPUX EFI Access Booting to the HP UX Loader EFI Boot Manager or EFI Shell page 150 for details 2 Issue HP UX Loader commands directly from the HPUX gt prompt For example to list files in stand enter 1s To exit the HP UX Loader interface enter the EXIT command to return to the EFI Shell environment Refer to the help command or the hpux 1M manpage for command details 3 Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the EFI environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu HPUX Boot Loader Commands Issued from ISL On HP 9000 servers you can issue HP UX Boot Loader commands from the HP UX Initial System Loader the ISL gt prompt as described in the following procedure Procedure 5 53 Issuing HP UX Boot Loader Commands HP 9000 Servers Issue HP UX Loader commands from the ISL prompt by prefacing them with hpux The BCH Menu and ISL interface are available only on HP 9000 systems 1 Access the nPartition console use the BOOT comma
191. details about PCI cards and slots in the local nPartition 1 Login to a system with the nPartition commands installed If using remote administration features you can login to any system with Enhanced nPartition Commands installed If listing I O chassis status using parstatus I you can login to any nPartition in the complex or remotely list details To list details about the cards and slots in an I O chassis you must login to the nPartition to which the cell connected to the I O chassis is assigned 2 Issue the commands to list details about I O chassis and PCI slots e parstatus I List details about all I O chassis in the server complex including the usage absent active inactive whether the chassis has Core I O and which cell the I O chassis is connected to e rad q HP UX B 11 11 only Displays the status of all PCI card slots in the system Includes details about each PCI card slot HP UX Hardware Paths and power and driver status e olrad q HP UX B 11 23 and HP UX B 11 31 Displays the status of all PCI card slots in the system Includes details about each PCI card slot HP UX Hardware Paths and power and driver status Procedure 8 18 Listing Input Output I O Configurations Partition Manager You can list the I O configuration for a server complex or any nPartition in the complex by using Partition Manager When using Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the Details Show Complex Details action then
192. dimmconfig command where is the cell number for memory module DIMM details for a specific cell The EFI Shell is available only on HP Integrity systems 1 Access the EFI Shell environment for the nPartition whose memory configuration you want to list Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If at another EFI menu select the Exit option from the sub menus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading From the EFI Boot Manager menu select the EFI Shell menu option to access the EFI Shell environment 2 Enterthe info mem command to list memory details for all active cells in the local nPartition For additional details about memory modules DIMMs in an individual cell use the dimmconfig command where is the cell number The info memcommand lists memory totals for each active cell in the local nPartition and includes a summary of the current interleaved memory and non interleaved cell local memory The dimmconfig command shows DIMM locations sizes and current status for all memory in the specified cell where is the cell number 3 Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the EFI environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Men
193. dit Edit an ASCII or UNICODE file in full screen eficompress Compress infile and write to outfile efidecompress Decompress infile and write to outfile hexedit Edit a file block device or memory region using hex ls Display a list of files and subdirectories in a directory mkdir Create one or more directories mount Mount a filesystem on a block device rm Delete one or more files directories setsize Set the size of a file touch Update time of file directory with current time type Display the contents of a file vol Display volume information of the file system Memory Commands EFI Shell Commands for listing and managing memory EFI variables and NVRAM details default Set the default NVRAM values dmem Dump memory or memory mapped IO dmpstore Display all EFI variables memmap Display the memory map mm Display modify MEM IO PCI pdt View clear nPartition or cell memory page deallocation table PDT Shell Navigation and Other Commands EFI Shell Commands for basic EFI Shell navigation and customization alias Set get alias settings cls Clear the standard output with an optional background color exit Exit EFI Shell environment getmtc Display current monotonic counter value help or Display help mode Display the mode of the console output device set Set Get environment variable xchar Turn on off extended character features Shell Sc
194. dome Cabinet0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Global Format Superdome Cabinet1 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Global Format e Cell Hardware Location Format In cell hardware location format each cell is identified using two numbers that specify the cabinet and the cell slot with the cabinet where the cell resides cabinet slot Table A 2 Cell IDs in Hardware Location Format Cell Slot 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Hardware Location 0 0 0 1 Format for rp7405 rp7410 rp7420 rp7440 rx7620 and rx7640 Hardware Location 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 Format for rp8400 rp8420 rp8440 rx8620 and rx8640 Superdome Cabinet0 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 Hardware Location Format Superdome Cabinet1 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 Hardware Location Format Both cell ID formats specify the location of a cell in a complex For example parstatus c9 and parstatus cl1 1 specify the same cell parstatus c9 Cell CPU Memory Use OK GB Core On Hardware Actual Deconf OK Cell Next Par Location Usage Max Deconft Connected To Capable Boot Num cab1 celll active base 4 0 4 8 2 0 0 no yes 1 parstatus cl1 1 Cel1 CPU Memory Use OK GB Core On Hardware Actual Deconf OK Cell Next Par Location Usage Max Deconft Connected To Capable Boot Num cab1 celll active base 4 0 4 8 2 0 0 no yes 1 I O Specification Format Use the f
195. down for reconfig of the nPartition The default behavior differs on HP Integrity Superdome servers and HP Integrity HP rx7620 rx7640 rx8620 and rx8640 servers On HP Integrity Superdome servers shutdown s causes all cells to be reset and nPartition reconfiguration to occur as needed All cells then remain at a wait at BIB state and the nPartition is inactive On HP Integrity HP rx7620 rx7640 rx8620 and rx8640 servers the default behavior is for shutdown s to cause nPartition hardware to be powered off On HP rx7620 rx7640 rx8620 and rx8640 servers with a windows ACPI configuration setting the the acpiconfig disable softpowerdown EFI Shell command can be used to instead cause all cells to instead remain at a wait at BIB state e Red Hat Enterprise Linux and SuSE Linux Enterprise Server include the following commands for shutting down and rebooting the nPartition shutdown r time Shuts down Linux and performs a reboot for reconfig of the nPartition All cells are reset and nPartition reconfiguration occurs as needed The nPartition then proceeds with the nPartition boot phase The required time argument specifies when the Linux shutdown is to occur You can specify time in the format hh mm in which hh is the hour one or two digits and mm is the minute of the hour two digits or in the format m in which m is the number of minutes delay until shutdown or specify now to immediately shut down shutdown h time Shut
196. ds installed If using remote administration features to set cell attributes you can login to any system with Enhanced nPartition Commands installed 2 To list current cell attribute settings use the parstatus C command to list the use on next boot values for all cells or use the parstatus V c command to list all attribute values for a specific cell c where is the cell number Setting Cell Attributes 191 3 To modify cell attribute values use the parmodify p m command and specify the new attributes for a cell as part of the m option The m option differs slightly for the nPartition command releases You must specify both the nPartition p where is the nPartition number and the cell m where is the cell number To modify multiple cells you can specify the m option multiple times in the same command parmodify Command m Option Differences for nPartition Command Releases The parmodify command s m option specifies a cell number and attributes which are used to modify the configuration of the specified cell Both syntaxes are given in the following list e For the Original nPartition Commands the parmodify command s m option is as follows m cell type use fail where cell The cell to be added to the nPartition You can specify the cell in global cell format or in hardware location cabinet slot format type The cell type base is the only supported cell type and
197. e This feature scans the server complex and uses problem detectors to check the operating status of cells I O chassis fans and blowers and power supplies Procedure 7 16 Complex Health Analysis of a Server Partition Manager Use the Complex Analyze Complex Health action to quickly check the operating status of a server complex from Partition Manager 1 Access Partition Manager For details on accessing Partition Manager or other tools see Tools for Managing Hardware page 201 Use the Complex Analyze Complex Health action to have Partition Manager analyze the general hardware and configuration status for the server complex Partition Manager displays a report of the hardware analysis results To re analyze the server health click the Refresh button Exit Partition Manager From Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the File gt Exit action From Partition Manager Version 2 0 select Log off parmgr or exit the Web browser when finished 222 Managing Hardware Resources 8 Listing nPartition and Hardware Status This chapter covers procedures for listing the current status of nPartitions and server hardware components For an introduction to nPartition system hardware features see Chapter 1 page 15 Tools for Listing Status You list hardware and nPartition status using the following tools Service Processor MP or GSP Menus Service processor menus provide a complex wide service interface that can a
198. e 57 Server Model s HP 9000 Superdome SD16000 SD32000 SD64000 servers Description Up to 64 PA RISC processors Runs HP UX B 11 11 Also runs the HP UX B 11 23 September 2004 release and later Runs HP UX B 11 31 HP 9000 Superdome 16 way server model string 9000 800 SD16000 HP 9000 Superdome 32 way server model string 9000 800 SD32000 e HP 9000 Superdome 64 way server model string 9000 800 SD64000 HP 9000 Superdome SD16A SD32A SD64A servers HP 9000 Superdome SD16B SD32B SD64B servers Up to 64 dual core PA RISC processors 128 processor cores total Uses the HP sx1000 chipset Runs HP UX B 11 11 Also runs the HP UX B 11 23 September 2004 release and later Runs HP UX B 11 31 e HP 9000 Superdome 32 way server model string 9000 800 SD16A e HP 9000 Superdome 64 way server model string 9000 800 SD32A e HP 9000 Superdome 128 way server model string 9000 800 SD64A Up to 64 dual core PA RISC processors 128 processor cores total Uses the HP sx2000 chipset Runs the HP UX B 11 11 December 2006 release HP 9000 Superdome 32 way server model string 9000 800 SD16B e HP 9000 Superdome 64 way server model string 9000 800 SD32B e HP 9000 Superdome 128 way server model string 9000 800 SD64B Server Hardware Details Cell Based HP Servers 53 54 Table 2 1 Models of Cell Based HP Servers continued Cell Capacity HP Integrity Superdome Servers See Sup
199. e ELILO Linux Loader prompt ELILO boot and issue loader commands directly See Using Linux Loader ELILO Commands page 154 Only supported on HP Integrity servers Configuring Boot Paths and Options e BCH Menu PATH command e EFI Boot Manager use Boot Option Maintenance operations to add or delete boot options or to change the order of items in the boot options list e EFI Shell bc g command for HP UX options For example bcfg boot dump to list all boot options or help bcfg for details setting and reordering boot options list items For Windows boot options use the MSUtil nvrboot efi utility e HP UX usr sbin setboot or usr sbin parmodify command On HP Integrity systems only the boot options list for the local nPartition may be displayed and modified See Configuring Boot Paths and Options page 155 Task Summaries for nPartition Boot and Reset 99 Table 5 1 nPartition Boot and Reset Task Summaries continued Configuring Autoboot e Options Task Summary BCH Menu the PATHFLAGS command from the BCH Configuration menu sets boot time actions for an nPartition To set the boot actions for an nPartition boot paths enter PATHFLAGS VAR action where VAR is the boot path variable PRI HAA or ALT and action is the boot action 0 for go to BCH 1 for boot if fail go to BCH 2 for boot if fail try next path or 3 for skip this path try next path
200. e Ea Segnerens 249 parmodify Commanditaire erros aE ae EE A ENEE EE E A EEE ES EERE i gt 252 p rremoyve Commanderin aisir shes iene KS E ena EAE e a ATASE by gaear eon RAE EEEE E ENRE EAEE 256 p rstatus Commandes oera ierre T EA SEAT EEA EAT NE EA E E NNk 258 6 Table of Contents par nlock Command ssnin eree e ered aad acuta cae ven EEEa neta deep seam eae mercer 260 Fr Ul COE TAT sais 55ers esos 5 be Seek ke ak N ec hn Hn es ete 262 fr power Commandin sasir einion rie aE e Aa AAA ENEAS EET EEN OEE ESEESE nega 264 eplxmodily C nimand ssi essesi eai ie A a i a a a am Avea 266 Table of Contents 7 List of Figures 1 1 Partition Manager Version 2 0 Switch Complexes Dialogic cccstaiscciss winced sh vicassiunetadacesa npenteeee yh 46 2 1 Two Gell HP Server Cabinet iaraa a n E acts sevcecee vues deus evededeu vs Gs dae ovvdedeves MvaeevvvdeccusbesTaue vevees 55 2 2 Four Cell HP Server Cabine oroarea Aa Eeer EAA A TEA AAEE EA EAE EER AEA TE Eaa 56 2 3 HP Superdome Server Cabinets iuuastag cciiagtantebes iii ii a a a E ela i tiles 57 8 List of Figures List of Tables 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 2 1 3 1 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 5 1 6 1 7 1 7 2 8 1 A 1 A 2 nPartiton Operating Systemi Sup POl ty eisirean t iaia i 15 HP Servers Supporting nPartitions sssini eeii eee E aaa A E ENE 17 NPartition Commands Releases ccccccccccesesccccessccceusssccseeussccsseucscesseusecessuusscessuuesessueesessseusseeeea 20 nPartition Command
201. e Sun aube bony eeedaapvalededevante certeuaaeuayncehd Guineas 108 HP UX Support for Cell Local Memory isesaiseinngsvstaewseansoaevcpaneiwshsdpid deatteenoeon tegen teunevueansapaacrneten 108 Adding HP UX tothe Boot Optom sist sg ects io teeta Aes ele r e asao ceeteees Weta 109 Booting TAP AUX isine aei rana a eE Sunset Eaa ETA EEE AA EEEE Ee e EET wen E Nei TE Ea EET Sia 110 HP UX BOONE oiei en aane AN EE A E EE E EA A EE EER 110 Single User Mode HP UX Booting eseseseesseseesseeseeseessesnseseesseeneeseeeserssesseeseesnesneeseesseeneeseesse 114 LVM Maintenance Mode HP UX Booting s sssssssrieissesiurieseseasessenrissisrarieranrasensesersresrarterese 116 Sh ting Down HP UX redere ereer enan Aa Ea eE Ta EEA E wlan eea Ta ee RA eee a Ei 117 Booting and Shutting Down HP OpenVMS 164 aceiinccccales cic cisesectcsvevecerasse Ceknellervuseds vain teyedelebinedvseete 119 HP OpenVMS 164 Support for Cell Local Memory cassie scsnscstnsseissysicoscsneasd besacneceenattgeeovuteosupuonsdes 120 Adding HP OpenVMS to the Boot Options Lists ie lads ects vactensgeudeediisy ees sstivexeatss ented saescantenieianys 120 BOG tari PO per MS iorri oree aiiin vate n E tale sce sate nena Sod Reve a rca Reena ag eas 122 Shutting Down HP OpenVMS seriea hareri i EnaA rE ch He aa ceive EREEREER ENESTE EEKEREN 123 Booting and Shutting Down Microsoft WindOWG cccccccecesscesecseeeseesesenecesecnsecseesseeseeeseenseceeeseees 124 Microsoft Windows Support for Cell
202. e The HP rp8400 server has single core HP PA RISC processors The model string is 9000 800 S16K A e The HP rp8420 server has dual core HP PA RISC processors PA 8800 processors which provide two processor cores per processor socket The model string is 9000 800 rp8420 e The HP rp8440 server has dual core HP PA RISC processors PA 8900 processors which provide two processor cores per processor socket The model string is 9000 800 rp8440 e The HP rx8620 server has Intel Itanium 2 processors either single processor modules or HP mx2 dual processor modules Both HP mx2 dual processor modules and single Itanium 2 processors can exist in the same complex but they cannot be mixed in the same nPartition The model command output is ia64 hp rx8620 server e The HP rx8640 server has single core or dual core Intel Itanium 2 processors The model command output is ia64 hp rx8640 server Figure 2 2 shows an overview of a four cell HP server cabinet Figure 2 2 Four Cell HP Server Cabinet You can configure a single nPartition using some or all cells or can configure up to four separate nPartitions within the server complex when using an I O expansion cabinet In a multiple nPartition four cell server complex you would use cell 0 and its I O chassis in one nPartition and use cell 1 and its I O chassis in another nPartition The other cells cells 2 and 3 can be assigned to either of the two nPartitions or if connecte
203. e a Red Hat Enterprise Linux entry from the EFI Boot Manager menu To load the Red Hat Enterprise Linux OS at the EFI Boot Manager menu choose its entry from the list of boot options Booting and Shutting Down Linux 131 Choosing a Linux entry from the boot options list boots the OS using ELILO EFI loader and the elilo conf file e Initiate the ELILO EFI Linux loader from the EFI Shell Refer to the procedure Booting Red Hat Enterprise Linux EFI Shell page 132 for details On a Red Hat Enterprise Linux boot device EFI System Partition the full paths to the loader and configuration files are EFI redhat elilo efi EFI redhat elilo conf After choosing the file system for the boot device for example fs0 you can initiate the Linux loader from the EFI Shell prompt by entering the full path for the ELILO EFT loader By default the ELILO EFI loader boots Linux using the kernel image and parameters specified by the default entry in the elilo conf file on the EFI System Partition for the boot device To interact with the ELILO EFI loader interrupt the boot process for example type a space at the ELILO boot prompt To exit the ELILO EFI loader use the exit command Procedure 5 23 Booting Red Hat Enterprise Linux EFI Shell Use this procedure to boot Red Hat Enterprise Linux from the EFI Shell Refer to ACPI Configuration for Red Hat Enterprise Linux Must Be single pci domain or default page 131 for required
204. e administration features to configure and deconfigure cells you can login to any system with Enhanced nPartition Commands installed 2 To list current cell attribute settings use the parstatus C command to list the use on next boot values for all cells or use the parstatus V c command to list all attribute values for a specific cell c where is the cell number 3 To modify cell attribute values use the parmodify p m command and specify the new cell attributes as part of the m option The m option differs slightly for the nPartition command releases You must specify both the nPartition p where is the nPartition number and the cell m where is the cell number See Setting Cell Attributes page 189 for details on modifying cell attributes including the use on next boot value that determines whether a cell is configured or deconfigured during the nPartition boot process Configuring and Deconfiguring Cells 215 Reboot the nPartition to use the cells new configuration the new use on next boot values If you have changed any cell use on next boot settings for the nPartition then reboot the nPartition in either of two ways e Perform a standard reboot HP UX shutdown r Windows shutdown r Linux shutdown r time OpenVMS SYSSSYSTEM SHUTDOWN with an automatic system reboot If you have only changed use on next boot values from y to n then perform a reboot Any cells set to not be use
205. e administration features to list nPartition configurations you can login to any system with Enhanced nPartition Commands installed 2 Issuetheparstatus P command to list a summary of all nPartitions in the server complex For detailed information issue the parstatus V p command for more information about a specific nPartition p where is the nPartition number Procedure 8 28 Listing nPartition Configurations Partition Manager You can list nPartition configurations for a server complex by using Partition Manager When using Partition Manager Version 1 0 view the left side of the primary window to see a display of all nPartitions in the server and for details select an nPartition and select the Details Show Complex Details action When using Partition Manager Version 2 0 use the nPartitions tab to view details about all nPartitions in the complex 1 Access Partition Manager For details on accessing Partition Manager or other tools see Tools for Listing Status page 223 2 From Partition Manager Version 1 0 view the left side of the primary window to see a display of all nPartitions in the server For further details about a specific nPartition select the nPartition and select the Details Show Complex Details action From Partition Manager Version 2 0 use the nPartitions tab to view details about all nPartitions in the complex 3 Exit Partition Manager From Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the File E
206. e capable cell that is active not in a boot is blocked state When an nPartition is active one or more of the cells assigned to the nPartition have completed partition rendezvous and the system boot interface the BCH or EFI environment has loaded and been displayed through the nPartition console An operating system can be loaded and run from the system boot interface on an active nPartition Inactive nPartition An inactive nPartition is considered to be in the shutdown for reconfig state because all cells assigned to the nPartition either remain at a boot is blocked state or are powered off To make an inactive nPartition active use the BO command at the service processor MP or GSP Command menu The BO command clears the boot is blocked flag for all cells assigned to the nPartition thus allowing the cells to rendezvous and enabling the nPartition to run the system boot interface If all cells assigned to an nPartition are powered off you must power on its cells to enable the nPartition to become active To make an nPartition inactive perform a shutdown for reconfig You can issue commands from the operating system the system boot interface BCH or EFI or the service processor MP or GSP Command menu All three methods reboot an nPartition and hold all of its cells at boot is blocked as a result the nPartition is shutdown for reconfig placed in an inactive state For details see Chapter 5 page 87 Overview of Managing nPartition
207. e modified PartitionNumber specifies the unique number integer assigned to the nPartition The p option is required Note that you must also to specify any one or more of the following options Specifies the cell s to be added to the nPartition e The only valid type value is base Base cell The default e The valid use_on_next_boot values for cells are y Participate in reboot The default n Do not participate in reboot e The only valid failure_usage value is ri Reactivate with memory interleave the default Specifies to integrate the cell into the nPartition as normally occurs e Enhanced nPartition Commands only The clm value specifies the amount of memory that will be configured as cell local memory for the cell You can specify the clm value in either of two forms percentage or absolute amount of memory The default is 0 no cell local memory Percentage cell local memory CLM The percent number can be any number in the range 0 100 with a suffix of This number is rounded to 12 5 25 37 5 50 62 5 75 87 5 or 100 If the cell contains less than 4 GBytes of memory then the percentage is rounded to 25 50 75 or 100 Percentages are rounded up or down to the nearest value but are not rounded up to 100 Absolute CLM specification The default The absolute number is interpreted as an absolute number of gigabytes of memory and can optionally have a suffix of GB As n
208. e nPartition whose processors you want to configure or deconfigure Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the BCH Main Menu the Main Menu Enter command or menu gt prompt If ata BCH menu other than the Main Menu then enter MA to return to the BCH Main Menu 2 Enter CO to access the BCH Configuration Menu 3 From the Configuration Menu use the CPUCONFIG command to configure or deconfigure a processor on a cell in the nPartition Enter CPUCONFIG with no arguments to list the current processor configurations for all cells assigned to the local nPartition CPUCONFIG cell cpu OFF deconfigures the specified processor cpu on the specified cell cell CPUCONFIG cell cpu ON configures the specified processor on the cell Enter HELP CPUCONFIG for details Configuring and Deconfiguring Processors 217 4 Reboot the nPartition using the REBOOT command Whenever changing processor configurations you must reboot the corresponding nPartition to allow the configuration changes to take place 5 Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the BCH environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 7 13 Configuring and Deconfiguring Processors EFI Shell
209. e need to involve any of the nPartitions in the server IPMI LAN access to a service processor may be enabled or disabled by the SA command at the service processor Command menu Getting Started with nPartitions The service processor will accept IPMI requests over its LAN port only if the request is accompanied by the correct password To set the IPMI password use the SO command at the service processor Command menu Communication using IPMI over LAN is authenticated using the challenge and response protocol defined by the IPMI specification The MD5 message digest algorithm RFC1321 is used to encrypt the IPMI password and to ensure authentication of both the server and the client All IPMI messages are authenticated in the manner described above In addition appropriate methods are implemented to protect against replay attacks The use of IPMI over LAN is not affected by setting the nPartition Configuration Privilege to restricted When the IPMI BT interfaces are restricted certain changes to a complex can only be made by using the nPartition management tools in the mode that utilizes IPMI over LAN The following list describes all the actions that can be performed using IPMI over LAN e Retrieving information about the server e Changing the Stable Complex Configuration Data including cell local memory settings and all cell assignments that is creating an nPartition assigning cells to an nPartition unassigning cells from an nPartitio
210. e number of minutes delay until shutdown or specify now to immediately shut down Shutting Down to a Shutdown for Recontfig Inactive State A You can shut down to a shutdown for reconfig inactive state by using any one of the following procedures e Shutting Down to Shutdown for Reconfig Service Processor page 141 BCH Menu page 142 EFI Shell page 143 HP UX page 143 OpenVMS page 143 Windows page 145 e Shutting Down to Shutdown for Reconfig Linux page 145 e Shutting Down to Shutdown for Reconfig e Shutting Down to Shutdown for Reconfig e Shutting Down to Shutdown for Reconfig e Shutting Down to Shutdown for Reconfig NN nn nnn Nw e Shutting Down to Shutdown for Reconfig On all HP 9000 servers and on all HP Superdome servers performing a shutdown for reconfig always keep all cells assigned to the nPartition at a boot is blocked state NOTE On HP rx7620 rx7640 rx8620 and rx8640 servers you can configure the nPartition behavior when an OS shuts down to the shutdown for reconfig state The two options are to have hardware power off when the OS is halted or to have the nPartition be made inactive all cells are in a boot is blocked state On these servers the normal behavior for HP UX and Linux shutdown for reconfig is for the nPartition be made inactive and the normal Windows shutdown for reconfig shutdown s behavior is for the nPartition hardware to b
211. e powered off For details see ACPI Softpowerdown Configuration OS Shutdown Behavior page 93 When you use any of the methods to hold an nPartition at the shutdown for reconfig state the command you issue performs the following tasks 1 Shut down the operating system if using the shutdown command and reset all cells that are assigned to the nPartition including any inactive cells 2 Reconfigure the nPartition if necessary if there is a pending change to the Stable Complex Configuration Data it occurs during the reboot for reconfig 3 Either keep all cells at a boot is blocked state the nPartition and all cells assigned to it are inactive or power off all cells and I O chassis assigned to the nPartition HP rx7620 rx7640 rx8620 and rx8640 servers can be configured to power off hardware upon shutdown for reconfig For details see ACPI Softpowerdown Configuration OS Shutdown Behavior page 93 You can reset an nPartition to shutdown for reconfig whenever you need for the nPartition and its cells to be inactive Procedure 5 38 Shutting Down to Shutdown for Reconfig Service Processor From the service processor Command Menu issue the RR command to shut an nPartition down to a shutdown for reconfig inactive state Under normal operation you first shut down the operating system 1 Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CM to access the Command Menu Shutting Down to a Shutdown for Reconfi
212. e reboot for reconfig To make the inactive nPartition active use the BO boot command at the service processor Command menu Procedure 6 9 Removing Cells from an nPartition Partition Manager You can remove cells from an nPartition by using Partition Manager When using Partition Manager Version 1 0 select an nPartition and use the Partition Modify Partition action Add Remove Cells tab When using Partition Manager Version 2 0 select an nPartition and use the nPartition Modify nPartition action Add Remove Cells tab 184 Creating and Configuring nPartitions 1 Access Partition Manager For details on accessing Partition Manager or other tools see Tools for Configuring nPartitions page 165 2 Select the nPartition from which you want to remove cells 3 Specify for Partition Manager to remove one or more cells from the nPartition From Partition Manager Version 1 0 use the Partition Modify Partition action and select the Add Remove Cells tab To remove cells from the nPartition select the cells from the Cells in the Partition list and click the Remove button From Partition Manager Version 2 0 use the nPartition Modify nPartition action and select the Add Remove Cells tab To remove cells from the nPartition click on the checkbox for the cells so that no checkmark appears the checkbox is empty 4 After specifying that the cells be removed from the nPartition click the OK button 5 Review all inform
213. e the Complex Profile Complex Profile 39 40 A NOTE The Complex Profiles on cell based HP 9000 servers and cell based HP Integrity servers contain slightly different sets of information Table 1 5 covers both types of Complex Profiles The Complex Profile on cell based HP Integrity servers includes all HP 9000 server Complex Profile data and additional components that are specific to HP Integrity servers Some HP 9000 server Complex Profile data is unused on HP Integrity servers but is included for compatibility Table 1 5 Complex Profile Group Details Complex Profile Group Stable Complex Configuration Data Complex wide information Description and Contents The Stable Complex Configuration Data contains complex wide configuration details some of which may be set by administrators Although the Stable Complex Configuration Data applies to the whole complex the cell assignments and cell local memory CLM per cell components are comprised of data that affect the individual cells A copy of the Stable Complex Configuration Data resides on the service processor MP or GSP and on every cell in the complex The system boot interfaces the BCH and EFI environments do not have methods for changing Stable Complex Configuration Data Instead use the service processor command menu or nPartition management tools The Stable Complex Configuration Data includes these components e Model String Only applies
214. ecified command or enter HE for general help Table 4 4 Boot Console Handler BCH Command Reference Command Description General Commands Boot Console Handler BCH These BCH commands are available from all BCH menus BOot PRI HAA Boot from the specified path ALT path REBOOT Restart nPartition RECONFIGRESET Reset the nPartition to allow Complex Profile reconfiguration the nPartition remains inactive in the shutdown for reconfig state Display Redisplay the current menu HElp menu Display help for the current menu or the specified menu or command command Main Menu Commands Boot Console Handler BCH Commands to find devices set boot paths PRI HAA ALT and access other BCH menus BOot PRI HAA Boot from the specified path ALT path PAth PRI HAA Display or modify a device boot path ALT path SEArch ALL cell Search for boot devices path 84 Using Management Interfaces and Tools Table 4 4 Boot Console Handler BCH Command Reference continued Command Description ScRoll ON OFF Display or change scrolling capability configuration Access the Configuration Menu which displays or sets boot values INformation Access the information menu which displays hardware information SERvice Access the Service Menu which displays service commands Configuration Menu Commands Boot Console Handler BCH Commands to display or se
215. ed then reboot for reconfig Check the cell processor and firmware revisions using parstatus V c where is the cell number As the cells assigned to the nPartition reboot observe the boot progress from the Virtual Front Panel VFP for the nPartition and note any problems the cells have proceeding from one boot state to the next as needed review chassis logs or event logs using the service processor Show Chassis Logs or Show Event Logs SL menu e Problem An nPartition takes a long time to boot over ten minutes Causes One or more cells assigned to the nPartition that have a y use on next boot value has not booted to participate in partition rendezvous thus causing the rest of the cells assigned to the nPartition to wait for ten minutes for the cell to report For example the cell might not be installed might be powered off or might have been powered on or reset too late to rendezvous with the other cells Actions You can avoid the delay by performing any of the following actions as needed Perform a reboot for reconfig following any changes you make Set the cell use on next boot value to n do not use Power on the cell Unassign remove the cell from the nPartition e Problem An nPartition does not boot to its system boot environment BCH or EFI and instead all cells remain at a boot is blocked BIB state Causes The nPartition has been reset to the shutdown for reconfig state or no valid core cell
216. ed nPartition Only display the Hyper Threading information for supported systems If the T option is used with other options an error occurs except when the T option is used with its related options If the T option is used on a non supported system an error occurs Enhanced nPartition Commands only Specifies the account and authorization to access an nPartition other than the local nPartition The h option is required if this option is used username specifies a configured user name on the target nPartition Enhanced nPartition Commands only Allows access to the complex specified by the h option The accessed complex is then considered the target complex Access is through the service processor LAN port The h option is required if this option is used Enhanced nPartition Commands only This option is only used in combination with either the u or g option IPaddress hostname specifies the IP address or hostname of the target nPartition u or service processor g parstatus Command 259 parunlock Command The parunlock command unlocks the Stable Complex Configuration Data or Partition Configuration Data The Enhanced nPartition Commands version of parunlock also can unlock Dynamic Complex Configuration Data and cell data and can cancel pending changes to the Stable Complex Configuration Data Use this command with caution Root permission is required to run this command A NOTE On servers based on the HP
217. ed on each boot partial means some subtests normally are executed on each boot This may differ from the NEXT BOOT settings SUPPORTED Whether the server supports the test completely yes partially partial or not at all no DEFAULT The default setting for the test either on off or partial NEXT BOOT The self test behavior for the next boot of the nPartition only If these settings differ from CURRENT then the CURRENT settings are reestablished after the next boot The following example shows setboot v output for an nPartition in an HP 9000 server setboot v Primary bootpath 0 0 6 0 0 6 0 Alternate bootpath 0 0 1 0 0 8 0 Autoboot is OFF disabled Autosearch is OFF disabled Note The interpretation of Autoboot and Autosearch has changed for systems that support hardware partitions Please refer to the manpage TEST CURRENT SUPPORTED DEFAULT NEXT BOOT all partial partial partial partial SELFTESTS on yes on on early cpu on yes on on late _ cpu on yes on on FASTBOOT partial partial partial partial full memory off no off off PDH on yes on on CEC off no off off Configuring Boot Time System Tests 163 3 Use the setboot command to enable or disable boot time self tests for the local nPartition You can use the following commands to configure tests setboot t test_name on off default setboot T test_name on off default test_name is the name of the self test PDH early_cpu late_cpu
218. ed up to 100 Absolute CLM specification The default The absolute number is interpreted as an absolute number of gigabytes of memory and can optionally have a suffix of GB 192 Creating and Configuring nPartitions As needed an absolute CLM specification is rounded up to the nearest 0 5 GBytes If the clm value is rounded the command reports the final value used For details refer to the parmodify 1M manpage Reboot the nPartition to use the cells new attribute values On cell based servers based on the HP sx1000 chipset or HP sx2000 chipset if you have changed cell local memory CLM values then you must reboot the nPartition whose CLM values have changed HP UX shutdown r Windows shutdown r Linux shutdown r time OpenVMS SYSS SYSTEM SHUTDOWN with an automatic system reboot If you also are changing use on next boot values then also use the following guidelines If you have changed any cell use on next boot settings for the nPartition then reboot the nPartition in either of two ways e Perform a standard reboot HP UX shutdown r Windows shutdown r Linux shutdown r time OpenVMS SYSSSYSTEM SHUTDOWN with an automatic system reboot If you have only changed use on next boot values from y to n then perform a reboot Any cells set to not be used will still be assigned to the nPartition but will not be used will not rendezvous in the nPartition e Perform a reboot for reconfig HP UX shutdown R
219. eeded an absolute CLM specification is rounded up to the nearest 0 5 GBytes If the clm value is rounded the command reports the final value used Modifies attributes of a cell already assigned to the nPartition See the a option descriptions for details on the type use_on_next_boot failure_usage and clm cell attributes Specifies the IP address that can be used by management tools to address this nPartition This value should be consistent with the IP address used by the nPartition when an operating system is booted Specifies the core cell choices One to four core cell choices can be specified parmodify Command 253 d cell b path t path s path P PartitionName B T flag u username h I Paddress hostname 254 nPartition Commands Remove the specified cell from the nPartition Specifies the primary boot path For HP 9000 servers this is the PRI boot path For HP Integrity servers b sets the first item in the boot options list displayed by the EFI Boot Manager and only boot options for the local nPartition can be modified Specifies the alternate boot path For HP 9000 servers this is the ALT boot path For HP Integrity servers t sets the third item in the boot options list displayed by the EFI Boot Manager and only boot options for the local nPartition can be modified Specifies the secondary boot path For HP 9000 servers this is the HAA boot path For HP Integrity servers
220. elect Log off parmgr or exit the Web browser when finished Assigning Adding Cells to an nPartition You can add cells to an nPartition by using any one of the following procedures e Adding Cells to an nPartition nPartition Commands page 180 e Adding Cells to an nPartition Partition Manager page 181 Assigning Adding Cells to annPartition 179 Adding cells to an nPartition involves selecting available cells those not currently assigned to an nPartition and assigning them to an existing nPartition Both the selected cells and any I O chassis connected to the cells are assigned to the designated nPartition gt NOTE Adding or removing cells from an nPartition will change the amount of memory available to the nPartition possibly significantly You should consider how the memory change may affect the amount of swap space necessary for the nPartition and if needed adjust the swap space size You can add cells to the local nPartition or to any remote nPartitions in the same server complex Reboot for Reconfig Guidelines for Adding Cells In some situations you must immediately perform a reboot for reconfig of a modified nPartition after adding cells to it e You must perform a reboot for reconfig of an active nPartition after you have added a cell to it HP UX shutdown R Windows shutdown r Linux shutdown r time OpenVMS SYSSSYSTEM SHUTDOWN with an automatic system reboot The reboot for reconfig enab
221. elect the Hardware tab for an overview of cabinets in the complex For complete details about all hardware in the complex select the Complex Show Complex Details action 3 Exit Partition Manager From Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the File Exit action From Partition Manager Version 2 0 select Log off parmgr or exit the Web browser when finished Listing Product and Serial Numbers You can list product and serial numbers by using any one of the following procedures e Listing Product and Serial Numbers Service Processor page 235 e Listing Product and Serial Numbers BCH Menu page 235 e Listing Product and Serial Numbers nPartition Commands page 235 e Listing Product and Serial Numbers Partition Manager page 236 Product and serial number information is stored in the Stable Complex Configuration Data portion of the Complex Profile for a cell based server Procedure 8 22 Listing Product and Serial Numbers Service Processor From the service processor Command Menu use the ID command to list product and serial number information for the server complex 1 Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CM to access the Command Menu 2 At the Command Menu enter the ID command to list product and serial number information for the server complex In response to the Do you want to modify any of this information prompt type n or type q to not modify the server complex informat
222. elilo conf file type Tab For details see Using Linux Loader ELILO Commands page 154 152 Booting and Resetting nPartitions Linux Boot Option Management You can manage Linux boot options by interacting with the Linux loader interface elilo efi the ELILO boot prompt and by editing the Linux loader configuration file elilo conf e The elilo efi Linux loader boots a Linux kernel and can apply boot options that are specified in an elilo conf file entry or are manually specified You can select any of the Linux kernel boot configuration entries in the boot device s elilo conf file To select a boot entry enter its label at the ELILO boot prompt along with any additional boot options to be passed to the kernel You also can directly specify a kernel file to be loaded at the ELILO boot prompt along with any kernel boot options See Using Linux Loader ELILO Commands page 154 for details e The elilo conf Linux loader configuration file defines the kernel boot configurations that are available to be selected from a Linux boot device Each boot configuration has a multiple line entry in the elilo conf file that included the label used to identify the entry the kernel image to be booted and other details such as kernel boot options This file also can specify the default boot entry to be loaded from the boot device and the amount of time given before automatically loading the default See Linux Loader C
223. els provided by the SAC interface use the channel management command SAC Channel Management Commands Esc Tab Change channels if multiple channels exist typing Esc Tab switches to the next channel and typing Space selects a channel ch List all channels ch Display the channel management command help ch si Switch to a channel by its number ch sn name Switch to a channel by its name ch ci Close a channel by its number ch cn name Close a channel by its name e Tocreateanew Windows command prompt that you can interact with through the nPartition console issue the cmd command The cmd SAC command creates a new channel for the command prompt which you can then switch to using Esc Tab or other commands in order to login to Windows running on the nPartition e When you need to type function keys and are using the SAC type the following key sequence Esc For example for the F3 key type Esc then 3 in quick sequence Table 4 1 lists the commands you can issue at the Windows SAC gt prompt which is provided through an nPartition console after Windows has booted Table 4 1 Windows SAC Commands SAC Command Description ch Channel management commands Use ch for more help cmd Create a Command Prompt channel d Dump the current kernel log f Toggle detailed or abbreviated tlist Windows process info or help Display command help i List all IP network num
224. ence Command Description Service Commands Service Processor MP or GSP Commands for general server complex administration and nPartition management BO Boot an nPartition past Boot is Blocked BIB DF Display FRU information of an entity MA Return to the Main menu MR Modem reset PCIOLAD Activate deactivate a PCI card PE Power entities on or off RE Reset entity RR Reset an nPartition for reconfiguration the nPartition remain inactive in the shutdown for reconfig state RS Reset an nPartition TC Send a TOC signal to an nPartition TE Broadcast a message to all users of the MP Command Handler VM Margin the voltage in a cabinet WHO Display a list of MP connected users Status Commands Service Processor MP or GSP Commands for displaying hardware and nPartition information CP Display nPartition cell assignments HE Display the list of available commands IO Display IO chassis cell connectivity LS Display LAN connected console status MS Display the status of the modem PS Display detailed power and hardware configuration status SYSREV Display revisions of all firmware entities in the complex System and Access Configuration Commands Service Processor MP or GSP Commands for managing server complex accounts security and nPartition configuration Using Management Interfaces and Tools Table 4 2 Service Processor MP o
225. ent log viewer includes options for viewing forward progress level 1 and greater logs system event level 2 and greater logs and live logs which optionally may be filtered by cell nPartition or alert level See Viewing Chassis Codes or Event Logs page 78 for details e Virtual Front Panel VFP for an nPartition The Virtual Front Panel VFP for each nPartition displays real time boot activity and details about all cells assigned to the nPartition The VFP display automatically updates as cell and nPartition status changes A system wide VFP also is provided Enter VFP at the Main menu to access the Virtual Front Panel menu To exit a Virtual Front Panel type b Control b See Virtual Front Panel VFP nPartition Views page 79 for details Service Processor Accounts and Access Levels To access the service processor interface for a server complex you must have a user account that enables you to login to the service processor Each server complex has its own set of service processor user accounts which are defined for the server complex and may differ from accounts on other complexes Service Processor MP or GSP Features 69 Service processor user accounts have a specific login name password and access level The three user account access levels are e Administrator Account Provides access to all commands and access to all nPartition consoles and Virtual Front Panels Can manage user accounts using t
226. ent logs that indicate failures or errors Hardware software and firmware events may emit event logs as a result of a failure or error a major change in system state or basic forward progress For example a fan failure a machine check abort MCA the start of a boot process hardware power on or off and test completion all result in event logs being emitted NOTE The front panel attention LED for a cell based server cabinet is automatically turned on when one or more event logs of alert level 2 or higher have not yet been viewed by the administrator When this attention LED is on entering the chassis log viewer turns the LED off You can remotely check the on off status of this attention LED by using the PS command G option from the service processor Command menu On cell based servers event logs are recorded in the server complex activity log for events of alert level 0 or alert level 1 or the error log for events alert level 2 or higher GSP gt SL Chassis Logs available A ctivity Log E rror Log L ive Chassis Logs C lear All Chassis Logs Q uit GSP VW gt L Entering Live Log display 78 Using Management Interfaces and Tools A lert filter C ell filter P artition filter U nfiltered V iew format selection B to Quit Current filter ALERTS only Log Viewing Options Activity Error and Live Chassis Logs When you enter the chassis log viewer by entering SL at the service processor MP or GSP
227. entry specifies the SSL Certificate file location e client pem WBEM Trust Certificate Store file The Trust Certificate Store file resides on the system from which WBEM remote management commands are issued On HP UX B 11 23 systems the Trust Certificate Store file is the var opt wbem client pem file On a Windows system system the Trust Certificate Store file is the SHP_SSL_SHARE client pem file where SHP_SSL_SHARE specifies the directory where the file resides To remotely manage a server the Trust Certificate Store file client pem on the local system must contain a copy of the CERTIFICATE data from the SSL Certificate file server pem on the remote server The CERTIFICATE data includes all text starting with the BEGIN CERTIFICATE line through the END CERTIFICATE line By default the Trust Certificate Store file contains a copy of the CERTIFICATE data from the SSL Certificate data for the local system nPartition Commands Support for Remote Management Using WBEM Two options supported by the Enhanced nPartition Commands result in remote management using WBEM These options are e u username The u option specifies a valid username on the remote nPartition For the parstatus and fruled commands any user defined on the remote nPartition can be used but the other commands require the username to be a user with superuser privileges on the remote nPartition e h hostname IPaddress The h op
228. enu choose the Exit option from the submenus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading From the EFI Boot Manager menu choose the EFI Shell menu option to access the EFI Shell environment 2 Access the EFI System Partition sX where X is the file system number for the device from which you want to boot HP UX 3 When accessing the EFI System Partition for the desired boot device issue the HPUX command to initiate the EFI HPUX HPUX EFI loader on the device you are accessing 4 Type any key within the 10 seconds given for interrupting the HP UX boot process This stops the boot process at the HPUX EFI interface the HP UX Boot Loader prompt HPUX gt 5 At the HPUX EFI interface enter the boot 1m vmunix command to boot HP UX the stand vmunix kernel in LVM maintenance 1m mode 6 Exit the console and management processor interfaces if you are finished using them To exit the EFI environment press B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the management processor Main Menu To exit the management processor type X at the Main Menu Shutting Down HP UX When HP UX is running on an nPartition you can shut down HP UX using the shutdown command On nPartitions you have the following options when shutting down HP UX Booting and Shutting Down HP UX 117 e To shut down HP UX and reboot an nPartition shutdown r On cell based HP Integrity servers the shutdown r command
229. enu enter MA to return to the service processor Main Menu At the Main Menu enter X to exit the service processor interface Procedure 5 27 Rebooting and Resetting nPartitions BCH Menu From the BCH Menu issue the REBOOT command to reset the local nPartition The BCH Menu is available only on HP 9000 systems 1 Access the BCH Main Menu for the nPartition that you want to reboot Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the BCH Main Menu the Main Menu Enter command or menu gt prompt If ata BCH menu other than the Main Menu then enter MA to return to the BCH Main Menu 2 From the BCH main menu for the nPartition enter the REBOOT command to reboot the nPartition The BCH REBOOT command resets all active cells in the nPartition and reboots them past partition rendezvous to BCH or HP UX Main Menu Enter command or menu gt REBOOT Rebooting the partition 3 Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the BCH environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 5 28 Rebooting and Resetting nPartitions EFI Boot Manager From the EFI Boot Manager menu select the Boot Option Maintenance gt Cold Reset menu to reset the local nPartiti
230. environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 8 30 Listing the Local nPartition Number EFI Shell From the EFI Shell use the info sys command to list the local nPartition number this command also displays a list of active cells CPUs and the current memory configuration The EFI Shell is available only on HP Integrity systems 1 Access the EFI Shell environment for the nPartition whose nPartition number you want to list Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If at another EFI menu select the Exit option from the sub menus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading From the EFI Boot Manager menu select the EFI Shell menu option to access the EFI Shell environment 2 Enter the info sys command to list the nPartition number for the local nPartition The info sys command also displays a list of active cells CPUs and the current memory configuration 3 Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the EFI environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Me
231. er If the nPartition name includes spaces you must specify it in quotation mark for example nPar Name 1 Partition Manager Version 1 0 Partition Modify Partition General tab Version 2 0 nPartition Modify nPartition General tab See Renaming an nPartition page 185 nPartition Commands cplxmodify N name command Only the Enhanced nPartition Commands support the cp1xmodify command If the complex name includes spaces you must specify it in quotation mark for example Cplx Name 1 Partition Manager Complex Set Complex Name action See Renaming a Server Complex page 187 Task Summaries for Creating and Configuring nPartitions 167 Table 6 1 nPartition Configuration Task Summaries continued Task Setting Cell Attributes Summary e BCH Menu Configuration menu CELLCONFIG command to list or set cell use on next boot values e EFI Shell cellconfig command to list or set cell use on next boot values e nPartition Commands parmodify p m command to modify cell attributes m where is the cell number for the specified nPartition p where is the nPartition number Original nPartition Commands For the cell modify m option specify m base y n ri where is the cell number base always is the cell type the cell use on next boot value is either y the default make active or n inactive and ri always is the
232. erating system list 4 At the next Downloads for HP Business Support Center Web page choose HP Partition Manager Bundle from the Utility Partition Management heading After you choose the Partition Manager bundle the HP Partition Manager Bundle Web page displays information about the software bundle and provides options for downloading the software and for viewing the release notes 5 To view the release notes choose the Release Notes tab Read the Installation instructions section of the release notes and the features summary before downloading and installing the software 6 To download Partition Manager for Windows choose download from the Web page nPartition Properties This section describes the nPartition properties you work with when performing nPartition administration tasks The following nPartitions details are covered here e Partition Numbers e Assigned and Unassigned Cells nPartition Properties 23 e Base Cells e Core Cells e Active and Inactive Cells e Cell Local Memory e Cell Property Details e Active and Inactive nPartition Boot States Partition Numbers Each nPartition has its own unique partition number that the nPartition administration tools use for identifying the nPartition When you create an nPartition the tool you use assigns the nPartition the lowest available partition number For example the first nPartition always is partition number
233. erdome Server Models page 57 Server Model s HP Integrity Superdome SD16A SD32A SD64A servers Description Up to 64 processor sockets four per cell with each cell having either single Intel Itanium 2 processors or HP mx2 dual processor modules with Itanium 2 processors Up to 128 processor cores total when using HP mx2 modules Runs HP UX B 11 23 HP UX B 11 31 and Microsoft Windows Server 2003 nPartitions with single Itanium 2 processors also can run HP OpenVMS 164 Red Hat Enterprise Linux and SuSE Linux Enterprise Server These models use the HP sx1000 chipset e HP Integrity Superdome 16 way server model command output ia64 hp superdome server SD16A e HP Integrity Superdome 32 way server model command output ia64 hp superdome server SD32A e HP Integrity Superdome 64 way server model command output ia64 hp superdome server SD64A HP Integrity Superdome SD16B SD32B SD64B servers Up to 64 processor sockets four per cell with each cell having either single Intel Itanium 2 processors or dual core Intel Itanium 2 processors Up to 128 processor cores total when using dual core processors Runs HP UX B 11 23 HP UX B 11 31 and Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Servers with dual core Intel Itanium 2 processors also can run HP OpenVMS 164 8 3 Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 Update 4 and SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 These models use the HP sx2000 chi
234. ere is the nPartition number To check CLM configuration details from the EFI Shell on a cell based HP Integrity server use the info mem command If the amount of NonInterleaved Memory reported is less than 512 MB then no CLM is configured for any cells in the nPartition and the indicated amount of noninterleaved memory is used by system firmware If the info mem command reports more than 512 MB of noninterleaved memory then use use Partition Manager or the parstatus command to confirm the CLM configuration details To set the CLM configuration use Partition Manager or the parmodify command Adding Microsoft Windows to the Boot Options List A To add a Microsoft Windows entry to the system boot options list you must do so from EFI by using the MSUtil nvrboot efi utility to import boot options from the EFI Microsoft WINNT50 Boot00 file on the device from which Windows is loaded NOTE On HP Integrity servers the operating system installer automatically adds an entry to the boot options list Procedure 5 19 Adding a Microsoft Windows Boot Option This procedure adds the Microsoft Windows item to the boot options list 1 Access the EFI Shell environment Login to the management processor and enter CO to access the system console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If at another EFI menu select the Exit option from the sub menus until you return to the screen
235. ering close at the telnet gt prompt A NOTE If possible you should log out of any consoles and menus before terminating your telnet session If accessing an OS on an nPartition log out of the OS before exiting the console and service processor sessions Otherwise an open OS login session will remain available to any other service processor users Using Service Processor Menus The service processor MP or GSP has a set of menus that give you access to various commands consoles log files and other features See Navigating through Service Processor Menus page 76 for details on using these menus The following menus are available from the service processor Main menu which is the menu you first access when logging in e Console Menu Provides access to nPartition consoles for the server e Virtual Front Panel Menu Provides a Virtual Front Panel for each nPartition or for the entire server complex e Command Menu Includes service status system access and other commands e Console Log Viewer Menu Allows access to the console logs for nPartitions e Chassis Log Viewer Menu or Event Log Viewer Menu Allows access to the server chassis code logs on HP 9000 servers with HP PA 8700 processors or event logs on servers based on the HP sx1000 chipset or HP sx2000 chipset Chassis logs and event logs are functionally equivalent they record system activities However event logs are more descriptive e Hel
236. ervers PA RISC systems See Using HP UX Loader Commands page 151 for details in issuing commands to the HP UX Boot Loader hpux from the Initial System Loader the ISL gt prompt Procedure 5 50 Initial System Loader ISL Booting of HP UX From the BCH Menu to access the ISL prompt issue the BOOT command and and reply y for yes tothe Do you wish to stop at the ISL prompt question The BCH Menu is available only on HP 9000 systems 1 Access the BCH Main Menu for the nPartition from which you will be running and accessing the ISL interface Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the BCH Main Menu the Main Menu Enter command or menu gt prompt If ata BCH menu other than the Main Menu then enter MA to return to the BCH Main Menu 2 Boot the desired device using the BOOT command at the BCH interface and specify that the nPartition stop at the ISL prompt prior to booting reply y to the stop at the ISL prompt question Main Menu Enter command or menu gt BOOT 0 0 2 0 0 13 BCH Directed Boot Path 0 0 2 0 0 13 Do you wish to stop at the ISL prompt prior to booting y n gt gt y Initializing boot Device ISL Revision A 00 42 JUN 19 1999 ISL gt Replying n no do not stop at ISL skips the ISL prompt and proceeds to execute the AUTO file which by default will boot HP UX stand
237. ervice processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Performing a Transfer of Control Reset You can perform a transfer of control TOC reset by using the Service Processor MP or GSP TC command as described in the following procedure If crash dump is configured for the operating system on the nPartition when you TOC the nPartition while it is running the operating system then the nPartition performs a crash dump Procedure 5 5 Performing a Transfer of Control Reset Service Processor Use the Command menu TC command to perform a transfer of control TOC reset of an nPartition 1 2 Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CM to access the Command Menu At the Command menu enter the TC command specify which nPartition is to be reset and confirm whether to TOC the nPartition The TC command performs a transfer of control reset on the specified nPartition If you are accessing the service processor using a single partition user account the TC command selects which nPartition is to be reset the nPartition that your account allows you to access If using an operator or administrator account you can select which nPartitions in the server complex you want to TOC Be certain to select the correct nPartition to be reset GSP CM gt TC This command TOCs the selected partition WARNING Execution of this command irrecoverably halts all system processing and I O activity and restar
238. es total Uses the HP sx1000 chipset Runs HP UX B 11 23 HP UX B 11 31 and Microsoft Windows Server 2003 model command output ia64 hp rx7620 server HP Integrity rx7640 Up to eight Intel Itanium 2 processors either single Intel Itanium 2 processors or dual core Intel Itanium 2 processors Up to 16 processor cores total when using dual core processors Uses the HP sx2000 chipset Runs HP UX B 11 23 HP UX B 11 31 and Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Servers with dual core Intel Itanium 2 processors also can run HP OpenVMS 164 8 3 Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 Update 4 and SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 model command output ia64 hp rx7640 server Server Hardware Details Cell Based HP Servers 51 52 Table 2 1 Models of Cell Based HP Servers continued Cell Capacity Four Cell Servers See Four Cell nPartition Server Model page 56 Server Model s HP 9000 rp8400 server Description Up to 16 PA RISC processors Runs HP UX B 11 11 Also runs the HP UX B 11 23 September 2004 release and later Runs HP UX B 11 31 model string 9000 800 S16K A HP 9000 rp8420 server Up to 16 dual core PA RISC processors 32 processor cores total Uses the HP sx1000 chipset Runs HP UX B 11 11 Also runs the HP UX B 11 23 September 2004 release and later Runs HP UX B 11 31 model string 9000 800 rp8420 HP 9000 rp8440 server Up to 16 dual core PA RISC
239. ess the console for any of the nPartitions within the server complex 3 At the Console Menu enter the nPartition number for the nPartition whose console and BCH or EFI system boot environment you wish to access Skip this step if you are accessing the service processor using a single partition user account If using an operator or administrator account select the nPartition whose console you wish to access GSP gt CO Partitions available Name 0 julesoo 1 julesol Q Quit Please select partition number 1 Connecting to Console jules01 Use B to return to main menu 102 Booting and Resetting nPartitions A few lines of context from the console log SERvice menu Displays service commands Display Redisplay the current menu HElp lt menu gt lt command gt Display help for menu or command REBOOT Restart Partition RECONFIGRESET Reset to allow Reconfig Complex Profile Main Menu Enter command or menu gt The console displays the last 10 lines of console output when you connect to it This provides you a view of the most recent console activity Accessing nPartition Console and System Boot Interfaces 103 4 Gain interactive access to the nPartition console Press Enter to access the prompt currently available from the nPartition console if any You will have either interactive or non interactive access as described in the sections Interactive Console Access and Non Interactive Console Acces
240. essor configuration you want to list Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If at another EFI menu select the Exit option from the sub menus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading From the EFI Boot Manager menu select the EFI Shell menu option to access the EFI Shell environment 2 Enter the info cpu command to list processor details for all active cells in the local nPartition 3 Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the EFI environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 8 7 Listing Processor Configurations nPartition Commands From the command line use parstatus C for processor summaries for all cells in the server complex or use parstatus V c for detailed processor information for the specified cell c where is the cell number Use the HP UX ioscan C processor command or the HP UX B 11 23 and HP UX B 11 31 mpsched s command for processor information about the local nPartition 1 Login to a system with the nPartition commands installed If using remote administration features to list processor configurations you can login to any system with En
241. et e PA RISC servers HP rp7420 HP rp8420 HP 9000 Superdome SD16A SD32A and SD64A models e Itanium 2 based servers HP rx7620 HP rx7620 16 HP rx8620 HP rx8620 32 HP Integrity Superdome SD16A SD32A SD64A models The HP sx1000 chipset provides a scalable server architecture with high bandwidth processor memory and I O busses The HP sx1000 chipset includes interconnecting components such as memory buffers I O bus adapters and host bridges and cell controllers which have built in low level error correction One notable administration feature of HP servers built around the HP sx1000 chipset is management processor MP support for access to the server using IPMI over LAN For details see Remote and Local Management of nPartitions page 41 sx2000 Chipset for HP Servers The third generation of cell based HP servers is built around the HP sx2000 chipset The following servers use the HP sx2000 chipset e PA RISC servers HP rp7440 HP rp8440 HP 9000 Superdome SD16B SD32B SD64B models e Itanium 2 based servers HP rx7640 HP rx8640 HP Integrity Superdome SD16B SD32B SD64B models The HP sx2000 chipset provides a scalable server architecture with high bandwidth processor memory and I O busses The HP sx2000 chipset includes new cell boards with core I O new system and I O backplanes new interconneting components and the addition of a redundant clock source that is hot swappable
242. eys back to the service processor the entries that the tool locked will remain locked indefinitely until they are manually unlocked Manually Unlocking a Complex Profile Entry You can manually unlock Complex Profile entries after an nPartition configuration tool has exited before unlocking the entries it had locked In this situation an attempt to modify the nPartition or complex wide setting will fail because the Complex Profile entries still are locked If you are certain no authorized users are changing configurations use the parunlock command or the service processor RL command to unlock Getting Started with nPartitions the entries After they are unlocked you can perform the modifications you had previously attempted For details see Unlocking Complex Profile Entries page 198 Aborting a Complex Profile Change A pending update of the Complex Profile can be canceled or prevented by clearing the lock for a Complex Profile entry before the service processor has pushed out the revised data for the entry This occurs for example when you have issued a request to change the nPartition assignment of an active cell and then manually unlock the effected Complex Profile entries before performing a reboot for reconfig of the nPartition to which the cell is assigned For details see Canceling Pending Changes to the Complex Profile page 199 Complex Profile Group Details Table 1 5 lists details of the three groups of data that compris
243. fe ravortes Auei Sows address https 50000 parmgr jsp complex jsp Eco Links Choose the partitionable system to manage Aremote nPartition Hostname or IP address of the nPartition WBEM Username on the nPartition foot WBEM Password on the nPartition Aremote partitionable complex Hostname or IP address of the complex cessor IPMI password for the complex s service pi Connect to remote complex Help done B interet Remote Management Using IPMI over LAN IPMI over LAN enables the second form of remote management of an nPartition complex using nPartition management tools that are running on a system to communicate directly without going through an nPartition with the service processor in the complex to be managed When performing remote management using IPMI over LAN the following terminology is used e The complex being managed is referred to as a remote complex because it is remote with respect to the system where the tools are being run e The remote complex is also the target complex as it is the complex that will be affected by any changes requested by the tools e If the tools are used to retrieve information about or to make a change to a specific nPartition in the target complex then that nPartition is the target nPartition Note that there is no concept of a remote nPartition in this scenario The following sections explain how to use the nPartition commands
244. ff Cell or O Power Off I O Chassis action or a similar Power On action See Powering Cells and I O Chassis On and Off page 206 Turning Attention Indicators LEDs On and off nPartition Commands fruled command and specify o or f and a cabinet cell or T O chassis o option to blink the LED option to turn off the LED b for a cabinet where is the cabinet number c for a cell where is the cell number i for an T O chassis where is the cabinet bay chassis HP UX B 11 11 supports the rad command for controlling PCI card slot attention indicators and other tasks HP UX B 11 23 and HP UX B 11 31 support the olrad command for controlling PCI card slot attention indicators and other tasks Partition Manager Version 1 0 Select a cell or I O chassis and use the Cell Light Cell LED or 1 O gt Light I O Chassis LED action To turn off all LEDs use the Complex Clear All LEDs action Version 2 0 Select a cell or I O chassis and use the Cell gt Turn On Cell LED or l O gt Turn On Chassis LED action or a similar Turn Off action To turn off all LEDs use the Complex gt Clear All LEDs action See Turning Attention Indicators LEDs On and Off page 209 202 Managing Hardware Resources Table 7 1 Hardware Management Task Summaries continued Task Summary Configuring and Deconfiguring Cells e NOTE Configuring and dec
245. fig BCH Menu From the BCH Menu issue the RECONFIGRESET command to shut an nPartition down to a shutdown for reconfig inactive state The BCH Menu is available only on HP 9000 systems 1 Access the BCH Main Menu for the nPartition that you want to shut down to a shutdown for reconfig inactive state Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the BCH Main Menu the Main Menu Enter command or menu gt prompt If ata BCH menu other than the Main Menu then enter MA to return to the BCH Main Menu 2 From the BCH interface for the nPartition enter the RECONFIGRESET command to reset the nPartition to the shutdown for reconfig state The RECONFIGRESET command resets all cells in the nPartition performs any nPartition reconfigurations and halts all cells at a boot is blocked state thus making the nPartition and all its cells inactive Main Menu Enter command or menu gt RECONFIGRESET Reset the partition for reconfiguration of Complex Profile 142 Booting and Resetting nPartitions y 3 Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the BCH environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 5 40 Shutting Down to Shutdown for Reconfig EFI Shell
246. fines a subset of server hardware resources to be used as an independent system environment An nPartition includes one or more cells assigned to it with processors and memory and all I O chassis connected to those cells All processors memory and I O in an nPartition are used exclusively by software running in the nPartition Thus each nPartition has its own system boot interface and each nPartition boots and reboots independently Each nPartition provides both hardware and software isolation so that hardware or software faults in one nPartition do not affect other nPartitions within the same server complex You can reconfigure nPartition definitions for a server without physically modifying the server hardware configuration by using the HP software based nPartition management tools For procedures for creating and reconfiguring nPartitions see Chapter 6 page 165 Operating Systems Supported on nPartitions Table 1 1 lists the operating systems that can run on nPartitions For an overview of the server models that support nPartitions see HP Server Support for nPartitions page 16 For details on operating system boot and reset procedures see Chapter 5 page 87 Table 1 1 nPartition Operating System Support Operating System Supported Cell Based Servers HP UX 11i v1 B 11 11 HP UX 11i v1 B 11 11 is supported on HP 9000 servers including the cell based HP 9000 servers The HP UX 11i v1 B 11 11 December 2003
247. for Windows on an HP Integrity servers running Windows Server 2003 64 bit Enterprise Edition or Datacenter Edition enables you to perform local and remote management of nPartitions when running on a cell based server with Windows Server 2003 and enables you to perform remote management when running on other HP Integrity servers with Windows Server 2003 NOTE Before installing the Partition Manager bundle for Windows you must download and install the nPartition Commands bundle either the 32 bit or 64 bit version depending on the platform where the installation occurs You also must download and install the Java 2 SE SDK v1 42 from http java sun com downloads For details refer to the release notes The Smart Setup CD includes Partition Manager Version 2 0 for Windows You also can download the Partition Manager bundles for Windows from the http www hp com Web site Procedure 1 3 Downloading Partition Manager Version 2 0 for Windows You can download Partition Manager Version 2 0 for Windows from the http www hp com Web site 1 Go to the http www hp com Web site and choose Software amp Driver Downloads 2 At the Software amp Driver Downloads page in the for product box enter the name of a cell based HP Integrity server such as e Integrity Superdome e Integrity rx8620 e Integrity rx7620 3 At the Downloads for HP Business Support Center Web page choose Microsoft Windows Server 2003 64 Bit from the select op
248. for interacting with an nPartition before it has booted an operating system See Command Reference for EFI Shell Commands page 81 Boot Console Handler BCH Menu Commands On PA RISC servers the BCH interface is the method for interacting with an nPartition before it has booted an operating system See Command Reference for BCH Menu Commands page 84 nPartition Commands HP nPartition commands allow you to configure manage and monitor nPartitions and hardware within a server complex The Enhanced nPartition Commands also can remotely manage complexes based on the HP sx1000 chipset or HP sx2000 chipset See Commands for Configuring nPartitions page 19 for details Partition Manager opt parmgr bin parmgr Partition Manager provides a graphical interface for managing and monitoring nPartitions and hardware within a server complex See Partition Manager page 22 Task Summaries for Hardware Resource Management Table 7 1 describes the main hardware management tasks and provides brief summaries and references for detailed procedures You can perform the hardware tasks in Table 7 1 Hardware Management Task Summaries using various tools including the service processor MP or GSP Boot Console Handler BCH available only on PA RISC servers Extensible Firmware Interface EFI available only on HP Integrity servers nPartition commands or Partition Manager opt parmgr bin parmgr See T
249. g Inactive State 141 2 At the service processor Command menu enter the RR command specify which nPartition is to be reset and confirm whether to reset it to the shutdown for reconfig state The service processor RR command resets all cells in the nPartition performs any nPartition reconfigurations and halts all cells at a boot is blocked state thus making the nPartition and all its cells inactive Be certain to select the correct nPartition to be reset GSP CM gt RR This command resets for reconfiguration the selected partition WARNING Execution of this command irrecoverably halts all system processing and I O activity and restarts the selected partition in a way that it can be reconfigured Name 0 julesoo 1 julesol Select a partition number 1 Do you want to reset for reconfiguration partition number 1 Y N y gt The selected partition will be reset for reconfiguration GSP CM gt If you are accessing the service processor using a single partition user account the RR command selects which nPartition is to be reset the nPartition that your account allows you to access If using an operator or administrator account you can select which nPartition in the server complex you want to reset 3 To exit the service processor Command Menu enter MA to return to the service processor Main Menu At the Main Menu enter X to exit the service processor interface Procedure 5 39 Shutting Down to Shutdown for Recon
250. g nPartitions Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the BCH environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 5 4 Finding Bootable Devices EFI Shell From the EFI Shell environment issue the map command to list bootable devices The EFI Shell is available only on HP Integrity systems la Access the EFI Shell environment for the nPartition whose bootable devices you want to list Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If at another EFI menu select the Exit option from the sub menus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading From the EFI Boot Manager menu select the EFI Shell menu option to access the EFI Shell environment At the EFI Shell issue the map command to list all disk devices with a potentially bootable EFI System Partition For details see the help map command Also see the help search command for details on using the search command to load drivers for bootable devices Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the EFI environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the s
251. g the setboot b Autoboot s Autosearch command The setboot command supports the following options for setting local nPartition boot actions b Autoboot setting for the local nPartition b on to automatically boot the PRI path b off to not boot PRI s Autosearch setting for the local nPartition s onto attempt to perform the HAA path boot action when PRI is not booted either when bis off or when PRI fails to boot when b is on s off to never attempt to perform the HAA action For example to always stop the local nPartition at BCH when booting issue the setboot b off s off command Configuring Boot Time System Tests You can configure boot time system tests self tests for an nPartition by using any one of the following procedures Configuring Boot Time System Tests BCH Menu page 161 Configuring Boot Time System Tests EFI Shell page 162 Configuring Boot Time System Tests HP UX B 11 11 page 163 Configuring Boot Time System Tests HP UX B 11 23 and HP UX 11 31 page 164 Procedure 5 63 Configuring Boot Time System Tests BCH Menu From the BCH Configuration Menu use the FASTBOOT command to configure fast boot settings for an nPartition The BCH interface is available only on HP 9000 systems 1 Access the BCH Main Menu for the nPartition whose boot time tests you want to configure Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select
252. gning Removing Cells from an nPartition Summary NOTE When an inactive cell is specified to be removed from an nPartition the removal occurs immediately When an active cell is specified to be removed from an nPartition to complete the cell removal the nPartition must perform a reboot for reconfig HP UX shutdown R Windows shutdown r Linux shutdown r time OpenVMS SYS SYSTEM SHUTDOWN with an automatic system reboot nPartition Commands parmodify p d command which unassigns the cell d where is the cell number from the specified nPartition p where is the nPartition number When removing an active cell you must specify the B option if you want the nPartition to be active after the reboot for reconfig Partition Manager Version 1 0 Select an nPartition and use the Partition Modify Partition action Add Remove Cells tab Version 2 0 Select an nPartition and use the nPartition Modify nPartition action Add Remove Cells tab See Unassigning Removing Cells from an nPartition page 182 Renaming an nPartition Renaming a Server Complex BCH Menu Configuration menu PD NewName command where NewName specifies the new name for the nPartition Quotation marks are not needed even if the name includes spaces nPartition Commands parmodify p P namecommand where P name specifies the new name for the nPartition p where is the nPartition numb
253. hanced nPartition Commands ParCLI installed When using the nPartition commands from a remote system you can specify the g h set of options to configure a remote complex 2 When modifying an inactive nPartition specify the B option when using the usr sbin parmodify command to reconfigure the inactive nPartition For example when adding or removing cells from an inactive nPartition specifying the B option causes the nPartition to boot become active immediately following the nPartition modification For details refer to the parmodify 1M manpage Booting over a Network You can boot over a network by using any one of the following procedures e Booting over a Network BCH Menu page 147 e Booting over a Network EFI Boot Manager page 147 e Booting over a Network EFI Shell page 148 Procedure 5 47 Booting over a Network BCH Menu From the BCH Menu use the BOOT LAN command to boot HP UX over a network The BCH Menu is available only on HP 9000 systems 1 Access the BCH Main Menu for the nPartition that you want to boot over a network Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the BCH Main Menu the Main Menu Enter command or menu gt prompt If ata BCH menu other than the Main Menu then enter MA to return to the BCH Main Menu 2 Issuethe BOOT LAN INSTALL command
254. hanced nPartition Commands installed 2 Issue the command to list processor details e parstatus C Cell and processor summaries for all cells in the server complex e parstatus V c W Detailed processor information for the specified cell c where is the cell number e ioscan C processor HP UX only Processor HP UX Hardware Paths for all configured processors in all active cells in the local nPartition e mpsched s HP UX B 11 23 and HP UX B 11 31 Processor and locality domain summary for all configured processors in all active cells in the local nPartition 228 Listing nPartition and Hardware Status Procedure 8 8 Listing Processor Configurations Partition Manager You can list the processor configuration for any of the cells or nPartitions in a server complex by using Partition Manager When using Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the Details Show Complex Details action then select the CPUs Memory tab When using Partition Manager Version 2 0 select the Cells tab 1 Access Partition Manager For details on accessing Partition Manager or other tools see Tools for Listing Status page 223 2 List processor configuration details for any cell in the complex you currently are accessing From the Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the Details Show Complex Details action then select the CPUs Memory tab to view processor details about all cells in the complex For additional details on
255. hapter 3 page 61 The method you choose for creating an nPartition can depend on whether you are creating the first nPartition in a complex creating a Genesis Partition for a complex or creating an additional nPartition in a complex that already has one or more nPartitions defined e Creating the First nPartition in a Server Complex To create the first nPartition in a complex you can do so either by creating a Genesis Partition or by using an nPartition administration tool to remotely manage the complex using IPMI over LAN All cell based servers support creating a Genesis Partition See Creating a Genesis Partition for a Server Complex page 29 Only cell based servers based on the HP sx1000 or sx2000 chipset support remote administration using IPMI over LAN From a system with the Enhanced nPartition Commands use the parcreate command g h set of options Or from Partition Manager Version 2 0 use the Switch Complexes dialog to connect to the complex and use the nPartition Create nPartition action For remote administration details see Remote and Local Management of nPartitions page 41 e Creating a Genesis Partition for a Server Complex Creating a Genesis Partition involves the service processor MP or GSP CC command to specify that an initial one cell nPartition be created within the server complex To create a Genesis Partition the complex either must have no nPartitions defined or all nPartit
256. he ACPI configuration value issue the acpiconfig command with no arguments at the EFI Shell To set the ACPI configuration value issue the acpiconfig value command at the EFI Shell where value is either default windows or single pci domain Then reset the nPartition by issuing the reset EFI Shell command for the setting to take effect Booting and Resetting nPartitions The ACPI configuration settings for the supported OSes are in the following list HP UX ACPI Configuration default On cell based HP Integrity servers to boot or install the HP UX OS you must set the ACPI configuration value for the nPartition to default For details refer to ACPI Configuration for HP UX Must Be default page 110 HP OpenVMS 164 ACPI Configuration default On cell based HP Integrity servers to boot or install the HP OpenVMS 164 OS you must set the ACPI configuration value for the nPartition to default For details refer to ACPI Configuration for HP OpenVMS 164 Must Be default page 122 Windows ACPI Configuration windows On cell based HP Integrity servers to boot or install the Windows OS you must set the ACPI configuration value for the nPartition to windows For details refer to ACPI Configuration for Windows Must Be windows page 127 Red Hat Enterprise Linux ACPI Configuration single pci domain or default On cell based HP Integrity servers to boot or install the Red Hat Enterprise Linux OS you must
257. he Command menu SO command and can reconfigure various service processor settings e Operator Account Provides access to a subset of commands and access to all nPartition consoles and Virtual Front Panels e Single Partition User Account Provides access to a restricted subset of commands and provides access to the nPartition console for a single nPartition However allows the user to view the Virtual Front Panel for any nPartition Can only execute commands that affect the assigned nPartition Cannot execute commands that could potentially affect multiple nPartitions or affect the service processor configuration Each user account can either permit repeated login sessions if it is a multiple use account or restrict the account to only login once for single use accounts nPartition Console Features The service processor Console menu provides access to all nPartition consoles within the server complex Enter CO from the service processor Main menu to access an nPartition console To exit the nPartition console type b Control b to return to the Main menu Each nPartition in a complex has a single console However multiple connections to the console are supported allowing multiple users to simultaneously view the console output Only one connection per console permits write access To force gain console write access for an nPartition console type ecf Control e c f 70 Using Management Interfaces and Tools E
258. he Exit option from the submenus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading From the EFI Boot Manager menu choose the EFI Shell menu option to access the EFI Shell environment At the EFI Shell environment issue the acpiconfig command to list the current ACPI configuration for the local nPartition On cell based HP Integrity servers to boot the HP UX OS an nPartition must have its ACPI configuration value set to default If the acpiconfig value is not set to default then HP UX cannot boot in this situation you must reconfigure acpiconfig or booting will be interrupted with a panic when launching the HP UX kernel To set the ACPI configuration for HP UX At the EFI Shell interface enter the acpiconfig default command and then enter the reset command for the nPartition to reboot with the proper default configuration for HP UX At the EFI Shell environment issue the map command to list all currently mapped bootable devices The bootable file systems of interest typically are listed as fs0 fs1 and so on Access the EFI System Partition sX where X is the file system number for the device from which you want to boot HP UX For example enter fs2 to access the EFI System Partition for the bootable file system number 2 The EFI Shell prompt changes to reflect the file system currently accessed The file system number can change each time it is mapped for example when the nPartition boots or when t
259. he map r command is issued When accessing the EFI System Partition for the desired boot device issue the HPUX command to initiate the HPUX EFI loader on the device you are accessing The full path for the loader is EFI HPUX HPUX EFI and when initiated it references the EFI HPUX AUTO file and proceeds to boot HP UX using the default boot behavior specified in the AUTO file You are given 10 seconds to interrupt the automatic booting of the default boot behavior Pressing any key during this 10 second period stops the HP UX boot process and enables you to interact with the HPUX EFI loader To exit the loader the HPUX gt prompt enter exit this return you to the EFI Shell To boot the HP UX OS do not type anything during the 10 second period given for stopping at the HPUX EFI loader Shell gt map Device mapping table fso gt Acpi 000222F0 269 Pci 0 0 Scsi Pun8 Lun0 HD Part1 Sig72550000 b1ko Acpi 000222F0 269 Pci 0 0 Scsi Pun8 Luno bilki Acpi 000222F0 269 Pci 0 0 Scsi Pun8 Lun0O HD Part1 Sig72550000 blk2 Acpi 000222F0 269 Pci 0 0 Scsi Pun8 Lun0O HD Part2 Sig72550000 blk3 Acpi 000222F0 2A8 Pci 0 0 Scsi Pun8 Luno blk4 Acpi 000222F0 2A8 Pci 0 1 Scsi Pun2 Lun0 Shell gt f s0 fs0 gt hpux c Copyright 1990 2002 Hewlett Packard Company All rights reserved Booting and Shutting Down HP UX 113 HP UX Boot Loader for IA64 Revision 1 723 Press Any Key to i
260. he nPartition in the shutdown for reconfig state This leaves the nPartition and all its cells in an inactive state the nPartition can be reconfigured remotely unless the normal behavior has been modified For details on changing OS halt behavior on rx8620 and rx7620 servers refer to ACPI Softpowerdown Configuration OS Shutdown Behavior page 93 To reboot the nPartition you must do so manually by using the BO command at the management processor Command menu If HP UX is halted on the nPartition thus not allowing you to use the shut down command you can reboot or reset the nPartition by issuing commands from the management processor Command menu Booting and Shutting Down HP OpenVMS 164 This section has procedures for booting and shutting down HP OpenVMS 164 on cell based HP Integrity servers and procedures for adding HP OpenVMS to the boot options list To check whether the cell local memory CLM configuration is appropriate for HP OpenVMS refer to HP OpenVMS 164 Support for Cell Local Memory page 120 To add an HP OpenVMS entry to the boot options list refer to Adding HP OpenVMS to the Boot Options List page 120 To boot HP OpenVMS on a cell based HP Integrity server refer to Booting HP OpenVMS page 122 To shut down HP OpenVMS refer to Shutting Down HP OpenVMS page 123 Booting and Shutting Down HP OpenVMS 164 119 HP OpenVMS 164 Support for Cell Local Memory A On servers based
261. he new revised Complex Profile entry by updating its copy and updating all cells that have a copy of the entry However the service processor will not push out a revised Complex Profile entry that affects the nPartition assignment of an active cell In this case the revised entry will remain pending until the cell becomes inactive for example during a reboot for reconfig or shutdown for reconfig of the nPartition to which the cell is assigned 7 After the service processor has pushed out the revised Complex Profile entry it clears the lock for the entry After the entry is unlocked then as needed another nPartition configuration task can lock and revise that portion of the Complex Profile A single administration task can revise multiple Complex Profile entries For example you can create a new nPartition and assign its name in a single action In this case the tool you use must lock both the Stable Complex Configuration Data and the Partition Configuration Data entry for the new nPartition before revising the data according to the administration request Multiple nPartition configuration tasks can occur essentially concurrently if all tasks revise different Complex Profile entries thus allowing each task to acquire a lock for the entry it revises Complex Profile Entry Locking and Unlocking 38 A Each Complex Profile entry has its own lock which is used to restrict access to the entry If necessary you can manually unlock Complex
262. he two cell HP servers you can configure a single nPartition using one or both cells or can configure up to two separate nPartitions within the server complex In a two nPartition complex you use cell 0 and its core I O in one nPartition and use cell 1 and its core I O in the other nPartition The two cell HP server models includes these features A single server cabinet that includes all cells I O chassis processors memory PCI cards and core I O Either one or two cells Each cell has up to four processor sockets and up to 16 DIMMs Two PCI I O chassis that share the same chassis hardware One I O chassis is connected to cell 0 the other is connected to cell 1 Each I O chassis has 8 PCI card slots numbered from 1 to 8 Server Hardware Details Cell Based HP Servers 55 A NOTE On the first generation and HP sx1000 based two cell servers two PCI slots by convention are dedicated for use by a combination LAN SCSI card PCI domain 0 slot 1 the first slot on the left and PCI domain 1 slot 8 the last slot on the right On two cell servers based on the HP sx2000 chipset core I O is provided in each cell e A total server complex capacity of 2 cells 8 processor sockets 32 DIMMs and 16 PCI card slots Two cell HP servers include a single server cabinet that may be rack mounted or a stand alone server configuration Four Cell nPartition Server Model The following cell based HP servers scale from one to four cells
263. heck your current login terminal using the who m command Do not login to a service processor from an nPartition console connection Any use of the b Control b console exit sequence would exit the original console login not the subsequent console based login to the service processor thus potentially stranding the console based login for example if it too were accessing a console Procedure 5 1 Accessing nPartition Console and System Boot Interfaces Service Processor Use the service processor Console Menu CO to access the BCH or EFI system boot environment for an nPartition through its console 1 Login to the service processor MP or GSP for the server complex where the nPartition resides You can connect to the service processor using a direct physical connection or using telnet for a remote connection In most situations you can telnet to the service processor 2 Select the Console Menu CO from the service processor Main Menu The Console Menu is the method for accessing nPartition consoles GSP MAIN MENU Utility Subsystem FW Revision Level SR_XXXX_D CO Consoles VFP Virtual Front Panel CM Command Menu CL Console Logs SL Show chassis Logs HE Help X Exit Connection GSP gt CO If you are accessing the service processor using a single partition user account selecting the CO console option takes you directly to the nPartition console If using an operator or administrator account you can acc
264. hell environment 2 Use the cellconfig command to list or set the configuration setting the use on next boot value for each cell e To list the use on next boot values for all cells in the nPartition issue the cellconfig command with no arguments e To change a cell use on next boot value issue the following command cellconfig cell on off where cell is the cell number on sets the cell use on next boot value to y yes do use the cell or of sets the cell use on next boot value to n no do not user the cell A cell that boots with a y on use on next boot value is permitted to rendezvous and join its nPartition thus becoming an active cell whose resources are used A cell that boots with a n of use on next boot value does not rendezvous and thus becomes an inactive cell whose resources are not used by its nPartition although the cell still is assigned to its nPartition 214 Managing Hardware Resources A 3 Reboot the nPartition to use the cells new configuration settings If you have changed any cell use on next boot settings for the nPartition then reboot the nPartition in either of two ways e Use the reset command at the EFI Shell to perform a reboot If you have only changed cell configurations from on to of then perform a reboot using the reset command Any cells set to not be used will still be assigned to the nPartition but will not be used will not rendezvous in the nPartition e Use
265. iately and can result in the loss of data Instead use the Windows Start menu or the shutdown command to shut down gracefully To shut down Windows use either of the following methods e Choose Shut Down from the Start menu and choose either Restart or Shut down from the pull down menu The Restart menu item shuts down and restarts the system The Shut down menu item shuts down the system You can use this method when using a graphical interface to the system e Issue the shutdown command from the Windows command line Refer to the procedure Windows Shutdown from the Command Line page 128 for details You can issue this command from a command prompt through the Special Administration Console SAC or from any other command line The Windows shutdown command includes the following options s Shut down the system This is the equivalent of Start gt Shut Down Shut down r Shut down and restart the system This is the equivalent of Start Shut Down Restart a Abort a system shutdown t xxx Set the timeout period before shutdown to xxx seconds The timeout period can range from 0 600 with a default of 30 Refer to the help shutdown Windows command for details A NOTE On HP rx7620 rx7640 rx8620 and rx8640 servers performing a shutdown using shutdown s or the equivalent Start gt Shut Down Shut down powers off the server cabinet or powers off the cells and I O chassis assigned to the nPartition On
266. ides console login access to HP UX and serves as dev console for the nPartition e Console Logs Enter CL from the service processor Main menu to access the console logs menu To exit the console log type b Control b Each nPartition has its own console log which stores a history of console output for the nPartition including boot output system boot environment BCH or EFI activity and any HP UX console login activity See Viewing Console Logs page 77 for details The console log provides a limited history it is a circular log file that overwrites the oldest information with the most recent All console activity is recorded in the console log regardless of whether any service processor users are connected to the console e Chassis Logs and Event Logs On both HP 9000 systems and HP Integrity systems you can view real time live system events and can view prior events that have been stored in a log history Use the SL show logs option from the service processor Main Menu to view events chassis codes Oncell based HP 9000 servers with HP PA 8700 processors SL provides the Chassis Log Viewer The chassis log viewer includes options for viewing activity level 1 and greater logs error level 2 and greater logs and live logs which optionally may be filtered by cell nPartition or alert level Oncell based servers based on the HP sx1000 chipset or HP sx2000 chipset SL provides the Event Log Viewer The ev
267. igned to the nPartition but will not be used will not rendezvous in the nPartition e Use the reconfigreset command at the EFI Shell to put the nPartition in the shutdown for reconfig state then use the BO command at the service processor Command Menu to boot the nPartition If you have changed any cell from of n do not use on next boot to on y use the cell on next boot then you must perform these two tasks this resets and reconfigures the nPartition and boots it 4 Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the EFI environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 6 18 Setting Cell Attributes nPartition Commands From the command line use the parmodify p m command to configure cell attributes You also can use the parstatus V c command to list attribute details for a specific cell c where is the cell number NOTE You can remotely perform this task using remote administration options supported by the Enhanced nPartition Commands or Partition Manager Version 2 0 Remote administration is supported by the Partition Manager Tools Switch Complexes action and by the nPartition command u h optionsor g h options For details see Tools for Configuring nPartitions page 165 1 Login to a system with the nPartition comman
268. ils Show Complex Details action CPUs Memory tab Version 2 0 Select the Cells tab See Listing Processor Configurations page 227 Listing Memory Configurations Service Processor MP or GSP PS command and select the cell whose memory configuration you wish to view BCH Menu Information menu ME command EFI Shell info mem command and the dimmconfig command where is the cell number for memory module DIMM details for a specific cell nPartition Commands parstatus C for memory summaries for all cells parstatus V c for detailed memory information for the specified cell c where is the cell number Includes cell local memory CLM details parstatus V p for detailed memory information for the specified nPartition p where is the nPartition number Includes cell local memory CLM details Partition Manager Version 1 0 Details Show Complex Details action CPUs Memory tab Version 2 0 Select the Cells tab See Listing Memory Configurations page 229 Listing Input Output I O Configurations Service Processor MP or GSP IO command to list connections from cells to I O chassis PS command and the cabinet option to list I O details for an entire cabinet BCH Menu Information menu IO command EFI Shell info io command nPartition Commands parstatus I command for complex wide details HP UX B 11 11 rad
269. in EFI Boot Manager menu 3 Atthe Boot Option Maintenance menu use the Add a Boot Option Delete Boot Option s and Change Boot Order menu items to add or delete boot options or change the order of items in the boot options list EFI Boot Maintenance Manager ver 1 10 14 60 Main Menu Select an Operation Boot from a File Add a Boot Option Delete Boot Option s Change Boot Order Manage BootNext setting Set Auto Boot TimeOut Select Active Console Output Devices Select Active Console Input Devices Select Active Standard Error Devices Cold Reset Exit 4 Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the EFI environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu 156 Booting and Resetting nPartitions A Procedure 5 57 Configuring Boot Paths and Options EFI Shell From the EFI Shell environment use the bc g command to add or delete boot options or to change the order of items in the boot options list The EFI Shell is available only on HP Integrity systems 1 Access the EFI Shell environment for the nPartition whose boot paths the EFI boot options list items and options you want to configure Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the
270. in either of two ways e Perform a standard reboot HP UX shutdown r Windows shutdown r Linux shutdown r time OpenVMS SYSSSYSTEM SHUTDOWN with an automatic system reboot If you have only changed use on next boot values from y to n then perform a reboot Any cells set to not be used will still be assigned to the nPartition but will not be used will not rendezvous in the nPartition e Perform a reboot for reconfig HP UX shutdown R Windows shutdown r Linux shutdown r time OpenVMS SYSSSYSTEM SHUTDOWN with an automatic system reboot If you have changed any use on next boot values from n do not use on next boot to y use the cell on next boot then you must perform a reboot for reconfig to allow the currently inactive cells to reboot and rendezvous when the nPartition reboots Setting nPartition Core Cell Choices You can set the core cell choices for an nPartition by using any one of the following procedures Setting Core Cell Choices BCH Menu page 195 Setting Core Cell Choices EFI Shell page 195 Setting Core Cell Choices nPartition Commands page 196 Setting Core Cell Choices Partition Manager page 197 The core cell choice settings for an nPartition are optional preferences that establish which cells in the nPartition are preferred to be selected as the core cell for the nPartition 194 Creating and Configuring nPartitions A NOTE You do not need to specify c
271. in parmodify command NOTE On HP Integrity systems the boot options list for only the local nPartition may be displayed and modified 1 Login to HP UX running on the nPartition whose boot paths and options you want to configure On HP UX B 11 11 nPartition systems you can configure boot paths for any nPartition in the complex including remote nPartitions On HP UX running on cell based HP Integrity servers you can configure boot paths the EFI boot options list items for only the local nPartition Configuring Boot Paths and Options 157 2 Configure boot path settings using the parmodify p command Use the following commands to set the boot path variables for a specified partition number p e PRI path parmodify p b PRI where PRI is the hardware path e HAA path parmodify p s HAA where HAA is the hardware path e ALT path parmodify p t ALT where ALT is the hardware path If using the setboot command to set boot paths for the local nPartition you can specify setboot p PRlorthesetboot a ALT command You also can set the HAA boot path using the setboot h HAA command You can list the current boot path settings for an nPartition by issuing the parstatus V p grep Path command and specifying the partition number p The setboot command with no arguments lists the PRI and ALT settings for the local nPartition as well as the PRI path flags boot actions for the local nPartition For example to
272. ination with either the u or g option IPaddress hostname specifies the IP address or hostname of the target nPartition u or service processor g parunlock Command 261 fruled Command The ruled command blinks hardware attention indicators LEDs or turns them off This command can control the cell attention LEDs in all cell based servers as well as the I O chassis LEDs on Superdome servers The ruled command also can start and stop blinking the cabinet number LCDs on HP Superdome compute cabinets and I O expansion cabinets Refer to the fruled 1 manpage for details Synopsis fruled f o B c cell c fruled f o B i IOchassis i fruled f o b cabinet b fruled f C 1 cabinet fruled f I 1 cabinet Enhanced nPartition Commands Notes e The u h set of options may be specified to cause the command to send its management request using WBEM to an nPartition other than the local nPartition but can also be used as a loopback access to the local nPartition e The g h options may be specified to cause the command to send its management request using IPMI over LAN to a service processor in another server complex but can also be used as a loopback access to the service processor in the local complex The u and g options are mutually exclusive eee belea Options f Turn off specified attention LED s This is the default The f and o options are m
273. including cell I O chassis PCI slot and cabinet LEDs Example 7 1 Turning Attention Indicators On and Off fruled f c H fruled f I fruled o c0 c2 c4 fruled o i0 0 1 i0 0 3 fruled o b0 fruled f c B fruled f I fruled f b0 rad f attention 0 0 1 2 p rad f off 0 0 1 2 Turn off all cell and I O chassis attention indicators Blink attention indicators for cells 0 2 and 4 and I O chassis 0 0 1 and 0 0 3 Blink the cabinet number LCD for cabinet 0 Turn off all cell and I O chassis attention indicators and stop blinking the cabinet number LCD Blink the attention indicator for PCI slot 2 in cabinet 0 bay 0 chassis 1 Then turn off the same PCI slot attention indicator E E NE Procedure 7 7 Turning Attention Indicators On and Off Partition Manager You can turn attention indicators LEDs on and off by using Partition Manager When using Partition Manager Version 1 0 select a cell or I O chassis and use the Cell Light Cell LED or I O Light I O Chassis LED action To turn off all LEDs use the Complex gt Clear All LEDs action When using Partition Manager Version 2 0 select a cell or I O chassis and use the Cell gt Turn On Cell LED or l O Turn On Chassis LED action or a similar Turn Off action To turn off all LEDs use the Complex gt Clear All LEDs action 1 Access Partition Manager For details on accessing Partition Manager or other tools see Tools fo
274. indeeeteueataeectagotdemneieneet anette 87 Overview of nPartition System BOOUn gxaisssosbintexny ieey ciovaedens sande ameaadep peanut danay arse epedanoayrentacnaets 87 Boot Process Differences for nPartitions on HP 9000 servers and HP Integrity servers 88 Types of Booting and Resetting for nParhtOnsscse acne aii veae aay aaa ee tibia 89 System Boot Configuration Options ive serasscthics2isceicneseaneceesnewte cota nucaee taetesaars neg aes uttodens weteesemeonameet is 91 HP 9000 Boot Configuration OpuOns xicevacmeier weenie ai tebea iain ennatiwines 91 HP Integrity Boot Configuration Opto sais cssacstes doch piiads hiteantes Whnctienechax al sawirestea Mooeditanee 91 Tools for Booting NPartitions sissei erse io e E E EE E EEE e 95 Task Summaries for nPartition Boot and ReSet ccccceeeseccccccceceeseseseecececececeeueneseecceesessaueaseeceeeeeaeaaes 96 Troubleshooting Boot Problems duc svi ccstsaahteaaty Wiese davis sacvagusvveskas Oox EEEREN Cereiaurvaacasvaesieeedioeea ve Ooketen 100 Accessing nPartition Console and System Boot Interfaces ic2cicciei iia cteatiar inna iain 101 Monitoring nPartiton Boot ACH VILY srera essri reier besten pases eters Ea eE EE iaie aegis 104 Finding B otable Device sai iiie a r E E e E E E E inhi 106 Performing a Transfer of Control Reset asses ceased Seu oie sa ikek es ves sated hs cs Waseca sands aa OO e iiet 107 Booting and Shutting Down PAU Xe vcscastscovs aciveucedicoueesdeaveens
275. indicate the cabinet bay and chassis numbers to identify it In the following example the service processor powers off cell 2 in cabinet 0 GSP CM gt PE This command controls power enable to a hardware device Cabinet Cell IO Chassis Select Device c HQ WwW Enter cabinet number 0 Enter slot number 2 The power is ON for the Cell in Cabinet 0 Slot 2 In what state do you want the power for the Cell in Cabinet 0 Slot 2 ON OFF OFF GSP CM gt Powering Cells and I O Chassis On and Off 207 Procedure 7 4 Powering Cells and I O Chassis On and Off nPartition Commands From the command line use the frupower o c and frupower f c commands to power on and power off cells and their associated I O chassis A NOTE You can remotely perform this task using remote administration options supported by the Enhanced nPartition Commands or Partition Manager Version 2 0 Remote administration is supported by the Partition Manager Tools Switch Complexes action and by the nPartition command u h optionsor g h options For details see Tools for Managing Hardware page 201 1 Login to a system with the nPartition commands installed To manage power for a cell you must login to the nPartition to which the cell is assigned or use the Enhanced nPartition Commands remote administration features If the cell is not assigned to an nPartition you can manage its power from any nPartition or
276. ing Partition Manager Version 2 0 select the nPartition Modify nPartition action Access the Partition Manager section s for configuring cell attributes From Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the Change Cell Attributes tab then select the cell and click the Modify Cell button This enables you to configure the use on next boot value for the selected cell From Partition Manager Version 2 0 use the Set Cell Options tab to configure cell use on next boot values After changing attribute values for all the cells you plan to modify click the OK button Review all information presented in the Notes and Warnings the Summary of Changes and the HA Checks tabs Either cancel or proceed with the cell attribute changes Click the Cancel button to cancel the changes To proceed with the cell use on next boot changes click the Finish button or click the OK button 216 Managing Hardware Resources 8 Reboot the nPartition to use the cells new attribute values If you have changed any cell use on next boot settings for the nPartition then reboot the nPartition in either of two ways e Perform a standard reboot HP UX shutdown r Windows shutdown r Linux shutdown r time OpenVMS SYSSSYSTEM SHUTDOWN with an automatic system reboot If you have only changed use on next boot values from y to n then perform a reboot Any cells set to not be used will still be assigned to the nPartition but will not be used will not rendez
277. inistration Console SAC restart or shutdown commands under normal circumstances Issuing restart or shutdown at the SAC gt prompt causes the system to restart or shutdown immediately and can result in the loss of data Instead use the Windows Start menu or the shutdown command to shut down gracefully NOTE On HP rx7620 rx7640 rx8620 and rx8640 servers performing a shutdown using shutdown s or the equivalent Start Shut Down Shut down powers off the server cabinet or powers off the cells and I O chassis assigned to the nPartition On these servers this behavior can be customized For details see ACPI Softpowerdown Configuration OS Shutdown Behavior page 93 On HP Integrity Superdome servers the Windows shutdown s command shuts down the system and keeps all cells at BIB the boot is blocked inactive state 1 Login to Windows running on the nPartition that you want to shut down For example access the nPartition console and use the Windows SAC interface to start a command prompt from which you can issue Windows commands to shut down the nPartition 2 Issuethe shutdown s command to shut down the Windows Server 2003 operating system on the nPartition and reset the nPartition to the shutdown for reconfig state You also can perform this task by selecting the Start Shut Down action and choosing Shut down from the pull down menu For example shutdown s c Shut down for reconfig inactive This co
278. ion for SuSE Linux Enterprise Server Must Be single pci domain or default On cell based HP Integrity servers to boot the SuSE Linux Enterprise Server OS an nPartition must have its ACPI configuration value set to single pci domain or default e On HP rx7620 servers rx8620 servers or Integrity Superdome SD16A SD32A SD64A the ACPI configuration must be set to single pci domain e On HP rx7640 servers rx8640 servers or Integrity Superdome SD16B SD32B SD64B the ACPI configuration must be set to default At the EFI Shell enter the acpiconfig command with no arguments to list the current ACPI configuration If the acpiconfig value is not set correctly then SuSE Linux Enterprise Server could panic To set the ACPI configuration for SuSE Linux Enterprise Server at the EFI Shell enter the acpiconfig value command where value is either single pci domain for rx7620 and rx8620 servers or default for rx7640 and rx8640 servers Then enter the reset command for the nPartition to reboot with the proper configuration for SuSE Linux Enterprise Server Use either of these methods to boot SuSE Linux Enterprise Server e Choose a SuSE Linux Enterprise Server entry from the EFI Boot Manager menu To load the SuSE Linux Enterprise Server OS at the EFI Boot Manager menu choose its entry from the list of boot options Choosing a Linux entry from the boot options list boots the OS using ELILO EFI loader and the elilo conf file e Initiate
279. ion is booted you can access its system boot environment through its console Use the service processor Console menu enter CO at the service processor Main Menu Procedure 6 3 Creating a New nPartition Partition Manager You can create a new nPartition by using Partition Manager When using Partition Manager Version 1 0 use the Partition Create Partition action When using Partition Manager Version 2 0 use the nPartition Create nPartition action Access Partition Manager For details on accessing Partition Manager or other tools see Tools for Configuring nPartitions page 165 Creating a New nPartition 175 2 Run the Partition Manager task wizard for creating a new nPartition From Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the Partition Create Partition action From Partition Manager Version 2 0 select the nPartition Create nPartition action Partition Manager guides you through the steps it requires for creating a new nPartition 3 Exit Partition Manager From Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the File Exit action From Partition Manager Version 2 0 select Log off parmgr or exit the Web browser when finished Removing Deleting an nPartition You can remove an nPartition by using any one of the following procedures e Deleting an nPartition nPartition Commands page 176 e Deleting an nPartition Partition Manager page 179 Deleting an nPartition causes all cells and any I O resources c
280. ion number 0 When it is first created the Genesis Partition consists of one cell that is connected to an I O chassis that has core I O installed The Genesis Partition also should have a bootable disk or a disk onto which you can install an operating system If an operating system is not installed on any disks in the Genesis Partition you can boot the Genesis partition to the system boot interface either BCH or EFI and from that point install an operating system This installation requires either having access to an installation server or to a CD drive or DVD drive attached to an I O chassis belonging to the nPartition After you boot an operating system on the Genesis Partition you can modify the nPartition to include additional cells You also can create other new nPartitions and can modify them from the Genesis Partition or from any other nPartition that has an operating system with the nPartition tools installed Basics of nPartition Modification 30 Modifying an nPartition involves using an nPartition administration tool to revise one or more parts of the server Complex Profile data which determines how hardware is assigned to and used by nPartitions The Complex Profile is discussed in Complex Profile page 36 For detailed procedures see Chapter 6 page 165 You can modify an nPartition either locally or remotely e For local administration use nPartition Commands or Partition Manager from an nPartition in the sa
281. ion that was displayed 3 To exit the service processor Command Menu enter MA to return to the service processor Main Menu At the Main Menu enter X to exit the service processor interface Procedure 8 23 Listing Product and Serial Numbers BCH Menu From the BCH Information Menu use the CID command to list the product number and serial number for the server complex The BCH Menu is available only on HP 9000 systems 1 Access the BCH Main Menu for any nPartition in the complex Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the BCH Main Menu the Main Menu Enter command or menu gt prompt If ata BCH menu other than the Main Menu then enter MA to return to the BCH Main Menu 2 Enter IN to access the BCH Information Menu a Enter the CID command to list the product number and serial number for the server complex 4 Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the BCH environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 8 24 Listing Product and Serial Numbers nPartition Commands From the command line issue the parstatus X command to display the product number and serial number for the server complex Listing Product and Serial Numbers 235
282. ions must be shutdown for reconfig inactive For details see Genesis Partition page 30 e Creating Additional nPartitions in a Server Complex You can use either of two methods to create additional nPartitions in a complex where one or more nPartitions already are defined either use parcreate or Partition Manager from an nPartition running in the complex or use the remote administration feature of those tools running on a system outside the complex For a detailed procedure see Creating a New nPartition page 172 Creating a New nPartition Locally To create a new nPartition in the same complex where parcreate or Partition Manager is running at least one nPartition must be booted with an operating system that has the nPartition tools installed Login to HP UX on the nPartition and issue the parcreate command or access Partition Manager running on the nPartition and use its Create nPartition action Creating a New nPartition Remotely To remotely create a new nPartition in a complex do so either by using the Enhanced nPartition Commands version of parcreate or by using Partition Manager Version 2 0 Only cell based servers based on the HP sx1000 or sx2000 chipset support remote administration Both parcreate and Partition Manager support two methods of remote administration WBEM and IPMI over LAN For remote administration using WBEM the tool remotely accesses a booted operating system running on an nPartition i
283. is connected to those cells An nPartition can boot and reboot independently of any other nPartitions in the same server complex Each nPartition runs its own firmware and has its own system boot environment nPartitions provide hardware and software fault isolation a reset TOC or MCA in one nPartition does not affect any other nPartition in most cases Each nPartition is effectively an independent system that follows the boot processes outlined in the following lists Boot Overview for Cell Base HP 9000 Servers shows an overview of the boot process on HP 9000 servers PA RISC systems Boot Overview for Cell Based HP Integrity Servers shows an overview of the boot process on HP Integrity servers Itanium 2 based systems Also refer to Boot Process for Cells and nPartitions page 32 for details Boot Overview for Cell Base HP 9000 Servers Cell based HP 9000 servers have PA RISC processors and have the following boot process 1 PDC Self Test PDC Boot Boot Console Handler BCH a menu driven boot environment Initial System Loader ISL Secondary System Loader hpux HP UX Operating System Boot Overview for Cell Based HP Integrity Servers Cell based HP Integrity servers have Intel Itanium processors and have the following boot process 1 Processor Abstraction Layer PAL 2 System Abstraction Layer SAL 3 Extensible Firmware Interface EFI 4 EFI Boot Manager menu driven boot environment Sot we GN Overview
284. is available to the nPartition Actions If the nPartition was reset to the shutdown for reconfig state use the BO command from the service processor Command menu to boot the nPartition past boot is blocked to allow it to boot to its system boot environment If no valid core cell was available to the nPartition when it booted check the power for all core cell choices a cell might be powered off and power it on if needed Also review the chassis logs for the nPartition to search for any core cell problems and failures Accessing nPartition Console and System Boot Interfaces You can access an nPartition console and its BCH or EFI system boot environment through the service processor GSP or MP On HP 9000 servers the system boot environment is the Boot Console Handler BCH interface On HP Integrity servers the system boot environment is the Extensible Firmware Interface EFI Each nPartition has its own system boot environment that provides you a method for interacting with the nPartition before an operating system has booted on it The system boot environment is accessible through the nPartition console during the time after the cells assigned to the nPartition have booted and completed nPartition rendezvous and before the nPartition begins loading an operating system Accessing nPartition Console and System Boot Interfaces 101 A NOTE Always login to the service processor from a tty not console login session You can c
285. is equivalent to the shutdown R command e To shut down HP UX and halt an nPartition shutdown h On cell based HP Integrity servers the shutdown h command is equivalent to the shutdown R H command e To perform a reboot for reconfig of an nPartition shutdown R e To hold an nPartition at a shutdown for reconfig state shutdown R H A NOTE On Superdome SX1000 PA and SX2000 PA shutdown R H does not stop at BIB if the MP has been hot swapped since the last reboot For details refer to the shutdown 1M manpage E NOTE On HP rx7620 rx7640 rx8620 and rx8640 servers you can configure the nPartition behavior when an OS is shutdown and halted shutdown h or shutdown R H The two options are to have hardware power off when the OS is halted or to have the nPartition be made inactive all cells are in a boot is blocked state The normal behavior for HP UX shutdown and halt is for the nPartition to be made inactive For details refer to ACPI Softpowerdown Configuration OS Shutdown Behavior page 93 Procedure 5 14 Shutting Down HP UX From the HP UX command line issue the shut down command to shut down the HP UX OS 1 Login to HP UX running on the nPartition that you want to shut down You should log in to the MP for the server and use the Console menu to access the system console Accessing the console through the MP enables you to maintain console access to the system after HP UX has shut down 118
286. ist e If the boot option currently is set to an HP UX device and the list item s description is not standard for its place in the boot options list then the new boot device setting is inserted as a new item in the boot options list In this case the original list item is moved toward the end of the boot options list Configuring Autoboot Options You can configure autoboot options by using any one of the following procedures e Configuring Autoboot Options BCH Menu page 159 e Configuring Autoboot Options EFI Boot Manager page 159 e Configuring Autoboot Options EFI Shell page 160 e Configuring Autoboot Options HP UX page 161 158 Booting and Resetting nPartitions Procedure 5 59 Configuring Autoboot Options BCH Menu From the BCH Menu use the PATHFLAGS command at the BCH Configuration menu to set the boot time actions for an nPartition The BCH Menu is available only on HP 9000 systems 1 Access the BCH Main Menu for the nPartition whose autoboot options you want to configure Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the BCH Main Menu the Main Menu Enter command or menu gt prompt If ata BCH menu other than the Main Menu then enter MA to return to the BCH Main Menu Access the BCH Configuration menu by entering CO at the Main menu and set the boot action for e
287. it is the default use The cell use on next boot value y or n Use y the default if the cell is to be an active member of the nPartition or use n if the cell is to remain an inactive member fail The cell failure usage ri reactivate with interleave is the only supported failure usage policy and it is the default For details refer to the parmodify 1M manpage e For the Enhanced nPartition Commands the parmodify command s m option is as follows m cell type use fail clm where the cell type use and fail attributes are the same as supported by the Original nPartition Commands The clm value specifies the amount of memory that will be configured as cell local memory for the cell TAN CAUTION Memory configured as cell local memory only can be used by operating systems that support it Any memory configured as cell local memory is unusable when an nPartition runs an operating system that does not support it Cell Local Memory Specification You can specify the clm value in either of two forms percentage or absolute amount of memory Percentage cell local memory CLM The percent number can be any number in the range 0 100 with a suffix of This number is rounded to 12 5 25 37 5 50 62 5 75 87 5 or 100 If the cell contains less than 4 GBytes of memory then the percentage is rounded to 25 50 75 or 100 Percentages are rounded up or down to the nearest value but are not round
288. ith software running on the nPartition Once the nPartition has completed resetting or has completed booting the operating system you can interact with the BCH or EFI system boot environment or with an operating system running on the nPartition To determine the boot state of an nPartition use the Virtual Front Panel which is available from the service processor Main menu e When another user already is attached to the console you can access the nPartition console in spy read only mode or can force write access by typing ecf Control e c f Spy mode allows you to view console information but does not enable you to enter commands If you type when accessing an nPartition console in spy mode the console prints the following message Read only use Ecf to attach to console When in spy mode you can force access to the nPartition console by typing ecf Control e c f Doing this provides you interactive console access and forces bumps the user who was using the console into spy mode Bumped user Admin Monitoring nPartition Boot Activity 104 On HP cell based servers you can monitor the nPartition boot process from power on or reset to operating system start up using the Virtual Front Panel VFP view of the nPartition Each nPartition has its own VFP that displays details about the cells assigned to the nPartition and the current boot state and activity Booting and Resetting nPartitions Procedure 5 2 Mo
289. ition DIMMDEALLOC cell dimm OFF deconfigures the specified DIMM dimm on the cell cell indicated DIMMDEALLOC cell dimm ON configures the DIMM on the cell Use DIMMDEALLOC cell to display the DIMM configuration for a cell Enter HELP DIMMDEALLOC for details Reboot the nPartition using the REBOOT command Whenever changing memory configurations you must reboot the corresponding nPartition to allow the configuration changes to take place Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the BCH environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 7 15 Configuring and Deconfiguring Memory EFI Shell From the EFI Shell environment use the dimmconfig command to configure or deconfigure memory modules DIMMs in cells assigned to the local nPartition The EFI Shell is available only on HP Integrity systems 1 Access the EFI Shell environment for the nPartition whose memory you want to configure or deconfigure Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If at another EFI menu select the Exit option from the sub menus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading From the EFI Boo
290. ity systems 1 Access the EFI Shell environment for the nPartition whose boot time tests you want to configure Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If at another EFI menu select the Exit option from the sub menus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading From the EFI Boot Manager menu select the EFI Shell menu option to access the EFI Shell environment 2 At the EFI Shell environment use the boottest command to list enable or disable boot time system tests for the local nPartition To display the list of supported boot time system tests enter the boottest h command at the EFI Shell prompt Shell gt boottest h Usage BOOTTEST on off test on off test early _cpu late _cpu platform chipset io_hw mem_init mem_test Shell gt You can enable or disable any of the boot time tests by specifying the name of the test to boottest The test names include early cpu late cpu platform chipset io hw mem_init and mem_test System Tests Configuring and Deconfiguring Tests from the EFI Shell e boottest Display the current boot time system test configuration e boottest testname Display the current setting for the specified test testname For example boottest mem_test displays the memory selftest settings
291. kernel 6 Exit the console and management processor interfaces if you are finished using them To exit the EFI environment press B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the management processor Main Menu To exit the management processor type X at the Main Menu LVM Maintenance Mode HP UX Booting This section describes how to boot HP UX in LVM maintenance mode on cell based HP 9000 servers and cell based HP Integrity servers e On HP 9000 servers to boot HP UX in LVM maintenance mode refer to LVM Maintenance Mode HP UX Booting BCH Menu page 116 e On HP Integrity servers to boot HP UX in LVM maintenance mode refer to LVM Maintenance Mode HP UX Booting EFI Shell page 117 Procedure 5 12 LVM Maintenance Mode HP UX Booting BCH Menu From the BCH Menu you can boot HP UX in LVM maintenance mode by issuing the BOOT command stopping at the ISL interface and issuing hpux loader options The BCH Menu is available only on HP 9000 servers 1 Access the BCH Main Menu for the nPartition on which you want to boot HP UX in LVM maintenance mode Log in to the management processor MP and enter CO to access the Console list Choose the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the BCH Main Menu the Main Menu Enter command or menu gt prompt If you are ata BCH menu other than the Main Menu then enter MA to return to the BCH Main Menu 116 Booting and Resetting nP
292. l cells at a boot is blocked BIB state thus making the nPartition and all of its cells inactive On HP 1x7620 rx7640 rx8620 and rx8640 servers you can configure the OS shutdown for reconfig behavior for each nPartition to either power off hardware or keep cells at BIB See ACPI Softpowerdown Configuration OS Shutdown Behavior page 93 for details To put an nPartition into the shutdown for reconfig state use the shutdown R H HP UX command the shutdown s Windows command or the Linux shutdown h time command To perform a shutdown for reconfig of an nPartition running OpenVMS 164 first issue SYSSSYSTEM SHUTDOWN COM from OpenVMS and enter No at the Should an automatic system reboot be performed prompt then access the MP and from the MP Command Menu issue the RR command and specify the nPartition that is to be shutdown for reconfig From system firmware to put an nPartition into the shutdown for reconfig state use the RECONFIGRESET command from the BCH interface the reconfigreset command from the EFI Shell or the RR command from the service processor Command menu To make an nPartition boot past shutdown for reconfig use either the BO command or the PE command from the service processor Command menu Foran inactive nPartition whose cells are at BIB use the BO command from the service processor Command menu The BO command makes the nPartition active by allowing Booting and Resetting nPartitions its cells to
293. lem On an HP Integrity server HP UX begins booting but is interrupted with a panic when launching the HP UX kernel stand vmunix Causes The nPartition ACPI configuration might not be properly set for booting HP UX In order to boot the HP UX operating system an nPartition must have its acpiconfig value set to default Actions At the EFI Shell interface enter the acpiconfig command with no arguments to list the current ACPI configuration for an nPartition If the acpiconfig value is set to windows then HP UX cannot boot in this situation you must reconfigure acpiconfig To set the ACPI configuration for HP UX at the EFI Shell interface enter the acpiconfig default command and then enter the reset command for the nPartition to reboot with the proper default configuration for HP UX 100 Booting and Resetting nPartitions Use the help acpiconfig command for more details e Problem Not all cells boot to join rendezvous an nPartition Causes Some cells may have the use on next boot value set to n do not use or the cells may have been powered off or the cells may have booted too late to participate in partition rendezvous or the cells have failed self tests and cannot be used or the cells are incompatible Actions Check the cell use on next boot values and change them to y as needed then reboot for reconfig HP UX shutdown R or Windows shutdown r Check cell power frupower d C and power on any cells as need
294. les the newly assigned cell to rendezvous and be actively used when the nPartition reboots e Perform a reboot for reconfig of an nPartition as soon as possible after you have added a cell to an active nPartition and have specified a y use on next boot value for the new cell e You need not perform a reboot for reconfig of an nPartition in these situations When you have added a cell to an inactive nPartition When you have added a cell with a n use on next boot value and you did not specify the B option to the parmodify command Procedure 6 6 Adding Cells to an nPartition nPartition Commands From the command line use the parmodify command to add cells to an nPartition You also can use the parstatus command to list nPartition and complex details such as available cells A NOTE You can remotely perform this task using remote administration options supported by the Enhanced nPartition Commands or Partition Manager Version 2 0 Remote administration is supported by the Partition Manager Tools Switch Complexes action and by the nPartition command u h optionsor g h options For details see Tools for Configuring nPartitions page 165 1 Usetheparstatus A C command to list all available cells the unassigned cells in the server complex 2 Choose one or more eligible cells from the list to add to the nPartition Adding the cell s to the nPartition must create a configuration that meets the hard
295. less the command is issued with the g h options Refer to the parremove 1M manpage for complete details Synopsis parremove p PartitionNumber F Enhanced nPartition Commands Notes e The u h set of options may be specified to cause the command to send its management request using WBEM to an nPartition other than the local nPartition but can also be used as a loopback access to the local nPartition e The g h options may be specified to cause the command to send its management request using IPMI over LAN to a service processor in another server complex but can also be used as a loopback access to the service processor in the local complex The u and g options are mutually exclusive Options p PartitionNumber Specifies the nPartition number to be removed F Forcibly remove the nPartition If the nPartition is inactive the nPartition is removed If the nPartition is active and if it is the local nPartition the nPartition is removed If the nPartition is active but is not the local nPartition then the nPartition will not be removed u username Enhanced nPartition Commands only Specifies the account and authorization to access an nPartition other than the local nPartition The h option is required if this option is used username specifies a configured user name on the target nPartition g Enhanced nPartition Commands only Allows access to the complex specified by the h option The a
296. lies to first generation cell based servers and HP sx1000 based servers it allows the nPartition to boot or recover the OS even if only the core cell for the nPartition is functioning On HP sx2000 based servers every cell has core I O Assign multiple core capable cells to each nPartition This allows the nPartition to boot at least to the system boot environment either BCH or EFI if a core capable cell fails to boot On HP sx2000 based servers every cell has core I O Disregard this recommendation if you are configuring multiple nPartitions in a cell based server that has only two core capable cells The memory configuration of all cells in an nPartition should be identical to achieve best performance Each cell in an nPartition should have the same number of DIMMs the same capacity size and the same locations population of DIMMs This avoids cell interconnect crossbar hot spots by distributing memory evenly across all of the cells in the nPartition Recommended nPartition Configurations 63 e The memory configuration of each cell should include a multiple of two memory ranks first generation cell based HP 9000 servers or a multiple of two memory echelons servers based on the HP sx1000 chipset or HP sx2000 chipset per cell On the first generation of cell based HP 9000 servers each memory rank is 4 DIMMs If possible install memory in sets of 8 DIMMs 8 DIMMs or 16 DIMMs on HP rp7405 rp7410 rp8400 and Su
297. list for the local nPartition autoboot List enable or disable the nPartition autoboot configuration value acpiconfig List and configure the nPartition ACPI configuration setting which determines whether HP UX OpenVMS Windows or Linux can boot on the nPartition To boot HP UX 11i v2 B 11 23 HP UX 11i v3 B 11 31 or HP OpenVMS 164 the ACPI configuration setting must be set to default To boot Windows Server 2003 the ACPI configuration setting for the nPartition must be set to windows To boot Red Hat Enterprise Linux or SuSE Linux Enterprise Server On HP rx7620 servers rx8620 servers or Integrity Superdome SD16A SD32A SD64A the ACPI configuration must be set to single pci domain On HP rx7640 servers rx8640 servers or Integrity Superdome SD16B SD32B SD64B the ACPI configuration must be set to default acpiconfig enable softpowerdown When set causes nPartition hardware to be powered off when the operating system issues a shutdown for reconfig command On HP rx7620 rx7640 rx8620 and rx8640 servers with a windows ACPI configuration setting this is the default behavior Available only on HP rx7620 rx7640 rx8620 and rx8640 servers acpiconfig disable softpowerdown When set causes nPartition cells to remain at BIB when the operating system issues a shutdown for reconfig command In this case an OS shutdown for reconfig makes the nPartition inactive On HP rx7620 rx7640 rx862
298. ll environment 120 Booting and Resetting nPartitions Access the EFI System Partition sX where X is the file system number for the device from which you want to boot HP OpenVMS For example enter fs2 to access the EFI System Partition for the bootable file system number 2 The EFI Shell prompt changes to reflect the file system currently accessed The full path for the HP OpenVMS loader is efi vms vms_loader efi and it should be on the device you are accessing At the EFI Shell environment use the bc g command to manage the boot options list You can also accomplish this step by using the efi vms vms_bcfg efi and efi vms vms_show efi utilities which are available on the EFI System Partition for HP OpenVMS Both vms_bcfg and vms_ show are unique utilities for OpenVMS 164 The vms_bcfg utility differs from the bcf g EFI command in that vms_bcfg enables you to specify boot devices using VMS style device names The bcfg command includes the following options for managing the boot options list e bcfg boot dump Display all items in the boot options list for the system e bcfg boot rm Remove the item number specified by from the boot options list e bcfg boot mv a b Move the item number specified by a to the position specified by b in the boot options list e bcfg boot add file efi Description Add anew boot option to the position in the boot options list specified by The new boot option references
299. ll Number Formatore soreo ori T S LE ATTE 243 Cell IDs in Hardware Location Format eacoisioretireri irrist Enee a rN ETG 244 List of Examples 1 1 1 2 4 1 5 1 7 1 7 2 7 3 A 1 10 Unique IDs for an nPartition and Complex csavesived ode shcacesah ver eats neues ssuetsousbsbveaesabuat eagnneetianeeeels 48 Unique IDs for Virtual Partitions VP ars iscsi sais sitocovenienyscetea sesh tvdnn vandcashevse soar eceinesodeeddnty venede 48 Overview of a Service Processor Login Session yitivisn tinea ei ieee oa 75 Single User HP UX BOOtissssiri iis esteso cated jpnsluanvay eri eter O E AEREE naked ES ann EETA iE 115 Turning Attention Indicators On and Off sesssessessesssesssissseseessersrisresserssesnsssernsisnreseesseesreseense 212 Checking the Hyper Threading Status for an nPartition sesssesssesesssessrssressessersresresserseesees 219 Enabling Hyper Threading for an martian cos cess tessnnsine sa ducesets venavnsa ieuelosuevsdnesnwedont ze oagentalecuedins 220 I O Specification Formats for Cabinets Bays and Chassis ccccccesceeseesecssecessceeeeeeeeeseees 247 List of Examples About This Document This book describes nPartition system administration procedures concepts and principles for the HP servers that support nPartitions New and Changed Information in This Edition This edition includes changes and additions related to the Superdome SX1000 PA and SX2000 PA Document Organization This book c
300. llow access to all hardware and nPartitions See Command Reference for Service Processor Commands page 80 EFI Boot Manager and EFI Shell On HP Integrity servers only the EFI Extensible Firmware Interface Boot Manager and Shell are the methods for interacting with an nPartition before it has booted an operating system See Command Reference for EFI Shell Commands page 81 Boot Console Handler BCH Menu Commands On PA RISC servers the BCH interface is the method for interacting with an nPartition before it has booted an operating system See Command Reference for BCH Menu Commands page 84 nPartition Commands HP nPartition commands allow you to configure manage and monitor nPartitions and hardware within a server complex The Enhanced nPartition Commands also can remotely manage complexes based on the HP sx1000 chipset or HP sx2000 chipset See Commands for Configuring nPartitions page 19 for details Partition Manager opt parmgr bin parmgr Partition Manager provides a graphical interface for managing and monitoring nPartitions and hardware within a server complex See Partition Manager page 22 Task Summaries for nPartition and Hardware Status Table 8 1 describes the main hardware and nPartition status tasks and provides brief summaries and references for detailed procedures You can perform the status tasks in Table 8 1 Hardware and nPartition Status Task Summaries
301. lls to the nPartition From Partition Manager Version 1 0 use the Partition Modify Partition action and select the Add Remove Cells tab To add cells to the nPartition select the cells from the Available Cells list and click the Add button From Partition Manager Version 2 0 use the nPartition Modify nPartition action and select the Add Remove Cells tab To add cells to the nPartition click on the checkbox for the new cells so that a checkmark appears 4 After selecting the new cells to add to the nPartition click the OK button 5 Review all information presented in the Notes and Warnings the Summary of Changes and the HA Checks tabs and either cancel or proceed with the changes Click the Cancel button to cancel the changes To proceed with adding the cells click the Finish button or click the OK button 6 As needed perform a reboot for reconfig on the modified nPartition HP UX shutdown R Windows shutdown r Linux shutdown r time OpenVMS SYSS SYSTEM SHUTDOWN with an automatic system reboot See Reboot for Reconfig Guidelines for Adding Cells page 180 for details on when to perform a reboot for reconfig Unassigning Removing Cells from an nPartition You can remove cells from an nPartition by using any one of the following procedures e Removing Cells from an nPartition nPartition Commands page 183 e Removing Cells from an nPartition Partition Manager page 184 Removing a cell from a
302. ls and then proceeding with the nPartition boot phase On HP 9000 servers shutdown r resets only the active cells On HP Integrity servers shutdown r has the same effect as shutdown R All cells are reset and nPartition reconfiguration occurs as needed shutdown h On HP 9000 servers shuts down HP UX halts all processing on the nPartition and does not reset cells On HP Integrity servers shutdown h has the same effect as shutdown R Hand results in a shutdown for reconfig shutdown R Shuts down HP UX and performs a reboot for reconfig of the nPartition All cells are reset and nPartition reconfiguration occurs as needed The nPartition then proceeds with the nPartition boot phase shutdown R H Shuts down HP UX and performs a shutdown for reconfig of the nPartition All cells are reset and nPartition reconfiguration occurs as needed All cells then remain at a wait at BIB state and the nPartition is inactive NOTE On Superdome SX1000 PA and SX2000 PA shutdown R H does not stop at BIB if the MP has been hot swapped since the last reboot On HP rx7620 rx7640 rx8620 and rx8640 servers with a default to support HP UX ACPI configuration setting a wait at BIB state is the default behavior but the acpiconfig enable softpowerdown EFI Shell command can be used to instead cause all nPartition hardware to power off e HP OpenVMS 164 includes the following commands for shutting down and rebooting the nPar
303. m Partition the full paths to the loader and configuration files are EFI redhat elilo efiand EFI redhat elilo conf e ELILO Loader Files for SuSE Linux Enterprise Server Ona SuSE Linux Enterprise Server boot device EFI System Partition the full paths to the loader and configuration files are efi SuSE elilo efi and efi SuSE elilo conf A NOTE The Linux loader ELILO EFI is available only on HP Integrity servers Intel Itanium based systems See Using Linux Loader ELILO Commands page 154 for details on issuing Linux loader commands Also see Linux Boot Option Management page 153 for information about ELILO and elilo conf Procedure 5 54 Linux Loader ELILO EFI Booting and Access Use this procedure to access the ELILO Linux loader 1 Load the ELILO EFI Linux loader Either select a Linux entry from the EFI Boot Manager menu the boot options list for the nPartition or invoke the ELILO EFI Linux loader from the EFI Shell 2 Type any key when the ELILO boot prompt is displayed to stop the boot process at ELILO After you type a key for example space the ELILO loader remains at the ELILO boot prompt rather than loading the default Linux kernel entry in the elilo conf file 3 Issue ELILO loader commands or enter the kernel path or label from the elilo conf file that you wish to boot To exit the ELILO loader type Esc then Enter at the ELILO boot prompt To list labels in the current
304. mand HP UX B 11 11 only and the olrad command HP UX B 11 23 and HP UX B 11 31 You can use the fruled command and specify o or f and a cabinet cell or I O chassis o option to blink the LED f option to turn off the LED b for a cabinet where is the cabinet number c for a cell where is the cell number i for an I O chassis where is the cabinet bay chassis HP UX B 11 11 supports the rad command for controlling PCI card slot attention indicators and other tasks HP UX B 11 23 and HP UX B 11 31 support the olrad command for controlling PCI card slot attention indicators and other tasks A NOTE You can remotely perform this task using remote administration options supported by the Enhanced nPartition Commands or Partition Manager Version 2 0 Remote administration is supported by the Partition Manager Tools Switch Complexes action and by the nPartition command u h optionsor g h options For details see Tools for Managing Hardware page 201 1 Login to a system with the nPartition commands installed If using remote administration features to turn attention indicators on or off you can login to any system with Enhanced nPartition Commands installed To manage PCI slot attention indicators you must access HP UX in the local nPartition where the PCI slot resides the nPartition to which the cell attached to the I O chassis containing the PCI slot is assigned 210 Managing H
305. me complex as the nPartition to be modified Some nPartition details also can be modified locally from an nPartition console by using EFI Shell commands or BCH menu commands e For remote administration use remote administration features of the Enhanced nPartition Commands or Partition Manager Version 2 0 You can use either of two methods for remote administration WBEM and IPMI over LAN Getting Started with nPartitions Forremote administration using WBEM the tool remotely accesses an operating system running on an nPartition in the target complex Use the u h set of parmodify options or the Partition Manager Switch Complexes action and remote nPartition option For remote administration using IPMI over LAN the tool remotely accesses the service processor of the target complex Use the g h set of parmodify options or the Partition Manager Switch Complexes action and remote partitionable complex option See Remote and Local Management of nPartitions page 41 for details nPartition Modification Tasks The following tasks are among the basic procedures for modifying nPartitions Assigning and Unassigning Cells To assign add or unassign remove cells from an nPartition use the parmodify p a command to add a cell or the parmodify p d command to remove a cell from the specified nPartition p where is the partition number From Partition Manager select the nPartition use the
306. memory configured as cell local memory is unusable when an nPartition runs an operating system that does not support it NOTE Changing a cell use on next boot attribute may be restricted on any server complex that is under an Instant Capacity contract NOTE After changing cell attributes in order to use the new settings you must reboot the nPartition to which the cell is assigned HP UX shutdown r Windows shutdown r Linux shutdown r time OpenVMS SYS SYSTEM SHUTDOWN with an automatic system reboot If modifying an inactive cell to be active perform a reboot for reconfig HP UX shutdown R Windows shutdown r Linux shutdown r time OpenVMS SYSSSYSTEM SHUTDOWN with an automatic system reboot Procedure 6 16 Setting Cell Attributes BCH Menu From the BCH Configuration Menu use the CELLCONFIG command to list or set the use on next boot value for each cell in the local nPartition The BCH Menu is available only on HP 9000 systems 1 Access the BCH Main Menu for the nPartition whose cell use on next boot attributes you want to list or set Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the BCH Main Menu the Main Menu Enter command or menu gt prompt If ata BCH menu other than the Main Menu then enter MA to return to the BCH Main Menu 2 Enter CO to access the BCH Configuration Menu
307. mes Procedure 6 10 Renaming an nPartition BCH Menu From the BCH Configuration Menu use the PD command to display and change the name of the local nPartition The BCH Menu is available only on HP 9000 systems 1 Access the BCH Main Menu for the nPartition whose name you want to change Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the BCH Main Menu the Main Menu Enter command or menu gt prompt If ata BCH menu other than the Main Menu then enter MA to return to the BCH Main Menu 2 Enter CO to access the BCH Configuration Menu 3 At the BCH Configuration Menu enter the PD NewName command to change the nPartition name to NewName No quotation marks are needed when specifying the name even if it includes spaces To display the nPartition number and its current name enter the PD command PD not followed by any text 4 Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the BCH environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 6 11 Renaming an nPartition nPartition Commands From the command line rename an nPartition by using the parmodify p P namecommand where P name specifies the new name for the nPartition p where is the nPartition
308. mmand for the nPartition to reboot with the proper default configuration for OpenVMS Procedure 5 16 Booting HP OpenVMS EFI Boot Manager From the EFI Boot Manager menu select an item from the boot options list to boot HP OpenVMS using the selected boot option 1 Access the EFI Boot Manager menu for the system on which you want to boot HP OpenVMS Log in to the management processor MP and enter CO to select the system console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If at another EFI menu select the Exit option from the sub menus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading 2 At the EFI Boot Manager menu select an item from the boot options list Each item in the boot options list references a specific boot device and provides a specific set of boot options or arguments to use when booting the device 3 Press Enter to initiate booting using the selected boot option 4 Exit the console and management processor interfaces when finished using them To exit the EFI environment type B Control B this exits the system console and returns to the management processor Main Menu To exit the management processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 5 17 Booting HP OpenVMS EFI Shell From the EFI Shell environment to boot HP OpenVMS on a device first access the EFI System Partition for example fs0 for the root device and enter efi vms vms_loader t
309. mmand initiates a Windows system shutdown and stop after a timeout period of 60 seconds The c option specifies a message that is broadcast to any other users of the system The shutdown s command and option shuts down Windows reset all cells in the nPartition perform any nPartition reconfigurations and halt all cells at a boot is blocked state thus making the nPartition and all its cells inactive For more details use the help shutdown command Procedure 5 44 Shutting Down to Shutdown for Reconfig Linux To perform a shutdown for reconfig of an nPartition from Linux issue the shutdown h time command where time is the time when the system will be shutdown for reconfig NOTE On HP rx7620 rx7640 rx8620 and rx8640 servers you can configure the nPartition behavior when Linux initiates a shutdown for reconfig shutdown h time The two options are to have hardware power off when the OS is halted or to have the nPartition be made inactive all cells are in a boot is blocked state The normal behavior for Linux shutdown for reconfig is for the nPartition be made inactive For details see ACPI Softpowerdown Configuration OS Shutdown Behavior page 93 1 Login to Linux running on the system you want to shut down Shutting Down to a Shutdown for Reconfig Inactive State 145 2 Issue issue the shutdown h time command with the required time argument to specify when the shutdown is to occur You can specify time in
310. n and removing an nPartition e Powering on off all cells and I O chassis in the server including unassigned resources e Manipulating any of the attention indicators LEDs Web Based Enterprise Management WBEM The Enhanced nPartition Commands and Partition Manager Version 2 0 are implemented as WBEM client applications The Enhanced nPartition Commands toolset for HP UX and Linux also includes a WBEM agent known as the nPartition Provider The Windows operating system includes the Windows Management Instrumentation WMI software which is the Microsoft implementation of WBEM To support the Windows release of the Enhanced nPartition Commands HP also provides the WMI Mapper and the WMI nPartition Provider software components for the Windows system The WMI based nPartition tools components for Windows provides a WBEM compliant solution All communication with the service processor whether by way of the IPMI BT path for example using dev ipmi on HP UX 11i v2 B 11 23 and HP UX 11i v3 B 11 31 or by IPMI over LAN is done by the nPartition Provider The nPartition Provider responds to requests sent to it by the nPartition commands and Partition Manager Partition Manager uses the nPartition commands to make changes to a cell based server Partition Manager Version 2 0 only uses WBEM directly when retrieving information about a server The power of WBEM is that it enables a distributed architecture The applications the nPartiti
311. n on means the test is normally executed on each boot of f means the test is normally omitted on each boot partial means some subtests normally are executed on each boot DEFAULT The default setting for the test either on off or partial 3 Usethe setboot command to enable or disable boot time self tests for the local nPartition You can use the following command to configure tests on HP Integrity systems setboot T test_name on off default test_name is the name of the self test or is all for all tests The T option changes the test setting for the next boot only A NOTE The setboot command s t option is not supported for HP Integrity systems After modifying the self test configuration for an nPartition you can list the new settings with the setboot v command For more details refer to the setboot 1M manpage 164 Booting and Resetting nPartitions 6 Creating and Configuring nPartitions This chapter has procedures for creating configuring and managing nPartitions on Hewlett Packard servers that support them For an introduction to nPartition features see Chapter 1 page 15 For nPartition configuration requirements and recommendations see Chapter 3 page 61 Tools for Configuring nPartitions You can configure and manage nPartitions using the tools listed here e Service Processor MP or GSP Menus Service processor menus provide a complex wide service interface that can allow access to
312. n 1 0 for HP UX 11i v1 systems Partition Manager Version 2 0 is distributed and installed with the HP UX 11i v3 B 11 31 release and all HP UX 11i v2 B 11 23 releases It also is available for Windows 32 bit and Windows 64 bit as part of the the Smart Setup CD and is available for Linux on the HP Integrity Essentials Foundation Pack for Linux Partition Manager Version 2 0 for HP UX provides the opt parmgr bin parmgr command to run stop and restart Partition Manager Refer to the parmgr hcommand or the parmgr 1M manpage for command line options Also see the Partition Manager Version 2 0 online help available at the following Web site http docs hp com en PARMGR2 To view the online help without running Partition Manager you can open the help files using a Web browser either on a system where Partition Manager is installed or on a system that has a downloaded copy of the help files Getting Started with nPartitions Partition Manager Version 2 0 for Windows A The Partition Manager Version 2 0 for Windows can be installed and run on either 32 bit or 64 bit Windows systems A single Partition Manager bundle is provided for both 32 bit and 64 bit systems e Using Partition Manager for Windows on any 32 bit system running Windows XP Windows 2000 with Service Pack 3 or Windows 2003 32 bit Edition enables you to use a 32 bit system as a remote management station for nPartition administration e Using Partition Manager
313. n Commands to remotely administer a server also specify the u h options or the g h options as appropriate If removing multiple cells from an nPartition specify each cell with a separate d option on the same command line such as parmodify p1 d0 d2 toremove cells 0 and 2 from partition number 1 Unassigning Removing Cells from an nPartition 183 Slightly different procedures are required for removing active cells and inactive cells See the following information for details Guidelines for Removing an Active Cell and Guidelines for Removing an Inactive Cell If at least one of the cells you plan to remove is currently active then follow the guidelines for removing active cells e Guidelines for Removing an Active Cell Specify the B option to parmodify when removing an active cell from an nPartition if you want the nPartition to become active following its reboot for reconfig For example the following command removes cell 4 from partition 0 and the B option ensures that the nPartition will be active following its reboot for reconfig parmodify p0 d4 B Cell 4 is active Use shutdown R to shutdown the system to ready for reconfig state Command succeeded You must perform a reboot for reconfig after you issue the parmodify command to remove active cell s from the nPartition This is covered in the step that follows e Guidelines for Removing an Inactive Cell When removing an inac
314. n Menu Command Description BOot PRI HAA ALT lt path gt Boot from specified path PAth PRI HAA ALT lt path gt Display or modify a path SEArch ALL lt path gt Search for boot devices ScRoll ON OFF Display or change scrolling capability COnfiguration menu Displays or sets boot values INformation menu Displays hardware information SERvice menu Displays service commands Display Redisplay the current menu HElp lt menu gt lt command gt Display help for menu or command REBOOT Restart Partition RECONFIGRESET Reset to allow Reconfig Complex Profile Main Menu Enter command or menu gt SEARCH Searching for potential boot device s This may take several minutes To discontinue search press any key termination may not be immediate Path Device Path dec Device Type PO 0 0 1 0 0 15 Random access media P1 0 0 1 0 0 12 Random access media P2 0 0 1 0 0 11 Random access media P3 0 0 1 0 0 9 Random access media P4 0 0 1 0 0 8 Random access media P5 0 0 1 0 0 6 Random access media Main Menu Enter command or menu gt The SEARCH command lists up to the first 20 potential boot devices that it locates and lists each with a path number P0 through P19 To boot a device that was reported by the SEARCH command specify the path number or the full device path For example BOOT PO would boot the path listed as path number PO 106 Booting and Resettin
315. n Next Boot yes Partition Number 0 Partition Name Partition 0 CPU Details Type 8820 Speed 900 MHz CPU Status 0 ok 1 ok 2 ok 3 ok 4 ok 5 ok 6 ok 7 ok CPUs OK 8 Deconf 0 Max 8 Memory Details DIMM Size MB Status OA 2048 ok 4A 2048 ok OB 2048 ok 4B 2048 ok 1A 2048 ok 5A 2048 ok 1B 2048 ok 5B 2048 ok 2A 2048 ok 6A 2048 ok 2B 2048 ok 6B 2048 ok 3A 2048 ok 7A 2048 ok 3B 2048 ok 7B 2048 ok Memory DIMM OK 16 DIMM Deconft a0 Max DIMMs 16 Memory OK 32 00 GB Memory Deconf 0 00 GB 26 Getting Started with nPartitions Active and Inactive nPartition Boot States Each nPartition has a boot state of either active or inactive The boot state indicates whether the nPartition has booted so that it may be interactively accessed through its console active nPartitions or if it cannot be used interactively inactive nPartitions You can use the parstatus P command or Partition Manager to list all nPartitions and their boot states active or inactive status parstatus P Partition Par of of I O Num Status Cells Chassis Core cell Partition Name first 30 chars 0 inactive 2 1 feshd5a 1 active 2 1 cab1 cell2 feshd5b Likewise you can view nPartition boot states using the Virtual Front Panel which is available from the service processor Main menu for the server complex Active nPartition An nPartition that is active has at least one cor
316. n in any of the following ways e Absolute time in the format hh mm in which hh is the hour one or two digits and mm is the minute of the hour two digits e Number of minutes to wait in the format m in which m is the number of minutes e now to immediately shut down this is equivalent to using 0 to wait zero minutes Refer to the shutdown 8 Linux manpage for details Also refer to the Linux manpage for the poweroff command A NOTE On HP rx7620 rx7640 rx8620 and rx8640 servers you can configure the nPartition z behavior when an OS is shut down and halted shutdown h or poweroff The two options are to have hardware power off when the OS is halted or to have the nPartition be made inactive all cells are in a boot is blocked state The normal behavior for Red Hat Enterprise Linux or SuSE Linux Enterprise Server shutdown and halt is for the nPartition to be made inactive For details refer to ACPI Softpowerdown Configuration OS Shutdown Behavior page 93 Procedure 5 25 Shutting Down Linux From the command line for Red Hat Enterprise Linux or SuSE Linux Enterprise Server issue the shutdown command to shut down the OS 134 Booting and Resetting nPartitions Log in to Linux running on the system you want to shut down You should log in to the MP for the server and use the Console menu to access the system console Accessing the console through the MP enables you to maintain console access to the system after
317. n is required if this option is used Enhanced nPartition Commands only This option is only used in combination with either the u or g option IPaddress hostname specifies the IP address or hostname of the target nPartition u or service processor g parmodify Command 255 parremove Command The parremove command removes an existing nPartition This removes all cells from the nPartition and destroys the nPartition definition Root permission or IPMI LAN access is required to run this command e To remove the local nPartition you must specify the F option For the Original nPartition Commands the local nPartition is the one from which you issue the parremove command For the Enhanced nPartition Commands the local nPartition either is the one where the command is issued or if the u h options are specified it is the nPartition whose host is specified by h e Toremove a remote nPartition using the Original nPartition Commands the remote nPartition must be inactive it must be shutdown for reconfig or the parremove command will not be able to remove the nPartition When using the Enhanced nPartition Commands parremove can remove an active remote nPartition when both the Foption and the g h set of options are specified A NOTE On servers based on the HP sx1000 chipset or HP sx2000 chipset when the nPartition Configuration Privilege is restricted the parremove command cannot remove an nPartition un
318. n is set to zero 0 Although you might be able to boot Red Hat Enterprise Linux on an nPartition with CLM configured any memory configured as cell local is unusable and such a configuration is untested and unsupported SuSE Linux Enterprise Server supports using CLM The optimal CLM settings for SuSE Linux Enterprise Server depend on the applications and workload the OS is running To check CLM configuration details from an OS use Partition Manager or the parstatus command Forexample theparstatus V c commandandparstatus V p command report the CLM amount requested and CLM amount allocated for the specified cell c where is the cell number or the specified nPartition p where is the nPartition number To check CLM configuration details from the EFI Shell on a cell based HP Integrity server use the info memcommand If the amount of NonInterleaved Memory reported is less than 512 MB then no CLM is configured for any cells in the nPartition and the indicated amount of noninterleaved memory is used by system firmware If the info mem command reports more than 512 MB of noninterleaved memory then use use Partition Manager or the parstatus command to confirm the CLM configuration details To set the CLM configuration use Partition Manager or the parmodify command Adding Linux to the Boot Options List A This section describes how to add a Linux entry to the system boot options list The processes for adding both Red Hat E
319. n nPartition involves unassigning the cell from the nPartition to which it is assigned and if necessary performing a reboot for reconfig of the nPartition E NOTE Adding or removing cells from an nPartition will change the amount of memory available to the nPartition possibly significantly You should consider how the memory change may affect the amount of swap space necessary for the nPartition and if needed adjust the swap space size When not using remote administration features you can remove any cell from the local nPartition and can remove inactive cells from remote nPartitions in the same server complex However at least one core capable cell must remain in each nPartition The remote administration features supported by the Enhanced nPartition Commands or Partition Manager Version 2 0 also enable you to remove any cell from any nPartition in an HP Integrity server complex Still at least one core capable cell must remain in each nPartition Reboot for Reconfig Guidelines for Removing Cells In some situations after removing cells from a modified nPartition you must immediately perform a reboot for reconfig HP UX shutdown R Windows shutdown r Linux shutdown r time OpenVMS SYSS SYSTEM SHUTDOWN with an automatic system reboot Performing a required reboot for reconfig completes cell assignment changes and unlocks the Complex Profile for the server 182 Creating and Configuring nPartitions A e You must immediately
320. n the target complex for Overview of Managing nPartitions 29 example by the u h set of options For remote administration using IPMI over LAN the tool remotely accesses the service processor of the target complex for example by the g h set of options For remote administration details see Remote and Local Management of nPartitions page 41 For detailed procedures for creating and managing nPartitions see Chapter 6 page 165 Genesis Partition A The Genesis Partition is the initial one cell nPartition created within a server complex by the service processor MP or GSP CC command The Genesis Partition is just like any other nPartition except for how it is created and the fact that its creation wipes out any previous nPartition configuration data For a detailed procedure see Creating a Genesis Partition page 170 If your server complex has its nPartitions pre configured by HP you do not need to create a Genesis Partition NOTE For servers based on the HP sx1000 or sx2000 chipset you can instead use nPartition tools running on a remote system to remotely create and configure new nPartitions including the first nPartition in the complex See Remote and Local Management of nPartitions page 41 for details You can use nPartition management tools running on the Genesis Partition as the method for configuring all nPartitions in the complex The Genesis Partition always is partit
321. n turning power off for a component of an active nPartition NOTE On servers based on the HP sx1000 chipset or HP sx2000 chipset you cannot turn cell or I O chassis power on or off for free cells or I O chassis when nPartition Configuration Privilege is restricted and when not using the g h options The nPartition Configuration Privilege setting does not affect the ability to control power using the frupower g h command and option Command syntax and options for frupower follow Refer to the frupower 1M manpage for details Syntax frupower da o c cell c frupower d o i IOchassis i frupower d C 1 cabinet l frupower d I 1 cabinet 1l Enhanced nPartition Commands Notes e The u h set of options may be specified to cause the command to send its management request using WBEM to an nPartition other than the local nPartition but can also be used as a loopback access to the local nPartition e The g h options may be specified to cause the command to send its management request using IPMI over LAN to a service processor in another server complex but can also be used as a loopback access to the service processor in the local complex The u and g options are mutually exclusive Options d Display power status of the specified cells or I O chassis This is the default 0 Power on the specified cells or I O chassis The o a
322. nPartition Modify nPartition action and select the Add Remove Cells tab Also see Assigning Adding Cells to an nPartition page 179 and see Unassigning Removing Cells from an nPartition page 182 Removing an nPartition To remove delete an nPartition use the parremove p command to remove a specified nPartition p where is the partition number From Partition Manager select the nPartition and use the nPartition Delete nPartition action Also see Removing Deleting an nPartition page 176 Renaming an nPartition To rename an nPartition use the parmodify p P name command to set the name for a specified nPartition p where is the partition number From Partition Manager select the nPartition use the nPartition Modify nPartition action and select the General tab On an HP 9000 server you also can use use the BCH Configuration menu PD NewName command Also see Renaming an nPartition page 185 Setting Cell Attributes To set attributes for a cell use the parmodify p m command to modify cell attributes for a specified nPartition p where is the partition number From Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the nPartition use the nPartition Modify nPartition action Change Cell Attributes tab select the cell s and click Modify Cell s From Partition Manager Version 2 0 select the nPartition use the nPartition Modify nPartition action and use the Set Cell Options tab
323. nPartition p where is the nPartition number To check CLM configuration details from the EFI Shell on a cell based HP Integrity server use the info mem command If the amount of NonInterleaved Memory reported is less than 512 MB then no CLM is configured for any cells in the nPartition and the indicated amount of noninterleaved memory is used by system firmware If the info mem command reports more than 512 MB of noninterleaved memory then use use Partition Manager or the parstatus command to confirm the CLM configuration details To set the CLM configuration use Partition Manager or the parmodify command Adding HP UX to the Boot Options List A This section describes how to add an HP UX entry to the system boot options list You can add the EFI HPUX HPUX EFI loader to the boot options list from the EFI Shell or EFI Boot Configuration menu or in some versions of EFI the Boot Option Maintenance menu NOTE On HP Integrity servers the operating system installer automatically adds an entry to the boot options list Procedure 5 6 Adding an HP UX Boot Option This procedure adds an HP UX item to the boot options list from the EFI Shell To add an HP UX boot option when logged in to HP UX use the setboot command For details refer to the setboot 1M manpage 1 Access the EFI Shell environment Log in to the management processor and enter CO to access the system console When accessing the console confirm that you
324. nPartition Administrator s Guide HP Part Number 5991 1247B_ed2 Published February 2009 Edition Second Edition D Copyright 2007 2009 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P Legal Notices Copyright 2007 2009 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P Confidential computer software Valid license from HP required for possession use or copying Consistent with FAR 12 211 and 12 212 Commercial Computer Software Computer Software Documentation and Technical Data for Commercial Items are licensed to the U S Government under vendor s standard commercial license The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein Intel and Itanium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries Linux is a U S registered trademark of Linus Torvalds Microsoft Windows and Windows NT are U S registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Restricted Rights Legend Use duplication or disclosure by the U S Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252
325. nd f options are mutually exclusive The o and f options are unavailable with C and I 264 nPartition Commands f c cell i IOchassis C I 1 cabinet u username h IPaddress hostname Power off the specified cells or I O chassis The specified cell is powered on off or the power status is displayed A cell can be specified either in the local cabinet slot or global cell_ID format The specified IOchassis is powered on off or the power status is displayed Display power status of all cells By default the scope is the entire complex if the 1 option is not specified Display power status of all I O chassis The scope is the entire complex if the 1 option is not specified Limit the scope of the C or I option to the specified cabinet Enhanced nPartition Commands only Specifies the account and authorization to access an nPartition other than the local nPartition The h option is required if this option is used username specifies a configured user name on the target nPartition Enhanced nPartition Commands only Allows access to the complex specified by the h option The accessed complex is then considered the target complex Access is through the service processor LAN port The h option is required if this option is used Enhanced nPartition Commands only This option is only used in combination with either the u or g option IPaddress hostname specifies the IP address or hostname of
326. nd Linux The same base set of features is available in both nPartition commands versions However the Enhanced nPartition Commands include new options such as remote administration abilities and include the cplxmodify command See Commands for Configuring nPartitions page 19 for details e Partition Manager opt parmgr bin parmgr Partition Manager provides a graphical interface for configuring modifying and managing nPartitions and hardware within a server complex Two versions of Partition Manager are available Version 1 0 and Version 2 0 Partition Manager Version 1 0 is used only on HP UX 11i v1 B 11 11 releases prior to the December 2004 release and relies in part on the Original nPartition Commands Partition Manager Version 2 0 is supported for HP UX and Windows and relies in part on the Enhanced nPartition Commands Although both Partition Manager versions support a similar set of tasks the Partition Manager Version 2 0 release provides a significantly improved graphical interface a new Web based management interface and remote administration abilities See Partition Manager page 22 for details Commands for Configuring nPartitions You can use the nPartition commands to create modify monitor and remove nPartitions get detailed server hardware information manipulate attention indicators LEDs and power and modify server complex attributes such as the complex name Table 1 3 describes the two nP
327. nd to boot the desired device then interrupt the boot process at the ISL interface See Initial System Loader ISL Booting of HP UX page 149 for details 2 Issue HP UX Loader commands by prefacing them with hpux so that ISL invokes the hpux secondary system loader to execute the commands you specify From ISL issue HP UX loader commands in the following form hpux command Using HP UX Loader Commands 151 where command is one of the the hpux secondary system loader commands For example enter hpux 1s to issue the 1s command Refer to the is 1M and hpux 1M manpages for details 3 Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the BCH environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Booting to the Linux Loader ELILO EFI On HP Integrity servers you can access the Linux loader ELILO EFI by using the following procedure to boot ELILO EFI and type any key to stop the boot process at the ELILO boot prompt From ELILO you can boot Linux list devices and configuration entries or exit ELILO by typing Esc the escape key then Enter The ELILO loader and configuration files are at the following locations on the EFI System Partition for the Linux boot device e ELILO Loader Files for Red Hat Enterprise Linux On a Red Hat Enterprise Linux boot device EFI Syste
328. nding lock keys back to the service processor For details see Complex Profile page 36 AN CAUTION You should generally avoid manually unlocking Complex Profile entries because doing so can can result in the loss of configuration changes Procedure 6 24 Complex Profile Unlocking Service Processor This procedure unlocks a Complex Profile entry by using the RL command at the service processor Command menu 1 Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CM to access the Command menu 2 At the service processor Command menu issue the RL command 3 Select the Complex Profile entry you want to unlock feshd4 u MP CM gt rl WARNING This command should only be used to recover from a hung complex reconfiguration Random breaking of locks will cause unpredictable results and could cause your system to crash Stable complex configuration data Dynamic complex configuration data Partition configuration data Select configuration data A Q WP I Do you want to break stable complex configuration data lock Y I N y gt The selected lock will be broken Procedure 6 25 Complex Profile Unlocking nPartition Commands This procedure unlocks a Complex Profile entry by using the parunlock nPartition configuration command A NOTE You can remotely perform this task using remote administration options supported by the Enhanced nPartition Commands or Partition Manager Version 2 0 Remote administration is sup
329. ndows Server 2003 32 bit The 32 bit nPartition Commands enable you to use a 32 bit system as a remote management station for nPartition administration e The Windows 64 bit Enhanced nPartition Commands are designed for HP Integrity servers running Windows Server 2003 64 bit Enterprise Edition or Datacenter Edition The 64 bit nPartition Commands enable you to perform local and remote management of nPartitions when running on a cell based server with Windows Server 2003 and enable you to perform remote management when running on other HP Integrity servers with Windows Server 2003 The Smart Setup CD has both both the 32 bit and 64 bit versions of the nPartition Commands You also can download the nPartition Commands bundles for Windows from the http www hp com Web site Procedure 1 1 Downloading Enhanced nPartition Commands for Windows You can download the Enhanced nPartition Commands for Windows from the http www hp com Web site 1 Go to the http www hp com Web site and choose Software amp Driver Downloads 2 At the Software amp Driver Downloads page in the for product box enter the name of a cell based HP Integrity server such as e Integrity Superdome e Integrity rx8620 e Integrity rx7620 3 At the Downloads for HP Business Support Center Web page choose Microsoft Windows Server 2003 64 Bit from the select operating system list 4 At the next Downloads for HP Business Support Center Web page choose H
330. ng with more details parcreate Command Cell Attributes Differences for nPartition Command Releases The parcreate command s c option specifies the cell number s and attributes to be used when creating the new nPartition For the Enhanced nPartition Commands an additional cell local memory attribute is optional Both the syntaxes are given in the following list e For the Original nPartition Commands the parcreate command s c option is as follows c cell cell_type use_on_next_boot failure_usage This option specifies the cell ID cell to be assigned to the nPartition The only valid cell_type value is base base cell the default The valid use_on_next_boot values for cells are y Participate in reboot the default n Do not participate in reboot The only valid failure_usage value is ri reactivate with interleave the default For details refer to the parcreate 1M manpage e For the Enhanced nPartition Commands the parcreate command s c option is as follows c cell cell_type use_on_next_boot failure_usage clm This option specifies the cell ID cell to be assigned to the nPartition The cell_type use_on_next_boot and failure_usage attributes are the same as supported with the Original nPartition Commands Youcanspecify the clm value in either of two forms percentage or absolute amount of memory Percentage cell local memory CLM The percent number can be any
331. ng nPartitions 1 Login to Linux running on the system you want to shut down 2 Issue the shutdown r time command with the required time argument to specify when the shutdown is to occur You can specify time in the format hh mm in which hh is the hour one or two digits and mm is the minute of the hour two digits or in the format m in which m is the number of minutes delay until shutdown or specify now to immediately shut down Performing a Reboot for Reconfig You can perform a reboot for reconfig by using the following procedures e Reboot for Reconfig from HP UX sbin shutdown R command page 139 e Reboot for Reconfig from OpenVMS page 139 e Reboot for Reconfig from Windows shutdown r command page 140 e Reboot for Reconfig from Linux shutdown r time command page 140 During a reboot for reconfig of an nPartition the command that you issue performs the following tasks 1 Shuts down the operating system and resets all cells that are assigned to the nPartition including any inactive cells 2 Reconfigures the nPartition if necessary if there is a pending change to the Stable Complex Configuration Data it occurs during the reboot for reconfig 3 Boots all cells in the nPartition Any cells with a n use on next boot value remain inactive at BIB and all other cells can rendezvous to form the nPartition Perform a reboot for reconfig of an nPartition whenever you add cells or remove
332. nitoring Boot Activity Service Processor Use the VFP option from the service processor Main Menu to access an nPartition Virtual Front Panel for monitoring the nPartition boot status 1 2 Login to the service processor MP or GSP From the Main Menu enter VFP to select the Virtual Front Panel option GSP MAIN MENU Utility Subsystem FW Revision Level SR_XXXX_D CO Consoles VFP Virtual Front Panel CM Command Menu CL Console Logs SL Show chassis Logs HE Help X Exit Connection GSP gt VFP If you are accessing the service processor using a single partition user account selecting the VFP option takes you directly to the nPartition Virtual Front Panel If accessing the GSP using an operator or administrator account you can select the VFP for any single nPartition or can select a system VFP that displays the nPartition state and activity for all nPartitions within the server complex Select the nPartition you wish to monitor Skip this step if you are accessing the service processor using a single partition user account Partition VFP s available Name 0 julesoo 1 julesol S System all chassis codes Q Quit GSP VFP gt 1 View the VFP details for information about the nPartition and its current boot state To exit the VFP and return to the service processor main menu type b Control b The VFP provides details including the nPartition state nPartition activity and the state and activity for ea
333. nter the acpiconfig default command and then enter the reset command for the nPartition to reboot with the proper default configuration for HP UX HP UX Booting This section describes how to boot HP UX on cell based HP 9000 servers and cell based HP Integrity servers e On HP 9000 servers to boot HP UX refer to HP UX Booting BCH Menu page 111 e On HP Integrity servers to boot HP UX use either of the following procedures HP UX Booting EFI Boot Manager page 112 HP UX Booting EFI Shell page 112 110 Booting and Resetting nPartitions Procedure 5 7 HP UX Booting BCH Menu From the BCH Menu use the BOOT command to boot the HP UX OS The BCH Menu is available only on HP 9000 servers 1 Access the BCH Main Menu for the nPartition on which you want to boot HP UX Log in to the management processor MP and enter CO to access the Console list Choose the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the BCH Main Menu the Main Menu Enter command or menu gt prompt If you are ata BCH menu other than the Main Menu then enter MA to return to the BCH Main Menu Choose which device you want to boot From the BCH Main Menu use the PATH command to list any boot path variable settings The primary PRI boot path normally is set to the main boot device for the nPartition You also can use the SEARCH command to find and list potentially bootable devices for the nPartition Main
334. nterfaces if you are finished using them To exit the BCH environment press B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the management processor Main Menu To exit the management processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 5 11 Single User Mode HP UX Booting EFI Shell From the EFI Shell environment boot in single user mode by stopping the boot process at the HPUX EFI interface the HP UX Boot Loader prompt HPUX gt entering the boot is vmunix command The EFI Shell is available only on HP Integrity servers Refer to ACPI Configuration for HP UX Must Be default page 110 for required configuration details 1 Access the EFI Shell environment for the nPartition on which you want to boot HP UX in single user mode Log in to the management processor MP and enter CO to access the Console list Choose the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If you are at another EFI menu choose the Exit option from the submenus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading From the EFI Boot Manager menu choose the EFI Shell menu option to access the EFI Shell environment Access the EFI System Partition sX where X is the file system number for the device from which you want to boot HP UX When accessing the EFI System Partition for the desired boot device issue the HPUX command to initiate the EFI HPUX HP
335. nterprise Linux and SuSE Linux Enterprise Servers are given here You can add the EFI redhat elilo efi loader or the efi SuSE elilo efi loader to the boot options list from the EFI Shell or EFI Boot Configuration menu or in some versions of EFI the Boot Option Maintenance menu NOTE On HP Integrity servers the operating system installer automatically adds an entry to the boot options list Procedure 5 22 Adding a Linux Boot Option This procedure adds a Linux item to the boot options list 1 Access the EFI Shell environment Log in to the management processor and enter CO to access the system console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If at another EFI menu select the Exit option from the sub menus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading From the EFI Boot Manager menu select the EFI Shell menu option to access the EFI Shell environment 2 Access the EFI System Partition fsX where X is the file system number for the device from which you want to boot Linux For example enter fs2 to access the EFI System Partition for the bootable file system number 2 The EFI Shell prompt changes to reflect the file system currently accessed The full path for the Red Hat Enterprise Linux loader is EFI redhat elilo efi and it should be on the device you are accessing The full path for the SuSE Linux Enterprise Server loader is efi SuSE elilo efi
336. nterrupt Autoboot efi hpux AUTO gt boot vmunix Seconds left till autoboot 9 6 Exit the console and management processor interfaces if you are finished using them To exit the EFI environment press B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the management processor Main Menu To exit the management processor type X at the Main Menu Single User Mode HP UX Booting This section describes how to boot HP UX in single user mode on cell based HP 9000 servers and cell based HP Integrity servers e On HP 9000 servers to boot HP UX in single user mode refer to Single User Mode HP UX Booting BCH Menu page 114 e OnHP Integrity servers to boot HP UX in single user mode refer to Single User Mode HP UX Booting EFI Shell page 115 Procedure 5 10 Single User Mode HP UX Booting BCH Menu From the BCH Menu you can boot HP UX in single user mode by issuing the BOOT command stopping at the ISL interface and issuing hpux loader options The BCH Menu is available only on HP 9000 servers 1 Access the BCH Main Menu for the nPartition on which you want to boot HP UX in single user mode Log in to the management processor MP and enter CO to access the Console list Choose the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the BCH Main Menu the Main Menu Enter command or menu gt prompt If you are ata BCH menu other than the Main Menu then enter MA to return to the BCH
337. nu Procedure 8 31 Listing the Local nPartition Number nPartition Commands From the command line issue the parstatus wcommand to list the local nPartition number 1 Login to a system with the nPartition commands installed If using remote administration features to list a local nPartition number you can login to any system with Enhanced nPartition Commands installed Only remote management using WBEM involves remote management on a local nPartition Remote management using IPMI over LAN does not support listing a local nPartition number because the remote access point is the service processor MP or GSP of a remote complex 2 Issue the parstatus wcommand to list the local nPartition number Listing Power Status and Power Supplies You can list power status and power supply details by using any one of the following procedures e Listing Power Status and Power Supplies Service Processor page 238 e Listing Power Status and Power Supplies nPartition Commands page 239 e Listing Power Status and Power Supplies Partition Manager page 239 Power status and power supply information includes the power status on or of f for cabinets cells and I O chassis the status ok or failed for power supplies and related details Procedure 8 32 Listing Power Status and Power Supplies Service Processor From the service processor Command Menu use the PS command and the cabinet option to list power status and power s
338. number in the range 0 100 with a suffix of This number is rounded to 12 5 25 37 5 50 62 5 75 87 5 or 100 If the cell contains less than 4 GBytes of memory then the percentage is rounded to 25 50 75 or 100 Percentages are rounded up or down to the nearest value but are not rounded up to 100 o Absolute CLM specification The default The absolute number is interpreted as an absolute number of gigabytes of memory and can optionally have a suffix of GB As needed an absolute CLM specification is rounded up to the nearest 0 5 GBytes If the clm value is rounded the command reports the final value used For details refer to the parcreate 1M manpage 3 Use the parmodify command to modify the configuration of the new nPartition and set the nPartition name P boot paths b s and t and any core cell choices r On HP Integrity servers nPartition boot paths must be set from the local nPartition When using the parmodify command you must use the p option to specify the partition number for the nPartition Use the partition number that the parcreate command reported in the previous step 174 Creating and Configuring nPartitions parmodify pl P hostname05 Command succeeded parmodify p1 r0 4 r0 6 Command succeeded parmodify p1 b 4 0 1 0 0 9 Command succeeded When each modification takes place parmodi fy reports Command succeeded Otherwise it reports any problems
339. o 40 pages of data All nPartition console activity is written to this log file regardless of whether a user is connected to the nPartition console As a console log is written the oldest data in the log is overwritten by current data as needed so that the last 30 to 40 pages of console output always is available from the console log viewer Viewing Chassis Codes or Event Logs A A The event log and chassis code viewers enables you to view chassis codes or event logs that are emitted throughout the entire server complex NOTE On HP 9000 servers with HP PA 8700 processors the equivalent of event logs is chassis codes To enter the event log viewer enter SL at the service processor Main menu To exit the viewer type b Control b to return to the Main menu Event logs are data that communicate information about system events from the source of the event to other parts of the server complex Event log data indicates what event has occurred when and where it happened and its severity the alert level All event logs pass from the event source through the service processor The service processor takes any appropriate action and then reflects the event logs to all running nPartitions If an nPartition is running event monitoring software it may also take action based on the event logs for example sending notification e mail System administrators of course may have interest in viewing various event logs especially ev
340. o initiate the OpenVMS loader 1 Access the EFI Shell environment for the system on which you want to boot HP OpenVMS Log in to the management processor MP and enter CO to select the system console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If at another EFI menu select the Exit option from the sub menus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading From the EFI Boot Manager menu select the EFI Shell menu option to access the EFI Shell environment 2 At the EFI Shell environment issue the map command to list all currently mapped bootable devices The bootable file systems of interest typically are listed as fs0 fs1 and so on 122 Booting and Resetting nPartitions Access the EFI System Partition f sX where X is the file system number for the device from which you want to boot HP OpenVMS For example enter fs2 to access the EFI System Partition for the bootable file system number 2 The EFI Shell prompt changes to reflect the file system currently accessed Also the file system number might change each time it is mapped for example when the system boots or when the map r command is issued When accessing the EFI System Partition for the desired boot device issue the efi vms vms_loader command to initiate the vms_ loader efi loader on the device you are accessing fs5 gt efi vms vms_loader efi HP OpenVMS Industry Standard 64
341. o the active core cell is active Recommended nPartition Configurations For best performance and availability configure nPartitions to meet the following guidelines On servers based on the HP sx1000 chipset or HP sx2000 chipset the nPartition memory configuration should meet the following guidelines The number of cells participating in memory interleave should be a power of two and each cell participating in interleave should contribute the same amount of memory The total amount of memory being interleaved should be a power of two number of GBytes When configuring cell local memory ensure that the amount of interleaved memory meets the guidelines given here All memory not specified as being cell local will be interleaved Also ensure that any nPartition that has cell local memory configured runs only operating systems that support cell local memory Cell local memory can be configured on servers based on the HP sx1000 chipset or HP sx2000 chipset CAUTION Memory configured as cell local memory only can be used by operating systems that support it Any memory configured as cell local memory is unusable when an nPartition runs an operating system that does not support it The I O chassis containing the active core I O also should have an operating system OS boot disk and method of installing or recovering the OS such as a CD ROM DVD ROM drive network connection to an install server or tape drive This app
342. of nPartition System Booting 87 a EFI Shell command driven boot environment b EFI Scripts and Applications EFI scripts and EFI applications can be initiated from either EFI Boot Manager or EFI Shell 5 Operating System Loader The following OS loaders are supported on HP Integrity servers OS loaders can be initiated from the EFI Boot Manger or the EFI Shell a HPUX EFI Loader Loader for the HP UX operating system b ELILO EFI Loader Loader for Red Hat Enterprise Linux or SuSE Linux Enterprise Server c vms_loader efi Loader Loader for HP OpenVMS 164 d ia64ldr efi Loader Loader for Microsoft Windows Server 2003 ia64ldr efi must be initiated from EFI Boot Manager not from the EFI Shell Boot Process Differences for nPartitions on HP 9000 servers and HP Integrity servers 88 The following lists HP Integrity Server Booting and HP 9000 Server Booting describe system boot features and differences on HP Integrity and HP 9000 servers HP Integrity Server Booting This list describes system boot features on cell based HP Integrity servers e The nPartition system boot environment is the Extensible Firmware Interface EFI the EFI Boot Manager menu and the EFI Shell e The autoboot process is configured by the EFI autoboot setting and the order of items in the boot options list The boot options list can include First boot option configured using the setboot p orparmodify b command Second b
343. ollowing I O hardware location format when specifying an I O chassis to the nPartition configuration commands cabinet bay chassis 244 nPartition Commands The cabinet bay and chassis fields specify the physical location of the I O chassis The values of these fields are as follows cabinet specifies the cabinet number where the I O chassis resides On HP rp7405 rp7410 rp7420 rp7440 rx7620 rx7640 rp8400 rp8420 rp8440 rx8620 and rx8640 servers the server cabinet number always is 0 In HP rp8400 rp8420 rp8440 rx8620 and rx8640 complexes the I O Expansion cabinet if present is 8 On HP Superdome servers the cabinet number can be 0 the left Compute cabinet 1 the right Compute cabinet if present 8 an I O Expansion cabinet if present 9 an I O Expansion cabinet if present bay specifies the I O bay within a cabinet where the I O chassis resides On HP rp7405 rp7410 rp7420 rp7440 rx7620 rx7640 rp8400 rp8420 rp8440 rx8620 and rx8640 servers the bay number always is 0 On HP Superdome servers the bay number can be 0 the front bay of a Compute cabinet or the bottom bay of an I O Expansion cabinet 1 the rear bay of a Compute cabinet or the middle bay of an I O Expansion cabinet 2 the top bay in an I O Expansion cabinet chassis specifies the I O chassis within a bay On HP rp7405 rp7410 rp7420 rx7620 rp8400 rp8420 and rx8620
344. on The EFI Boot Manager is available only on HP Integrity systems 1 Access the EFI Boot Manager menu for the nPartition that you want to reboot Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If at another EFI menu select the Exit option from the sub menus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading 2 From the EFI Boot Manager menu select the Boot Option Maintenance menu Then from the Boot Option Maintenance menu select the Cold Reset menu to reset the local nPartition The Cold Reset menu item resets all active cells in the nPartition and reboots them 136 Booting and Resetting nPartitions 3 Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the EFI environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 5 29 Rebooting and Resetting nPartitions EFI Shell From the EFI Shell environment issue the reset command to reset the local nPartition The EFI Shell is available only on HP Integrity systems 1 Access the EFI Shell environment for the nPartition that you want to reboot Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console
345. on management tools can be running on one system and can use the WBEM infrastructure to send requests to other systems See Remote Management Using WBEM page 44 for more details Local Management As previously mentioned the Enhanced nPartition Commands and Partition Manager Version 2 0 can run on an nPartition to manage that nPartition and the complex that it belongs to This is the default behavior of the tools when run on an nPartition In this scenario the nPartition management tools send WBEM requests to the nPartition Provider running on the local nPartition that is the same nPartition where the tools are being run The nPartition Provider uses dev ipmi to send requests to the service processor in the local complex If the nPartition Configuration Privilege is unrestricted then the server can be managed from any nPartition and making changes to other nPartitions in the complex is supported However if the privilege is set to restricted then certain operations are supported only when using the Remote and Local Management of nPartitions 43 tools in the mode that uses IPMI over LAN see Remote Management Using IPMI over LAN page 46 Local management is the only form of management supported by the older nPartition tools the Original nPartition Commands and Partition Manager Version 1 0 Also because the nPartition Configuration Privilege is a feature of the sx1000 based and sx2000 based servers it affects the older nP
346. on as possible proceed with the shutdown for reconfig because the server Complex Profile will remain locked and no other changes can occur until the pending nPartition removal is completed 3 Performa shutdown for reconfig of the local nPartition HP UX shutdown R H Windows shutdown s Linux shutdown h time OpenVMS SYSS SYSTEM SHUTDOWN with no automatic system reboot then MP Command menu RR command The shutdown for reconfig command shuts down the nPartition and all cells so that the configuration changes occur and the nPartition is deleted e Removing an Active Remote nPartition To remove an active remote nPartition you must use the Enhanced nPartition Commands or Partition Manager Version 2 0 and the remote nPartition must be in a complex based on the HP sx1000 chipset or HP sx2000 chipset 1 Shut down all applications and warn users Follow the same procedures you would use if you were to reboot the nPartition 2 Issue the parremove F p command and specify either the u h options or g h options For details see Tools for Configuring nPartitions page 165 You must specify both the force remove option F and the nPartition number p where is the number for the nPartition being removed 3 Perform a shutdown for reconfig of the nPartition that is being removed Use any of the following methods as appropriate to perform the shutdown for reconfig From the operating system put
347. onfiguration File elilo conf page 153 for details Refer to the following Linux manpages for more details but note that specific details may differ on your particular system bootparam 7 Introduction to Linux boot time kernel parameters grubby 8 Information about boot loader configuration files init 8 Introduction to process initialization and runlevel details Linux Loader Configuration File elilo conf A Boot configuration entries in the elilo conf file enable you to establish a collection of bootable Linux configuration any one of which can be selected at the ELILO boot prompt CAUTION Save a backup copy of the elilo conf file before making changes to customize the file Sample elilo conf File The following sample elilo conf file has two boot entries labeled linux and linux up prompt timeout 50 default linux image vmlinuz 2 4 18 e 12smp label linux initrd initrd 2 4 18 e 12smp img read only root dev sda2 append console ttySo image vmlinuz 2 4 18 e 12 label linux up initrd initrd 2 4 18 e 12 img read only root dev sda2 append console ttySo Booting to the Linux Loader ELILO EFI 153 elilo conf File Boot Options You can specify the following options among others in an elilo conf file to configure a Linux device s boot behavior For more details refer to the documentation for the Linux distribution you are using e prompt Specifies to make the ELILO boot prompt av
348. onfiguring cells may be restricted based on any Instant Capacity contract for the server complex mom To make an inactive cell active configured its use on next boot value must be y and its nPartition must perform a reboot for reconfig shutdown R To make an man active cell inactive deconfigured its use on next boot value must be n and its nPartition must perform a normal reboot shutdown r BCH Menu Configuration Menu CELLCONFIG command e EFI Shell cellconfig command use of this command is restricted e nPartition Commands parmodify p m command to modify attributes of the specified cell m where is the cell number for the specified nPartition p where is the nPartition number Original nPartition Commands For the cell modify m option specify m y to configure the cell to be used the next time the nPartition boots or m n to deconfigure the cell Enhanced nPartition Commands For the cell modify m option specify m y clm to configure the cell to be used the next time the nPartition boots or m n clm to deconfigure the cell The clm parameter specifies the amount of cell local memory e Partition Manager Version 1 0 Select the nPartition to which the cell belongs select the Partition Modify Partition action Change Cell Attributes tab select the cell s and click Modify Cell s Version 2 0 Select the nPartition to which the
349. onfstr 3C to retrieve unique machine identifiers The interfaces include the CS PARTITION IDENT and CS MACHINE IDENT parameters e For anPartition specific or a virtual partition specific unique ID use this command usr bin getconf CS PARTITION IDENT The unique partition identifier value for a virtual partition environment has virtual partition specific data added that does not appear for an equivalent non vPars environment See the examples that follow e For a complex specific unique ID use this command usr bin getconf CS MACHINE IDENT On cell based HP PA RISC servers the complex nPartition and virtual partition unique IDs are based in part on the machine serial number To retrieve the machine serial through these interfaces specify the CS MACHINE SERIAL parameter to them Licensing Information Getting Server Product Details 47 48 Refer to the confstr 3C manpage for details on these parameters and their use Example 1 1 Unique IDs for an nPartition and Complex The following examples show nPartition unique and complex unique IDs returned by the getconf command as well as the local nPartition number and machine serial number parstatus w The local partition number is 1 usr bin getconf CS PARTITION IDENT Z3e02955673 9 7c9 Pl usr bin getconf CS MACHINE IDENT Z3 02955673 9 7c9 usr bin getconf CS MACHINE SERIAL USR2024FP1 Example 1 2 Unique IDs for Virtual Partitions vPars The following
350. onnected to the cells that were assigned to the nPartition to be unassigned As a result all of these cells become available resources which can be assigned to any nPartition in the server complex When removing an active nPartition you must complete the procedure by performing a shutdown for reconfig the HP UX shutdown R H command or Windows shutdown s command as soon as possible after initiating the nPartition removal When using the Original nPartition Commands or Partition Manager Version 1 0 you can delete only the local nPartition and inactive remote nPartitions Procedure 6 4 Deleting an nPartition nPartition Commands From the command line use the parremove command to delete remove an nPartition 176 Creating and Configuring nPartitions A NOTE You can remotely perform this task using remote administration options supported by the Enhanced nPartition Commands or Partition Manager Version 2 0 Remote administration is supported by the Partition Manager Tools gt Switch Complexes action and by the nPartition command u h optionsor g h options For details see Tools for Configuring nPartitions page 165 1 Use the parstatus P command to list all nPartitions and check the status active or inactive for the nPartition you plan to remove To check the local partition number use the parstatus w command The local nPartition always is active when it is running HP UX If you are planning
351. ontains the following chapters and appendix Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Appendix A Getting Started with nPartitions page 15 This chapter introduces HP nPartition system features server models supported operating systems and administration tools and outlines the basic information needed for managing nPartitions nPartition Server Hardware Overview page 49 This chapter describes HP nPartition server models and features Planning nPartitions page 61 This chapter describes how you can plan nPartition configurations Details include the nPartition configuration requirements and recommendations Using Management Interfaces and Tools page 67 This chapter presents the system management interfaces and tools available on HP nPartition servers Also described here are the nPartition boot environments management access procedures and detailed command references Booting and Resetting nPartitions page 87 This chapter introduces nPartition system boot and reset concepts configuration options and procedures for booting and resetting nPartitions Creating and Configuring nPartitions page 165 This chapter presents the procedures for creating configuring and managing nPartitions on HP servers that support them Managing Hardware Resources page 201 This chapter explains the procedures for managing the hard
352. ools for Managing Hardware page 201 for details Tools for Managing Hardware 201 Table 7 1 Hardware Management Task Summaries Task Powering Server Cabinets On and Off Summary CAUTION Before powering off system hardware you first must check whether it is being used and also inspect the hardware Cabinet Power Switch use the 48 volt power switch on the front of the cabinet Service Processor MP or GSP PE command See Powering Server Cabinets On and Off page 205 Powering Cells and I O Chassis On and Off NOTE Powering on a cell also powers on any I O chassis attached to the cell and powering off a cell also powers off any I O chassis attached to the cell Powering on or off an I O chassis connected to a powered on cell causes the cell to reset if the cell located and mapped the I O chassis during its cell boot process Service Processor MP or GSP PE command nPartition Commands frupower command and specify o or f and a cell or I O chassis o option to turn power on f option to turn power off c for a cell where is the cell number i for an I O chassis where is the cabinet bay chassis Partition Manager Version 1 0 Select an inactive cell or I O chassis and use the Cell gt Power Off Cell or l O Power Off I O Chassis action or a similar Power On action Version 2 0 Select an inactive cell or I O chassis and use the Cell Power O
353. oot environment BCH or EFI Reboot for Reconfig A reboot for reconfig shuts down the operating system resets all cells assigned to the nPartition performs any nPartition reconfigurations and boots the nPartition back to the system boot environment BCH or EFI To perform a reboot for reconfig of the local nPartition use the HP UX shutdown R command Windows shutdown r command or the Linux shutdown r time command To perform a reboot for reconfig from OpenVMS 164 running on an nPartition issue SYSSSYSTEM SHUTDOWN COM from OpenVMS and then enter Yes at the Should an automatic system reboot be performed prompt All cells including any inactive cells and all newly added or deleted cells reset and the nPartition is reconfigured as needed All cells with a y use on next boot setting participate in partition rendezvous and synchronize to boot as a single nPartition After you assign a cell to an nPartition or remove an active cell from an nPartition you can perform a reboot for reconfig of the nPartition to complete the cell addition or removal If an nPartition is configured to boot an operating system automatically it can do so immediately following a reboot for reconfig Shutdown for Reconfig State Putting an nPartition into the shutdown for reconfig state involves shutting down the operating system as required resetting all cells assigned to the nPartition performing any nPartition reconfigurations and keeping al
354. oot option configured using the setboot h orparmodify s command Third boot option configured using the setboot a orparmodify t command e Each operating system has its own OS loader The HP UX OS loader is HPUX EFI which supports hpux 1M loader options You can issue hpux loader commands from the HPUX gt prompt The HP OpenVMS 164 loader is vms_loader efi The Microsoft Windows loader is ia641dr efi and it is invoked only from the EFI Boot Manager The loader for Red Hat Enterprise Linux and SuSE Linux Enterprise Server is ELILO EFI You can issue ELILO loader commands from the ELILO boot prompt e The EFI system boot environment includes an ACPI configuration setting that must be set properly for the OS being booted either HP UX OpenVMS 164 Windows or Linux For details see ACPI Configuration Value HP Integrity Server OS Boot page 92 Booting and Resetting nPartitions HP 9000 Server Booting This list describes system boot features on cell based HP 9000 servers The nPartition system boot environment is the Boot Console Handler BCH The autoboot process is configured using boot device paths PRI HAA ALT and path flags PRIboot path configured using the setboot p orparmodify b command HAAboot path configured using the setboot h orparmodify s command ALT boot path configured using the setboot a orparmodify t command The HP UX B 11 1
355. or the BOOT LAN ip address INSTALL command to boot over a network and perform an HP UX installation The BOOT INSTALL commands boot HP UX from the default HP UX install server or from the server specified by ip address 3 Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the BCH environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 5 48 Booting over a Network EFI Boot Manager From the EFI Boot Manager to boot from a network device select the Boot Option Maintenance gt Boot from a File menu option and then select the Load File option for the LAN card that has the desired MAC address The EFI Boot Manager is available only on HP Integrity systems 1 Access the EFI Boot Manager menu for the nPartition that you want to boot over a network Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If at another EFI menu select the Exit option from the sub menus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading Booting over a Network 147 2 At the EFI Boot Manager menu select the Boot Option Maintenance option 3 At the Boot Option Maintenance menu select the Boot from a File menu option and then
356. ore cell choices for a valid core cell to be chosen By default on four cell and HP Superdome servers system firmware selects the lowest numbered eligible cell to be the active core cell for the nPartition By default on two cell servers cell 1 is selected as the core cell Procedure 6 20 Setting Core Cell Choices BCH Menu From the BCH Menu use the Configuration menu COC command to configure core cell choices for the nPartition The BCH Menu is available only on HP 9000 systems 1 Access the BCH Main Menu for the nPartition whose core cell choices you want to configure Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the BCH Main Menu the Main Menu Enter command or menu gt prompt If ata BCH menu other than the Main Menu then enter MA to return to the BCH Main Menu Enter CO to access the BCH Configuration Menu Enter the COC command to list or set the core cell choices for the local nPartition Entering COC with no arguments lists all core cell choice preferences The COC command syntax is COC choice cell where choice is 0 3 with 0 being the highest priority choice and where cell is the cell ID For example COC 0 2 sets the most preferred core cell choice to be cell ID 2 Likewise COC 1 4 sets the next second highest priority core preference to be cell ID 4 Use the HELP COC command for other
357. ostname fruled Command 263 frupower Command 7 The frupower command turns on turns off or displays the current status of power for cells and I O chassis in cell based servers Root permission is required to run this command e By default the Erupower command permits you to power on or off inactive cells and I O chassis that either are assigned to the target nPartition or are not assigned to any nPartition e I O chassis power is turned on or off when the cell to which it is connected is powered on or off However you also can control I O chassis power separately from cell power in certain situations You can turn on I O chassis power when a powered off I O chassis is attached to an active cell assigned to the target nPartition The nPartition must be rebooted for the power on to become effective You can turn off I O chassis power when the I O chassis is not assigned to an nPartition and on HP Integrity Superdome servers when nPartition Configuration Privilege is unrestricted e When using the Original nPartition Commands the target and local nPartition are the same When using the Enhanced nPartition Commands the target nPartition may be different from the local nPartition when the u h options are specified CAUTION When using the Enhanced nPartition Commands the frupower g h command and options allow all power operations on all cells and I O chassis in the target complex even if this results i
358. ou did not select the option for automatically booting the nPartition to system firmware then the nPartition is inactive at the shutdown for reconfig state after the reboot for reconfig occurs In this situation you can make the nPartition active by using the BO command at the service processor Command Menu Renaming an nPartition You can change the name of an nPartition by using any one of the following procedures e Renaming an nPartition BCH Menu page 186 e Renaming an nPartition nPartition Commands page 186 e Renaming an nPartition Partition Manager page 187 Each nPartition has both an nPartition name and an nPartition number The nPartition name is a short description useful for identifying the nPartition You can customize nPartition names to Renaming an nPartition 185 186 A help you distinguish among the nPartition in a server complex You cannot change the nPartition number which is a permanent unique identifier that is automatically assigned for each nPartition in a server complex Each nPartition name can have from 1 to 64 characters including upper and lowercase letters numbers and dashes underscores and spaces _ and nPartition names are displayed along with nPartition numbers in various reports and menus provided by the service processor Boot Console Handler BCH and other nPartition tools Note that some tools display only the first 30 characters of nPartition na
359. ovided first then explanations of how to use the tools to locally and remotely manage cell based servers are provided Intelligent Platform Management Interface IPMI The nPartition management tools perform their functions by sending requests to the service processor These requests are either to get information about the server or to affect changes to the server On the first generation of cell based servers the HP 9000 Superdome SD16000 SD32000 and SD64000 models rp7405 rp7410 and rp8400 servers a proprietary interface to the service processor was implemented This interface relied on system firmware to convey information between HP UX and the service processor This in turn required that the nPartition management tools run on an nPartition in the complex being managed The service processor in all sx1000 based or sx2000 based servers supports the Intelligent Platform Management Interface IPMI as a replacement for the proprietary interface mentioned above IPMI is an industry standard interface for managing hardware IPMI also supports value added capabilities such as HP s nPartition and complex management features Remote and Local Management of nPartitions 41 The service processor in all sx1000 based or sx2000 based servers supports two of the communication paths defined by the IPMI standard the Block Transfer path and IPMI over LAN Some background details about each of these communication paths is provided in the next sections
360. owering Server Cabinets On and Off Service Processor page 205 When powering off a cabinet you turn off 48 volt power to the cabinet thus causing all cells and all I O chassis to power off and causing most fans to turn off Changes in cabinet power status do not affect the standby power that supplies system utilities such as the service processor GSP or MP and keeps some fans running These utilities and fans can receive power as long as standby power is enabled VAN CAUTION When you power on or off HP Superdome 64 way compute cabinets you must power off and power on cabinet 0 and cabinet 1 in such a way that both cabinets are off for an overlapping interval If either Superdome 64 way cabinet is powered off then powered on while the other cabinet remains on then communications between the two cabinets is lost CAUTION Before powering off system hardware you first must check whether it is being used The cabinet power switch and the PE command at the service processor Command menu do not check whether system hardware is in use before powering it off Procedure 7 1 Powering Server Cabinets On and Off Cabinet Power Switch Use the Virtual Front Panel to check status and then use the cabinet power switch to manage 48 volt power for a cabinet with the cabinet hardware 1 Login to the service processor for the server complex and access the Virtual Front Panel for the system From the service processor Main menu enter VFP
361. ows or other operating systems On an nPartition in vPars boot mode HP UX can boot only within a virtual partition from the vPars monitor and cannot boot as a standalone single operating system in the nPartition A CAUTION An nPartition on an HP Integrity server cannot boot HP UX virtual partitions when in nPars boot mode Likewise an nPartition on an HP Integrity server cannot boot an operating system outside of a virtual partition when in vPars boot mode To check or set the boot mode for an nPartition on a cell based HP Integrity server use any of the following tools as appropriate Refer to Installing and Managing HP UX Virtual Partitions vPars Sixth Edition for details examples and restrictions Booting and Resetting nPartitions parconfig EFI shell command The parconfig command is a built in EFI shell command Refer to the help parconfig command for details EFI HPUX vparconfig EFI shell command The vparconfig command is delivered in the EFI HPUX directory on the EFI system partition of the disk where HP UX virtual partitions has been installed on a cell based HP Integrity server For usage details enter the vparconfig command with no options vparenv HP UX command On cell based HP Integrity servers only the vparenv HP UX command is installed on HP UX systems that have the HP UX virtual partitions software Refer to vparenv 1m for details gt NOTE On HP Integrity servers nPartitions that do
362. p Menu Provides online help on a variety of service processor topics and on all service processor Command menu commands These menus provide a central point for managing a server complex outside of an operating system The service processor menus provide many tools and details not available elsewhere More administration features also are available from the nPartition system boot environments BCH or EFI the nPartition tools and various operating system commands Navigating through Service Processor Menus 76 The following list includes tips for navigating through service processor menus and using various menu features e Control b Exit current console console log chassis log or Virtual Front Panel When accessing the Command menu an nPartition console any log files or any Virtual Front Panel VFP you can exit and return to the Main menu by typing b Control b e Q or lower case q Exit or cancel current menu prompt Enter Q or lower case q as response to any menu prompt to exit the prompt and return to the previous sub menu Using Management Interfaces and Tools You can do this throughout the service processor menus including the console menus various command menu prompts and the log and VFP menus Note that from the Command menu prompt GSP CM gt or MP CM gt you must enter MA not Q to return to the Main menu However you can enter Q or q to cancel any command e Control Escape the service processo
363. p to 64 Intel Itanium 2 processor cores Red Hat Enterprise Linux 3 Update 2 Supports up to eight Intel Itanium 2 processor cores Requires single core Itanium 2 processors and does not support HP mx2 dual processor modules Supports a maximum of two cells in an nPartition Supports a maximum of one I O chassis in an nPartition Requires a PCI X I O chassis and does not support PCI T O chassis Supports a maximum of 96 GBytes memory Red Hat Enterprise Linux 3 Update 3 Supports up to eight Intel Itanium 2 processors Requires single core Itanium 2 processors and does not support HP mx2 dual processor modules Supports a maximum of two cells in an nPartition Supports a maximum of 128 GBytes memory Supports a maximum of two I O chassis in an nPartition Requires a PCI X I O chassis and does not support PCI T O chassis nPartition Hardware Requirements for Operating Systems 61 Table 3 1 Operating System Hardware Requirements continued Operating System Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 Update 4 nPartition Hardware Requirements Supports up to eight Intel Itanium 2 processors On servers based on the HP sx2000 chipset supported only in nPartitions that have dual core Intel Itanium 2 processors Supports a maximum of two cells in an nPartition Supports a maximum of 128 GBytes memory Supports a maximum of two I O chassis in an nPartition Requires a PCI X I O chassis and doe
364. perdome SD16000 SD32000 SD64000 cells On Superdome cells you also can install 24 DIMMs or 32 DIMMs per cell On servers based on the HP sx1000 chipset or HP sx2000 chipset each memory echelon is 2 DIMMs If possible install memory in sets of 4 DIMMs 4 8 12 or 16 DIMMs On Superdome servers you also can install 20 24 28 or 32 DIMMs per cell This provides a performance improvement by doubling the memory bandwidth of the cell as compared to having one memory rank or memory echelon installed This also can provide an availability improvement in that if one memory rank or echelon fails the cell still has at least one functional rank of memory Memory rank 0 or echelon 0 must be functional for a cell to boot e Each nPartition should have PRI primary HAA high availability alternate and ALT alternate boot paths defined and configured and their path flags appropriately configured for your purposes A NOTE Note that on HP Integrity servers the PRI path corresponds to the first item in the EFI boot options list the HAA path is the second item in the boot options list and ALT is the third boot option The PRI and HAA paths should be configured to reference disks that are connected to different cells if possible with HAA being a mirror of the root volume and PRI being the root volume ALT should be the path of a recovery or install device Under this configuration if the cell to which the PRI disk is connected
365. performed prompt gt SYSSSYSTEM SHUTDOWN SHUTDOWN Perform an Orderly System Shutdown on node RSNVMS How many minutes until final shutdown 0 Reason for shutdown Standalone Do you want to spin down the disk volumes NO Do you want to invoke the site specific shutdown procedure YES Should an automatic system reboot be performed NO yes When will the system be rebooted shortly via automatic reboot Shutdown options enter as a comma separated list REBOOT CHECK Check existence of basic system files SAVE_FEEDBACK Save AUTOGEN feedback information from this boot DISABLE AUTOSTART Disable autostart queues POWER_OFF Request console to power off the system Shutdown options NONE SHUTDOWN I OPERATOR this terminal is now an operator s console A NOTE HP OpenVMS 164 currently does not support the POWER_OFF shutdown option Procedure 5 36 Reboot for Reconfig from Windows shutdown r command From the Windows command line use the shutdown r command or select the Start gt Shut Down action and choose Restart from the pull down menu to perform a reboot for reconfig for an nPartition VAN CAUTION Do not shut down Windows using Special Administration Console SAC restart or shutdown commands under normal circumstances Issuing restart or shutdown at the SAC gt prompt causes the system to restart or shutdown immediately and can result in the loss of data Instead use the Windows Start menu or
366. plexes dialog Licensing Information Getting Server Product Details When you license a software product to run on an HP system you may need to provide machine or system details to the software vendor as part of the software registration process This section describes how to obtain information you may need when licensing non HP software to run on a cell based HP server For complete information about software product licensing refer to the company that manufactures or sells the software you plan to use e Unique Machine Complex Identifier usr bin getconf _CS MACHINE IDENT e Unique nPartition Identifier usr bin getconf _CS PARTITION IDENT e Unique Virtual Partition Identifier usr bin getconf _CS PARTITION IDENT e Machine Complex Serial Number 9 usr bin getconf _CS MACHINE SERIAL and usr sbin parstatus X e Server Complex Product Number 9 usr sbin parstatus X e Machine Complex Hardware Model 9 usr bin getconf MACHINE MODEL and usr bin model e HP UX Version and Installed Bundles For the HP UX version usr bin uname r For all bundles installed usr sbin swlist 1 bundle nPartition and Virtual Partition Unique Identifiers A NOTE Use the getconf command or the confstr call to obtain unique identifiers Do not use the uname i command which does not report unique IDs for nPartition systems In order to guarantee compatibility on current and future platforms use the interfaces to getconf 1 and c
367. ponent to power on or off The PE command does not check whether the hardware is actively being used You can manage the power for all components within the server complex by using the PE command at the service processor Command menu regardless of any nPartition assignment or the status active or inactive for the hardware components ie Login to the service processor for the server and access the Command menu From the service processor Main menu enter CM to access the Command menu To exit the Command menu enter MA Issue the PE command and specify the type of hardware whose power you want to turn on or turn off You can manage power to cells I O chassis and cabinets Specify the hardware device to power on or power off The service processor does not check whether the specified component is currently being used e Cabinets When you power on or off a cabinet the firmware also powers on or off all cells and I O chassis in the cabinet e Cells When you power on or off a cell the firmware also powers on or off any I O chassis attached to the cell When specifying a cell you indicate both the cabinet number and the slot in which the cell resides e I O Chassis When you power off an I O chassis from the service processor Command menu the system firmware resets the cell attached to the I O chassis if the cell located and mapped the I O chassis during its cell boot process When specifying an I O chassis you
368. ported by the Partition Manager Tools Switch Complexes action and by the nPartition command u h optionsor g h options For details see Tools for Configuring nPartitions page 165 1 Login to HP UX running on an existing nPartition in the server complex or login to a system with the Enhanced nPartition Commands 198 Creating and Configuring nPartitions 2 Issue the parunlock command with the command line option appropriate for the Complex Profile entry or entries you want to unlock parunlock Options for Original nPartition Commands The Original nPartition Commands parunlock command supports the following options s Unlock the Stable Complex Configuration Data p Unlock the Partition Configuration Data for the nPartition whose number is specified A Unlock the Stable Complex Configuration Data and the Partition Configuration Data for all nPartitions in the complex parunlock Options for Enhanced nPartition Commands The Enhanced nPartition Commands parunlock command supports the following options s Unlock the Stable Complex Configuration Data On HP Integrity servers the s option unlocks the read lock that controls read access to the current Stable Complex Configuration Data See also the P option d Unlock the Dynamic Complex Configuration Data p Unlock the Partition Configuration Data for the nPartition whose number is specified P Cancel any pending changes to the Stable Complex
369. processor Main Menu At the Main Menu enter X to exit the service processor interface Procedure 8 5 Listing Processor Configurations BCH Menu From the BCH Information Menu use the PR command to list processor details for the local nPartition The BCH Menu is available only on HP 9000 systems Listing Processor Configurations 227 1 Access the BCH Main Menu for the nPartition whose processor configuration you want to list Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the BCH Main Menu the Main Menu Enter command or menu gt prompt If ata BCH menu other than the Main Menu then enter MA to return to the BCH Main Menu 2 Enter IN to access the BCH Information Menu Enter the PR command to list processor information for all active cells in the local nPartition 4 Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them 9 To exit the BCH environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 8 6 Listing Processor Configurations EFI Shell From the EFI Shell environment use the info cpu command to list processor details for the local nPartition The EFI Shell is available only on HP Integrity systems 1 Access the EFI Shell environment for the nPartition whose proc
370. pset e HP Integrity Superdome 16 way server model command output ia64 hp superdome server SD16B e HP Integrity Superdome 32 way server model command output ia64 hp superdome server SD32B e HP Integrity Superdome 64 way server model command output ia64 hp superdome server SD64B nPartition Server Hardware Overview Two Cell nPartition Server Model The following cell based HP servers scale from one to two cells The HP rp7405 rp7410 server has single core HP PA RISC processors The model string is 9000 800 rp7410 The HP rp7420 server has dual core HP PA RISC processors PA 8800 processors which provide two processor cores per processor socket The model string is 9000 800 rp7420 The HP rp7440 server has dual core HP PA RISC processors PA 8900 processors which provide two processor cores per processor socket The model string is 9000 800 rp7440 The HP rx7620 server has Intel Itanium 2 processors either single processor modules or HP mx2 dual processor modules Both HP mx2 dual processor modules and single Itanium 2 processors can exist in the same complex but they cannot be mixed in the same nPartition The model command output is ia64 hp rx7620 server The HP rx7640 server has single core or dual core Intel Itanium 2 processors The model command output is ia64 hp rx7640 server Figure 2 1 shows a two cell HP server cabinet Figure 2 1 Two Cell HP Server Cabinet On t
371. ption The accessed complex is then considered the target complex Access is through the service processor LAN port The h option is required if this option is used This option is only used in combination with either the u or g option Paddress hostname specifies the IP address or hostname of the target nPartition u or service processor g
372. ption is only used in combination with either the u or g option IPaddress hostname specifies the IP address or hostname of the target nPartition u or service processor 9 parcreateCommand 251 parmodify Command y You can use the parmodify command to modify the following attributes of an existing nPartition e Partition name e Cell assignments add cells or remove cells e Attributes of existing cells Cell type Use on next boot value Failure usage Enhanced nPartition Commands only Cell local memory CLM value e Core cell choices e Enable or disable Hyper Threading only on supported cells Boot paths the primary alternate and HA alternate paths e IP address if set this value should be consistent with the IP address assigned to the nPartition when HP UX is booted Root permission or IPMI LAN access is required to use this command NOTE On servers based on the HP sx1000 chipset or HP sx2000 chipset when the nPartition Configuration Privilege is restricted the parmodify command cannot add or remove cells from an nPartition and cannot modify the CLM value of any cell These restrictions do not apply when using the g h options Refer to the parmodify 1M manpage for complete details Synopsis The parmodify command supports slightly different options for the Original nPartition Commands and Enhanced nPartition Commands Original nPartition Commands parmodify p PartitionNumber
373. ptions or arguments to be used when booting the device 3 Press Enter to initiate booting using the chosen boot option 4 When Windows begins loading wait for the Special Administration Console SAC to become available The SAC interface provides a text based administration tool that is available from the nPartition console For details refer to the SAC online help type at the SAC gt prompt Loading Windows Server 2003 Datacenter Starting Windows Server 2003 Datacenter Starting Windows kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk Computer is booting SAC started and initialized Use the ch command for information about using channels Use the command for general help SAC gt Booting and Shutting Down Microsoft Windows 127 5 Exit the console and management processor interfaces if you are finished using them To exit the console environment press B Control B this exits the console and returns to the management processor Main menu To exit the management processor type X at the Main menu Shutting Down Microsoft Windows You can shut down the Windows OS on HP Integrity servers using the Start menu or the shutdown command A CAUTION Do not shut down Windows using Special Administration Console SAC restart or shutdown commands under normal circumstances Issuing restart or shutdown at the SAC gt prompt causes the system to restart or shut down immed
374. q command HP UX B 11 23 and HP UX B 11 31 olrad q command Partition Manager Version 1 0 Details Show Complex Details action I O Chassis tab Version 2 0 Select the I O tab See Listing Input Output I O Configurations page 231 224 Listing nPartition and Hardware Status Table 8 1 Hardware and nPartition Status Task Summaries continued Task Listing Cabinets in a Summary e Service Processor MP or GSP PS command and B option to list cabinet details for Server Complex the desired cabinet e nPartition Commands parstatus B command for summaries about all cabinets ortheparstatus V b command for detailed status for the specified cabinet b where is the cabinet number e Partition Manager Version 1 0 Details Show Complex Details action Cabinet Info tab Version 2 0 Hardware tab for an overview of cabinets in the complex Complex Show Complex Details for complete details about all hardware in the complex See Listing Cabinets in a Server Complex page 234 Listing Product and Serial Numbers e Service Processor MP or GSP ID command e BCH Menu Information menu CID command e nPartition Commands parstatus X command e Partition Manager Version 1 0 Complex Show Complex Details General tab Version 2 0 General tab See Listing Product and Serial Numbers page 235 Listing nPa
375. r GSP Command Reference continued Command Description PARPERM Restrict unrestrict nPartition Reconfiguration Privilege PD Modify default nPartition for this login session RL Rekey Complex Profile locks unlock Complex Profile SA Display and set enable disable MP remote access methods SO Configure security options and access control user accounts and passwords XD MP diagnostics and reset Command Reference for EFI Shell Commands Table 4 3 lists the commands supported by the EFI Shell interface on cell based HP Integrity servers The EFI Shell is accessible from an nPartition console when the nPartition is in an active state but has not booted an operating system The following categories of commands are available e Boot Commands EFI Shell e Configuration Commands EFI Shell e Device Driver and Handle Commands EFI Shell e Filesystem Commands EFI Shell e Memory Commands EFI Shell e Shell Navigation and Other Commands EFI Shell e Shell Script Commands Programming Constructs EFI Shell For details on these commands enter help command at the EFI shell prompt Table 4 3 EFI Shell Command Reference Command Boot Commands EFI Shell Commands related to nPartition booting Description autoboot Set view autoboot timeout variable befg Display modify the driver boot configur
376. r Managing Hardware page 201 2 Select the cell or I O chassis whose attention indicator you want to control In Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the nPartition that contains the cell or I O chassis and then select the cell or I O chassis In Partition Manager Version 2 0 select the cell or I O chassis whose attention indicator you want to control 3 Select the Partition Manager action to turn on blink or turn off stop blinking the attention indicator LED for the selected cell or I O chassis From Partition Manager Version 1 0 use the Cell Light Cell LED or I O Light I O Chassis LED action To turn off all LEDs use the Complex gt Clear All LEDs action From Partition Manager Version 2 0 use the Cell gt Turn On Cell LED or l O Turn On Chassis LED action or a similar Turn Off action To turn off all LEDs use the Complex Clear All LEDs action 212 Managing Hardware Resources 4 Exit Partition Manager From Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the File Exit action From Partition Manager Version 2 0 select Log off parmgr or exit the Web browser when finished Configuring and Deconfiguring Cells A You can configure and deconfigure cells by using any one of the following procedures e Configuring and Deconfiguring Cells BCH Menu page 213 e Configuring and Deconfiguring Cells EFI Shell page 214 e Configuring and Deconfiguring Cells nPartition Commands page 215
377. r connection and return to the telnet prompt At any time during your telnet connection to a service processor you can type the Control right bracket escape sequence This key sequence escapes back to the telnet prompt When at the telnet gt prompt you can use the following commands among others print telnet command help information close close the current connection and quit exit telnet To return to the service processor connection type enter or return one or more times Network Configuration for a Service Processor This gives an overview of the network settings for service processor MP or GSP hardware These settings are used for connections to the service processor and are not used for HP UX networking Details on configuring service processor networking are given in the service guide for each server The service processor utility hardware on HP Superdome servers has two network connections the customer LAN and private LAN The service processor on other non Superdome cell based servers does not have a private LAN only a customer LAN connection is provided Features of service processor LANs are given in the following list e Customer LAN for Service Processor The customer LAN is the connection for login access to the service processor menus consoles commands and other features All cell based servers have a customer LAN On HP Superdome servers the customer LAN port is labeled Customer LAN On HP rp8400
378. r details about configuring CLM see Chapter 3 page 61 Cell Property Details Each cell has various properties that determine how the cell can be used and managed To list the properties of cells in a server complex you can use the parstatus C command parstatus V c command or Partition Manager The parstatus C command output includes cell property summaries such as the current assignments usage and I O details for all cells in the complex parstatus C Cell CPU Memory Use OK GB Core On Hardware Actual Deconf OK Cell Next Par Location Usage Max Deconf Connected To Capable Boot Num cab0 cell0O active core 4 0 4 8 0 0 0 cab 0 bay0 chassis1 yes yes 0 cab0 celll active base 4 0 4 8 0 0 0 no yes 0 cab0 cell2 active base 4 0 4 8 0 0 0 cab 0 bayl chassis3 yes yes 0 cab0O cell3 absent cab0 cell4 active core 2 0 4 4 0 0 0 cab 0 bay0 chassis3 yes yes 1 cab0 cell5 active base 2 0 4 4 0 0 0 no yes 1 cab0 cell6 active base 2 0 4 4 0 0 0 cab 0 bayl chassisl yes yes 1 cab0O cell7 absent nPartition Properties 25 The parstatus V c command gives detailed information about the properties and status for the cell c that you specify parstatus V c0 Cel1 Hardware Location cab0 cello0 Global Cell Number 0 Actual Usage active core Normal Usage base Connected To cab0O bay0 chassis0oO Core Cell Capable yes Firmware Revision 20 1 Failure Usage activate Use O
379. ript Commands Programming Constructs EFI Shell EFI shell script commands echo Echo message to stdout or toggle script echo else Script only Use with IF THEN endfor Script only Delimiter for FOR loop construct Command Reference for EFI Shell Commands 83 Table 4 3 EFI Shell Command Reference continued Command Description endif Script only Delimiter for IF THEN construct for Script only Loop construct goto Script only Jump to label location in script if Script only IF THEN construct input Take user input and place in EFI variable pause Script only Prompt to quit or continue stall Stall the processor for some microseconds Command Reference for BCH Menu Commands Table 4 4 lists the commands available from the Boot Console Handler BCH menus for an nPartition The BCH Menu is accessible from an nPartition console when the nPartition is in an active state but has not booted an operating system The following categories of commands are available e General Commands Boot Console Handler BCH e Main Menu Commands Boot Console Handler BCH e Configuration Menu Commands Boot Console Handler BCH e Information Menu Commands Boot Console Handler BCH e Service Menu Commands Boot Console Handler BCH For details on these commands use the help HE command At any BCH menu enter HE command for details about the sp
380. rity SD16B server is ia64 hp superdome server SD16B The Superdome 16 way 32 way server can have up to 16 processor sockets 128 DIMMs and up to four 12 slot PCI I O chassis HP Superdome 32 64 Way Servers SD32000 SD32A and SD32B The Superdome 32 way 64 way server is a single cabinet server that has from two to eight cells each with four processor sockets and up to 32 DIMMs The models of HP Superdome 32 way 64 way servers are SD32000 SD32A and SD32B e The HP 9000 Superdome SD32000 server has single core HP PA RISC processors The model string for the SD32000 server is 9000 800 SD32000 e The HP 9000 Superdome SD32A server has dual core HP PA RISC processors PA 8800 processors which provide two processor cores per processor socket The model string for the HP 9000 SD32A server is 9000 800 SD32A e The HP 9000 Superdome SD32B server has dual core HP PA RISC processors PA 8900 processors which provide two processor cores per processor socket The model string for the HP 9000 SD32B server is 9000 800 SD32B 58 nPartition Server Hardware Overview The HP Integrity Superdome SD32A server has Intel Itanium 2 processors either single processor modules or HP mx2 dual processor modules Both HP mx2 dual processor modules and single Itanium 2 processors can exist in the same complex but they cannot be mixed in the same nPartition The model command output for the HP Integrity SD32A server is ia64 hp superdome server SD32A
381. rity servers the system boot environment is provided by the Extensible Firmware Interface EFI EFI is available through an nPartition console interface before an operating system has booted and after the cells have booted and performed nPartition rendezvous to make the nPartition active The EFI environment enables you to manage and configure the operating system boot process for an nPartition You also can configure some settings for the local nPartition get information about the nPartition and its server complex and perform other tasks such as reboot The EFI boot environment has two main components e EFI Boot Manager A menu driven interface that enables to you configure and select boot options From the EFI Boot Manager you can load an operating system reset the nPartition and configure various system boot and console options e EFI Shell A command line system boot interface that you can enter by selecting the EFI Shell option from the EFI Boot Manager Menu Type exit to leave the EFI Shell interface and return to the EFI Boot Manager Menu The EFI Shell provides much of the same functionality as the Boot Console Handler BCH interface on HP 9000 systems PA RISC systems For details on using the EFI Shell use the help command The following commands are supported for accessing and using the EFI system boot environment for an nPartition e To access an nPartition console type CO from the service processor MP or GS
382. rocessor Main Menu At the Main Menu enter X to exit the service processor interface Procedure 8 15 Listing Input Output Configurations BCH Menu From the BCH Information Menu use the IO command to list I O details for the local nPartition The BCH Menu is available only on HP 9000 systems 1 Access the BCH Main Menu for the nPartition whose I O configuration you want to list Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the BCH Main Menu the Main Menu Enter command or menu gt prompt If ata BCH menu other than the Main Menu then enter MA to return to the BCH Main Menu 2 Enter IN to access the BCH Information Menu 3 Enter the IO command to list I O details for all active cells in the local nPartition The IO command provides details that include I O chassis information I O module PCI card slot details and information about PCI devices installed PCI cards 4 Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the BCH environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 8 16 Listing Input Output Configurations EFI Shell From the EFI Shell environment use theinfo io command to list I O details for the local nPartition The EFI Shell is availa
383. rol b to return to the Main menu When you access a Virtual Front Panel you can either select the nPartition whose VFP you want to view or select the system VFP to view summary information for all nPartitions in the server complex E indicates error since last boot Partition 0 state Activity Cell s Booting 710 Logs Cell state Activity 0 Early CPU selftest Cell firmware test 232 Logs 1 Early CPU selftest Processor test 230 Logs 2 Memory discovery Physical memory test 242 Logs GSP VFP B to Quit gt Virtual Front Panel VFP nPartition Views 79 Command Reference for Service Processor Commands 80 Table 4 2 lists the commands available from the service processor command menu the MP CM gt or GSP CM gt prompt The following categories of commands are available e Service Commands Service Processor MP or GSP e Status Commands Service Processor MP or GSP e System and Access Configuration Commands Service Processor MP or GSP Some commands are restricted to users with Operator or Administrator authority Also note that the available set of commands may differ depending on the utility revision level and server hardware model For details on these commands use the help HE Help feature at the service processor Main Menu Enter the command name at the MP HELP or GSP HELP prompt for syntax restrictions and other information Table 4 2 Service Processor MP or GSP Command Refer
384. roup contains individual nPartition settings including the nPartition name core cell choices and other details that are specific to an nPartition The Complex Profile contains a Partition Configuration Data entry for each possible nPartition A server complex may have a maximum of sixteen nPartitions globally numbered from 0 15 The master copy of all parts of the Complex Profile resides on the service processor MP or GSP for the complex Each cell in the complex also has a copy of the Stable Complex Configuration Data and a copy of the Partition Configuration Data for the nPartition to which it is assigned The service processor MP or GSP in the server manages all Complex Profile data and keeps all copies of the data coherent using a locking mechanism as described in the next sections Changing the Server Complex Profile To modify the Complex Profile and thus change the server complex configuration you use an administration tool such as Partition Manager or one of the nPartition commands See Administration Tools for nPartitions page 18 for details You cannot directly edit the Complex Profile data for a server The service processor maintains a set of locks that are used to ensure that only one set of changes to the Complex Profile occurs at a time When you configure nPartitions the administration tools you use revise the Complex Profile for the server in coordination with the service processor The tools acquire and rele
385. rs the effect of the shutdown h command or its Windows and Linux equivalents is to perform a shutdown for reconfig see Shutdown for Reconfig State in this list On HP OpenVMS servers shutting down without rebooting halts OpenVMS but does not perform a shutdown for reconfig Reset A reset resets the nPartition immediately On HP 9000 systems only the active cells in the nPartition are reset On HP Integrity systems all cells are reset You can reset an nPartition using the REBOOT command from the BCH interface the reset command from the EFI Shell or the RS command from the service processor Command menu The RS command does not check whether the specified nPartition is in use or running an operating system be certain to correctly specify the nPartition Overview of nPartition System Booting 89 90 A NOTE On HP Integrity servers you should reset an nPartition only after all self tests and partition rendezvous have completed For example when the nPartition is inactive all cells are at BIB or is at EFI Boot an nPartition from the Service Processor GSP or MP A boot initiated from the service processor boots an inactive nPartition past the shutdown for reconfig state to allow it to become active To boot an inactive nPartition use the BO command from the service processor Command menu The cells assigned to the nPartition proceed past boot is blocked BIB rendezvous and the nPartition boots to the system b
386. rtition Configurations e Service Processor MP or GSP CP command e nPartition Commands parstatus P command or the parstatus V p command for details about specific nPartition p where is the nPartition number e Partition Manager Version 1 0 View the left side of the primary window to see a display of all nPartitions in the server for details select an nPartition and the Details Show Complex Details action Version 2 0 nPartitions tab See Listing nPartition Configurations page 236 Listing the Local nPartition Number e BCH Menu Configuration menu PD command e EFI Shell info sys command e nPartition Commands parstatus wcommand See Listing the Local nPartition Number page 237 Task Summaries for nPartition and Hardware Status 225 Table 8 1 Hardware and nPartition Status Task Summaries continued Task Summary Listing Power Status e Service Processor MP or GSP PS command and the cabinet option for detailed power and Power Supplies status for the specified cabinet e nPartition Commands parstatus Bcommand fora power status summary for all cabinets or parstatus V b for detailed power status for the specified cabinet b where is the cabinet number frupower d C command for cell power status frupower d I command for I O chassis power status e Partition Manager Version 1 0 Details Show Complex Details action
387. rtition is running Windows you can put it in a shutdown for reconfig state by using the shutdown s command Or you can put an nPartition into the shutdown for reconfig state by using the RECONFIGRESET command at the BCH interface the reconfigreset command at the EFI Shell or using the RR command at the service processor Command menu 4 Login to the service processor GSP or MP for the server complex Login as a user with administrator privileges which are required for creating a Genesis Partition 5 Enter CM to access the service processor Command menu 6 Issue the CC command select G for Genesis Complex Profile and specify the cabinet and cell slot for the cell that will comprise the Genesis Partition GSP CM gt CC This command allows you to change the complex profile WARNING You must shut down all Protection Domains before executing this command G Genesis Complex Profile L Last Complex Profile Select Profile g Enter Cabinet number 0 Enter Slot number 0 Do you want to modify the complex profile Y IN y gt The complex profile will be modified GSP CM gt Creating a Genesis Partition 171 You can confirm that the Genesis Partition was successfully created if the CC command reports that the complex profile will be modified If the CC command reports Sorry command failed then the Genesis Partition was not created possibly because one or more nPartitions are not at the shutdown for reconfig
388. rvers based on the HP sx1000 chipset or HP sx2000 chipset when the nPartition Configuration Privilege is restricted the parcreate command cannot create a new nPartition This restriction does not apply when using the g h options Refer to the parcreate 1M manpage for complete details Synopsis The parcreate command supports slightly different options for the HP UX B 11 11 and other releases Original nPartition Commands parcreate P PartitionName c cell type use_on_next_boot failure _usage b path s path Enhanced nPartition Commands t path parcreate P PartitionName c cell type use_on_next_boot failure_usage clm b path t path s path I IPaddress ERRETES r cell r B I IPaddress L clm value Erai r cell r T flag B u username h IPaddress hostname g h IPaddress hostname e The u h set of options may be specified to cause the command to send its management request using WBEM to an nPartition other than the local nPartition but can also be used as a loopback access to the local nPartition e The g h options may be specified to cause the command to send its management request using IPMI over LAN to a service processor in another server complex but can also be used as a loopback access to the service processor in the local complex The u and g options are mutually exclusive Option
389. rvers using either of the methods described in this section Refer to Shutting Down Linux page 134 for details on shutting down the Red Hat Enterprise Linux OS A CAUTION ACPI Configuration for Red Hat Enterprise Linux Must Be single pci domain or default On cell based HP Integrity servers to boot the Red Hat Enterprise Linux OS an nPartition must have its ACPI configuration value set to single pci domain or default e On HP rx7620 servers rx8620 servers or Integrity Superdome SD16A SD32A SD64A the ACPI configuration must be set to single pci domain e On HP rx7640 servers rx8640 servers or Integrity Superdome SD16B SD32B SD64B the ACPI configuration must be set to default At the EFI Shell enter the acpiconfig command with no arguments to list the current ACPI configuration If the acpiconfig value is not set correctly then Red Hat Enterprise Linux could panic in this situation you must reconfigure acpiconfig to eliminate any bus address conflicts and ensure all I O slots have unique addresses To set the ACPI configuration for Red Hat Enterprise Linux At the EFI Shell enter the acpiconfig value command where value is either single pci domain for rx7620 and rx8620 servers or default for rx7640 and rx8640 servers Then enter the reset command for the nPartition to reboot with the proper configuration for Red Hat Enterprise Linux Use either of these methods to boot Red Hat Enterprise Linux e Choos
390. s nPartition Server Hardware Overview Server Hardware Details Cell Based HP Servers Table 2 1 lists the cell based HP servers For individual server details see the sections that follow Table 2 1 Models of Cell Based HP Servers Cell Capacity Two Cell Servers See Two Cell nPartition Server Model page 55 Server Model s HP 9000 rp7405 7410 server Description Up to eight PA RISC processor cores Runs HP UX B 11 11 Also runs the HP UX B 11 23 September 2004 release and later Runs HP UX B 11 31 model string 9000 800 rp7410 HP 9000 rp7420 server Up to eight dual core PA RISC processors 16 processor cores total Uses the HP sx1000 chipset Runs HP UX B 11 11 Also runs the HP UX B 11 23 September 2004 release and later Runs HP UX B 11 31 model string 9000 800 rp7420 HP 9000 rp7440 server HP Integrity rx7620 server Up to eight dual core PA RISC processors 16 processor cores total Uses the HP sx2000 chipset Runs the HP UX B 11 11 December 2006 release model string 9000 800 rp7440 Up to eight Intel Itanium 2 processors Uses the HP sx1000 chipset Runs HP UX B 11 23 HP UX B 11 31 HP OpenVMS 164 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Red Hat Enterprise Linux and SuSE Linux Enterprise Server model command output ia64 hp rx7620 server HP Integrity rx7620 16 server Up to eight HP mx2 dual processor modules with Intel Itanium 2 processors 16 processor cor
391. s This section provides overviews of common nPartition management tasks The following task overviews are given here e Basics of Listing nPartition and Complex Status e Basics of nPartition Creation e Basics of nPartition Modification e Basics of nPartition Booting and Resetting Basics of Listing nPartition and Complex Status You can list server complex hardware details and nPartition configuration details using the following tools and commands Overview of Managing nPartitions 27 For details see Chapter 8 page 223 e Service processor MP or GSP methods for listing hardware and nPartition status include the following commands which are available from the service processor Command menu CP List nPartition configurations including all assigned cells PS List cabinet power cell processor memory I O and other details IO List connections from cells to I O chassis on HP Superdome servers ID List product and serial numbers e EFI Shell methods available only on HP Integrity servers for listing hardware and nPartition status include the following commands Hardware and nPartition information displayed by the EFI Shell is limited to the local nPartition info sys List the local nPartition number and active cell details info io List the I O configuration info mem List memory details info cpu List processor details e BCH menu methods
392. s in this step To exit the nPartition console and return to the service processor Main Menu type b Control b at any time Interactive Console Access In most situations a prompt for the BCH or EFI system boot environment or the operating system login or command prompt is available from the nPartition console e When an nPartition is at the BCH or EFI system boot environment you can access the BCH Menu the EFI Boot Manager menu or the EFI Shell from the nPartition console e When an nPartition has booted to ISL you can use the EXIT command to exit ISL and return to the BCH interface for the nPartition e When an nPartition has booted HP UX in order to access the BCH or EFI system boot environment you must reboot HP UX and if necessary interrupt the automatic boot process To reboot the nPartition use the shutdown r command or use shutdown R if you also are changing the cell configuration of the nPartition e When an nPartition has booted Windows in order to access the EFI system boot environment you must reboot Windows and if necessary interrupt the automatic boot process To reboot the nPartition use the shutdown r Windows command Non Interactive Console Access In the following situations you cannot interact with the nPartition console In these cases you can wait until the console is interactive or can force interactive access e When the nPartition is resetting or is booting an operating system you cannot interact w
393. s P PartitionName I I Paddress L clm_value C dl hye ue o not boo flue vee Ldn Specifies the name of the new nPartition Specifies the IP address that can be used by management tools to address this nPartition This value should be consistent with the IP address used for the nPartition when an operating system is booted Specifies the amount of the memory that will be used as cell local memory per cell The clm_value specified using the c option takes precedence over the clm_value specified using the L option See the c option for a description of the clm_value formats Specifies the cell s to be added to the nPartition e The only valid type value is Base cell The default e The valid use_on_next_boot values for cells are y Participate in reboot The default base n Do not participate in reboot e The only valid failure_usage value is parcreate Command 249 b path t path s path 250 nPartition Commands ri Reactivate with memory interleave the default Specifies to integrate the cell into the nPartition as normally occurs e Enhanced nPartition Commands only The clm value specifies the amount of memory that will be configured as cell local memory for the cell The clm value specified using the c option takes precedence over the clm value specified using the L option You can specify the clm value in either of two forms percentage or absolute amount of memory The
394. s parcreate 1M parmodify 1M parremove 1M parstatus 1 parunlock 1M fruled 1M frupower 1M and cplxmodify 1M On a Windows system refer to Start gt Programs Hewlett Packard nPar Management gt nPar Commands Manual Specifying Cells and I O Chassis to Commands Use the cell and I O chassis notation described in this section when you manage configure and inquire about cells and I O chassis using the nPartition configuration commands Details are in the Cell Specification Formats and I O Specification Format sections that follow Cell Specification Formats Use either of the following two formats to specify cells when using the nPartition configuration commands Global Cell Number Format or Cell Hardware Location Format e Global Cell Number Format The global cell number format is identical to the cells HP UX hardware path as reported by the HP UX ioscan command In global format each cell is given a single unique number that indicates the relative location of the cell in the entire server complex Table A 1 Cell IDs in Global Cell Number Format Cell Slot 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Global Format for 0 1 rp7405 rp7410 rp7420 rp7440 rx7620 and rx7640 Specifying Cells and I O Chassis to Commands 243 Table A 1 Cell IDs in Global Cell Number Format continued Global Format for 0 1 2 3 rp8400 rp8420 rp8440 1x8620 and rx8640 Super
395. s Descriphonss istiseksysevsoheathas atecaeageery ete aguaiebarennde meme euauads 20 Complex Profile Group Detail Sages svertstivcenccssysip casas eneeasbievsasbayenhetsancepcuseevikersyease aa venting eoacaniee ens 40 Models of Cell Based HP Servets cccccccccccccccccccssccsscessccssceusccssceecesseuecessceusecsseusessseuuecesseuuness 51 Operating System Hardware Requirements isd cocskes sevchistewecses erases Gcdaeioie Messeetonsee wweccess eccbutieees 61 Windows SAC Command s aieeaa aaa a an a a aa a aaa a n 73 Service Processor MP or GSP Command Reference ssseeeeseesrsssrerssseertssesrersesressssrresssrerese 80 EFI Shell Command Reference cccccccccccsccccccsssscccesescccesessccesesssceusessscesessseeusessseesessseesessseuuesess 81 Boot Console Handler BCH Command Referencce cccsscccesessoececeessnseceenseceeetecconsersenseeees 84 nPartition Boot and Reset Task SUMMALieS ccccccccecsccceeesecccseusceseeuscessuussccssuusscessuuscessuueseeues 96 nPartition Configuration Task Summaries 5 0i lt ssesdcinetade aces nssdeiayentidains labdedyn test deeb ncsabavrunddbepekhbee 166 Hardware Management Task Suiimaries x cii2 c lt ccsssie cuss ws eatiauncteciavectusabetectntsewhacds wuieeanseeuaeeays 202 Attention Indicator LED States and Meanings ocd einiid oie alah econ 209 Hardware and nPartition Status Task SUMMALIES ccccccccceeecccseeeesccsseesscesseescesseussceseeueseeees 224 Cell IDs in Global Ce
396. s on or off by using any one of the following procedures e Turning Attention Indicators On and Off nPartition Commands page 210 e Turning Attention Indicators On and Off Partition Manager page 212 HP s nPartition systems provide attention indicators LEDs to help you to visually select and confirm which hardware you want to perform operations on Attention indicators are amber orange lights Table 7 2 lists the meanings for the various attention indicator states When all components of a system are functioning and no service operations are occurring every attention indicator should be turned off HP Superdome cabinet number LCDs remain lit or blinking when cabinet power is on Table 7 2 Attention Indicator LED States and Meanings Attention Indicator State Meaning OFF Not selected BLINKING Selected to be used in a service operation ON Supported for PCI card slot LEDs only Service required problems have been identified with the component LEDs for Hardware Components You can control turn off blink and or turn on attention indicators for the following hardware components e Cell LEDs Each cell or cell slot has its own attention indicators Turning Attention Indicators LEDs On and Off 209 On HP Superdome servers each cell attention indicator is located on the server cabinet hardware below the cell slot just to the right of the power LED for the cell slot On other P
397. s down Linux and performs a shutdown for reconfig of the nPartition All cells are reset and nPartition reconfiguration occurs as needed All cells then remain at a wait at BIB state and the nPartition is inactive The required time argument specifies when the Linux shutdown is to occur On HP rx7620 rx7640 rx8620 and rx8640 servers with an ACPI configuration setting of single pci domain a wait at BIB state is the default OS shutdown for reconfig behavior but the acpiconfig enable softpowerdown EFI Shell command can be used to instead cause all nPartition hardware to power off For details see Chapter 5 page 87 Complex Profile 36 The configurable aspects of a server complex are represented in a set of data called the Complex Profile which determines how hardware is assigned to and used by nPartitions within a server Getting Started with nPartitions The Complex Profile consists of three parts or groups of data which are described in detail in Table 1 5 page 40 e Stable Complex Configuration Data page 40 This group contains complex wide settings including the complex name serial number the nPartition assignment for each cell and other details that apply to the entire server complex The Complex Profile contains one Stable Complex Configuration Data entry e Dynamic Complex Configuration Data page 40 Architecturally reserved data e Partition Configuration Data page 40 This g
398. s in a Server Complex nPartition Commands page 234 e Listing Cabinets in a Server Complex Partition Manager page 234 Cabinet details include the cabinet type a list of cells I O chassis power supplies utilities fans firmware components interconnecting hardware Other information such as the power status faults and LED states also are given Procedure 8 19 Listing Cabinets in a Server Complex Service Processor From the service processor Command Menu use the PS command and the cabinet option to list the current status for the desired cabinet 1 Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CM to access the Command Menu 2 To list the current status for a cabinet in the server complex issue the PS command and select the cabinet option for the server cabinet whose configuration and details you want to view e On HP Superdome servers select the B cabinet option and specify the cabinet whose information you want to view e Onall other systems select the T cabinet option 3 To exit the service processor Command Menu enter MA to return to the service processor Main Menu At the Main Menu enter X to exit the service processor interface Procedure 8 20 Listing Cabinets in a Server Complex nPartition Commands From the command line use the parstatus B command to list all cabinets in the server complex or use the parstatus V b command to view a detailed status for the specified cabinet b
399. s not support PCI T O chassis SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 Supports up to 16 Intel Itanium 2 processors Requires single Itanium 2 processors and does not support HP mx2 dual processor modules Supports a maximum of four cells in an nPartition Supports a maximum of 256 GBytes memory Supports a maximum of two I O chassis in an nPartition Requires a PCI X I O chassis and does not support PCI T O chassis SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 Supports up to 16 Intel Itanium 2 processors On servers based on the HP sx2000 chipset supported only in nPartitions that have dual core Intel Itanium 2 processors Supports a maximum of four cells in an nPartition Supports a maximum of 256 GBytes memory Supports a maximum of two I O chassis in an nPartition Requires a PCI X I O chassis and does not support PCI T O chassis Configuration Requirements for nPartitions 62 The hardware requirements determine which cells are eligible to be assigned to an nPartition For configuration requirements and restrictions for Superdome hybrid servers refer to HP Superdome Hybrid Servers Intel Itanium 2 and PA RISC nPartition Mixing page 17 HP Superdome servers based on the HP sx1000 chipset can support hybrid configurations with both PA RISC nPartitions and Intel Itanium 2 nPartitions in the same server complex Every nPartition you configure must meet the following hardware requirements e
400. s sets the second item in the boot options list displayed by the EFI Boot Manager and only boot options for the local nPartition can be modified Specifies the name of the nPartition Specifies whether to boot the nPartition The default is not to boot When you modify an inactive nPartition and specify the B option the nPartition is booted and becomes active immediately after it is modified When you modify an active nPartition and specify the B option you must perform a reboot for reconfig of the modified nPartition You must perform this reboot for reconfig before any other cell assignments can take place in the server complex Specifies whether Hyper Threading should be enabled or not only if cells support this feature If this option is not specified the Hyper Threading property will not be changed The valid values for flag are y Enable Hyper Threading which allows multiple threads to run concurrently on each processor core n Disable Hyper Threading Enhanced nPartition Commands only Specifies the account and authorization to access an nPartition other than the local nPartition The h option is required if this option is used username specifies a configured user name on the target nPartition Enhanced nPartition Commands only Allows access to the complex specified by the h option The accessed complex is then considered the target complex Access is through the service processor LAN port The h optio
401. seeaeeeseeaeeseess 201 Tools for Wana cine HardWare essersi chdss as seanoa issi NEEE EEE aee EEA EERE EENET EAEE TERS EEEE AREAS iari Eaa 201 Task Summaries for Hardware Resource Manacement ics ciconaveteviicieae Gace etait eases 201 Powernne Server Cabinets On and Ona waited nada eigen ne bene 205 Powering Cells and I O Chassis On and Off seis cc scbens acnavonsevesctyaccsdeetantebvepeanedenceubzecyynaeeliaentdereyeiea dens 206 Turning Attention Indicators LEDs On and OMb nces cicnncesuneechastvousstte ives ts sbentdesnnondbexgnbieaudeasds togndeens 209 Conheunine and Deconfigu ring Celsi esiri ea n ea e a E A a aa 213 Configuring and Deconfiguring Processors sessssessesserseseisesststestssesrtssestestssestestesesreseneesessestenes 217 Enabling and Disabling Hyper Threading on Dual Core Intel Itanium 2 Processotrs 218 Configuring and Deconfiguring Memory DIMM5 esssesssssssssesssesssssresseeseesesserssesnessernseenesreessess 220 Complex Health Analysis of a Servelseimr onionenn EAE Sth e E E a Teh 222 8 Listing nPartition and Hardware Status c sccssecsseseseseeseseseesesesesesesesssesesssteeeeeaes 223 TOOLS FOR Listing StAtUs ic2alencstcvers wand dopehodeng ckoesvepestceuns edu nE E ATE EE Ei 223 Task Summaries for nPartition and Hardware Status ccccccsccccccccceccsseseseececececeaaeaesescceceeceaaeaeneses 223 Listing Gell Configura t nS 2s i e ecrskiess aah tte nee EE Neen tae eerie an ia
402. select the Start Shut Down action and choose Restart from the pull down menu AN CAUTION Do not shut down Windows using Special Administration Console SAC restart or shutdown commands under normal circumstances Issuing restart or shutdown at the SAC gt prompt causes the system to restart or shutdown immediately and can result in the loss of data Instead use the Windows Start menu or the shutdown command to shut down gracefully 1 Login to Windows running on the nPartition that you want to shut down For example access the nPartition console and use the Windows SAC interface to start a command prompt from which you can issue Windows commands to shut down the nPartition 2 Issuethe shutdown rcommand to shut down the Windows Server 2003 operating system on the nPartition and reboot You also can perform this procedure by selecting the Start Shut Down action and choosing Restart from the pull down menu For example shutdown r t 60 c Shut down and reboot This command initiates a Windows system shutdown and reboot after a timeout period of 60 seconds The c option specifies a message that is broadcast to any other users of the system For more details use the help shutdown command Procedure 5 33 Rebooting and Resetting nPartitions Linux To reset the local nPartition from Linux issue the shutdown r time command where time is the time when the system will be shut down and rebooted 138 Booting and Resetti
403. select the network card whose MAC address you want to use when booting Highlight the desired network card then press Return or Enter to initiate booting using the selected card EFI Boot Maintenance Manager ver 1 10 14 60 Boot From a File Select a Volume TA64 EFI Acpi 000222F0 269 Pci 0 0 Scsi Pun8 Lun0 HD Part1 S Removable Media Boot Acpi 000222F0 2A8 Pci 0 1 Scsi Pun2 Luno Load File Acpi 000222F0 200 Pci 1 0 Mac 001083FD5D9B J Load File EFI Shell Built in Exit 4 Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the EFI environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 5 49 Booting over a Network EFI Shell From the EFI Shell environment use the Llanboot select command to boot over a network The EFI Shell is available only on HP Integrity systems A NOTE To perform a directed lanboot on HP Integrity servers use the EFI Shell dbprofile z command and the lanboot command dn option First use the dbprofile EFI Shell command to list or create direct boot profiles Then use the lanboot select dn profile command to perform a directed lanboot using the specified direct boot profile profile For details use the help dbprofile command and the help lanboot command from the EFI Shell 1 Access the EFI Shell environment for the nPartition that
404. servers it is GSP LAN On HP rp7405 rp7410 servers it is the only LAN connection on each board e Private LAN for Service Processor Superdome Only The private LAN is the connection to the Superdome service support processor SSP workstation also called the service management station SMS Only Superdome servers have a private LAN It typically is not used on the Superdome server models based on the HP sx1000 chipset or HP sx2000 chipset To list the current service processor network configuration use the LS command To configure service processor network settings use the LC command from the Command menu For a procedures refer to the service guide for your server Viewing Console Logs Each nPartition in a server complex has its own console log that stores a record of the most recent nPartition console activity To access the console log for an nPartition enter CL from the service processor Main menu and select which nPartition console log you want to view To exit the console log viewer type b Control b to return to the Main menu When viewing an nPartition console log type P to view the previous page of the console log or type N or Enter to view the next page Viewing Console Logs 77 When you enter a console log viewer it displays the oldest data in the log first and allows you to page through the log to view the more recently recorded activity Each console log is a circular log file that records approximately 30 t
405. sessessseiseisesssersseses 59 HP Superdome T O Expansion Ga binetea cccacesvenoeed bevcessuiunedatsesndessynvapeiaeneraeeiyaeeeadaevaeesunnageabes 59 S Panning APAN HONS areo aAA E E E 6l nPartition Hardware Requirements for Operating Systems vccccesccdcnn tii nmirdoiitaties 61 Configuration Requirements for NE Are HOns ier cccwnestissupisceastienstordogetsvanneuuesssupedddawmedeasdvcnssconmuenenngosss 62 Recommended nPartition A OMmie UbaUOnss sects ecsnssuey eanaslantaosneeout saves evecncomke cou seesnananancsts tev eaneon eles 63 Recommended HP Superdome nPartition Configurations o isiiesscicecs sastecetasteRivardaderseccepngnacins aves 64 4 Using Management Interfaces and Tools c ssssssssessssesesescsesecessesesseeesnesesseseeseens 67 SMS Support Management Station for HP Superdome Servers is2 s ccesss vis ccndeevcnevtseeiscasnreoeiegneiiocesse 67 Overview of nPartition Service Processor MP or GSP Interfaces ee ei eeeeseeeceesseeeeeeenaeeeeeeneeeeees 67 Service Processor MP or GSP Features cc ccccesessesssonccseceseseenscnecnseceeeseccesseosceseensessensoneosseeeenteoes 68 Service Processor Accounts and Access Levels ccccssssccesessecerecsonsecconsececeseseecensecconsessonseeees 69 Partition Console Features denni aM ee Ba e arth a CS Sat oe Sah a eae Rat 70 Partition Console Access versus Direct OS Ro pits viteste reese tied secede eotaeteereeeee ds 71 Boot Console Handler System Boot Environment
406. set the ACPI configuration value for the nPartition to either single pci domain or default On HP rx7620 servers rx8620 servers or Integrity Superdome SD16A SD32A SD64A the ACPI configuration must be set to single pci domain On HP rx7640 servers rx8640 servers or Integrity Superdome SD16B SD32B SD64B the ACPI configuration must be set to default For details refer to ACPI Configuration for Red Hat Enterprise Linux Must Be single pci domain or default page 131 SuSE Linux Enterprise Server ACPI Configuration single pci domain or default On cell based HP Integrity servers to boot or install the SuSE Linux Enterprise Server OS you must set the ACPI configuration value for the nPartition to single pci domain or default On HP rx7620 servers rx8620 servers or Integrity Superdome SD16A SD32A SD64A the ACPI configuration must be set to single pci domain On HP rx7640 servers rx8640 servers or Integrity Superdome SD16B SD32B SD64B the ACPI configuration must be set to default For details refer to ACPI Configuration for SuSE Linux Enterprise Server Must Be single pci domain or default page 133 ACPI Softpowerdown Configuration OS Shutdown Behavior On HP rx7620 rx7640 rx8620 and rx8640 servers you can configure the nPartition behavior when an OS is shut down and halted The two options are to have hardware power off when the OS is halted or to have the nPartition be made inactive
407. sion 1 723 Press Any Key to interrupt Autoboot efi hpux AUTO gt boot vmunix Seconds left till autoboot 9 User Types A Key to Stop the HP UX Boot Process and Access the HPUX EFI Loader Type help for help HPUX gt 5 Issue HP UX Boot Loader commands at the HPUX gt prompt or enter the EXIT command to return to the EFI Shell interface Refer to the help command or the hpux 1M manpage for details 150 Booting and Resetting nPartitions 6 Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the EFI environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Using HP UX Loader Commands This section gives details on issuing HP UX Boot Loader commands using the following two methods e HPUX EFI Boot Loader Commands page 151 On HP Integrity servers Intel Itanium based systems you can issue HP UX Boot Loader commands using HPUX EFI the HPUX gt prompt e HPUX Boot Loader Commands Issued from ISL page 151 On HP 9000 servers PA RISC systems you can issue HP UX Boot Loader commands from the HP UX Initial System Loader the ISL gt prompt HPUX EFI Boot Loader Commands On HP Integrity servers you can issue HP UX Boot Loader commands using HPUX EFI the HPUX gt prompt as described in the following procedure Procedure 5 52 Issuing HP UX Boot Loa
408. sion 2 0 Then use the General tab to rename the nPartition 1 Access Partition Manager For details on accessing Partition Manager or other tools see Tools for Configuring nPartitions page 165 2 Select the nPartition you want to rename then perform the actions to rename it From Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the Partition Modify Partition action and use the General tab to rename the nPartition From Partition Manager Version 2 0 select the nPartition Modify nPartition action and use the General tab to rename the nPartition 3 Exit Partition Manager From Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the File Exit action From Partition Manager Version 2 0 select Log off parmgr or exit the Web browser when finished Renaming a Server Complex You can rename a server complex by using any one of the following procedures e Renaming a Server Complex Service Processor page 187 e Renaming a Server Complex nPartition Commands page 188 e Renaming a Server Complex Partition Manager page 188 You can assign a name for each server complex in order to better identify the complex as you work with it The server complex name serves as a helpful identifier changing the name does not affect the way in which commands and utilities interact with the complex Several commands and utilities display the server complex name as part of their output and interfaces For example some nPartition commands
409. sis with core I O 2 After confirming that cells you have chosen would establish a valid nPartition configuration use the parcreate c command to create a new nPartition with the cells The c option differs slightly for the nPartition command releases When using the parcreate command only specify the B option if you want the nPartition to be booted and become active The B option causes parcreate to immediately boot the newly created nPartition past the default shutdown for reconfig state By not specifying B the new nPartition can be further modified because it will remain inactive at the shutdown for reconfig state until you boot it using the BO command at the service processor Command Menu If creating a single cell nPartition use just one c option To create a multiple cell nPartition specify the c option multiple times once for each cell issuing a single command line For example with the Original nPartition Commands the following command creates a one cell nPartition parcreate c4 base y ri c6 base y ri Partition Created The partition number is 1 Creating a New nPartition 173 When parcreate successfully creates a new nPartition it reports Partition Created and reports the nPartition number partition number is If parcreate detects any problems or issues when creating an nPartition it lists them in its output If it cannot create the nPartition parcreate reports Command failed alo
410. ss Booting to the HP UX Loader EFI Boot Manager or EFI Shell The EFI system boot environment is available only on HP Integrity systems 1 Access the EFI Shell environment for the nPartition from which you will be running and accessing the HP UX Loader HPUX EFI interface Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If at another EFI menu select the Exit option from the sub menus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading From the EFI Boot Manager menu select the EFI Shell menu option to access the EFI Shell environment 2 Access the EFI System Partition sX where X is the filesystem number for the device from which you want to boot HP UX 3 When accessing the EFI System Partition for the desired boot device issue the HPUX command to invoke the EFI HPUX HPUX EFI loader on the selected device 4 Boot to the HP UX Boot Loader prompt HPUX gt by typing any key within the ten seconds given for interrupting the HP UX boot process You will use the HPUX EFI loader to boot HP UX in single user mode in the next step After you type a key the HPUX EFI interface the HP UX Boot Loader prompt HPUX gt is provided fs0 gt hpux c Copyright 1990 2002 Hewlett Packard Company All rights reserved HP UX Boot Loader for IA64 Revi
411. ssis Log Viewer or Event Log Viewer HP 9000 servers with HP PA 8700 processors have chassis logs and servers based on the HP sx1000 or sx2000 chipset have event logs See Chapter 4 page 67 Getting Started with nPartitions For service processor commands see Command Reference for Service Processor Commands page 80 e EFI Boot Manager and EFI Shell Commands On cell based HP Integrity servers the Extensible Firmware Interface EFI supports nPartition management The EFI is accessible from an nPartition console when the nPartition is in an active state but has not booted an operating system See Command Reference for EFI Shell Commands page 81 for details e BCH Menu Commands On cell based PA RISC servers the Boot Console Handler BCH interface supports management from an nPartition console when the nPartition is in an active state but has not booted an operating system See Command Reference for BCH Menu Commands page 84 for details e nPartition Commands You can configure manage and monitor nPartitions and hardware using the nPartition commands such as parstatus parcreate parmodify and others Two versions of the nPartition commands are available the Original nPartition Commands and Enhanced nPartition Commands The Original nPartition Commands are used only on HP UX 11iv1 B 11 11 releases prior to the December 2004 release The Enhanced nPartition Commands are supported for HP UX Windows a
412. st fan and blower status you can login to any system with Enhanced nPartition Commands installed 2 Issue commands to list details about fan and blower status e parstatus B Fan and blower status summary for all cabinets e parstatus V b Detailed fan and blower status for the specified cabinet b where is the cabinet number Procedure 8 37 Listing Fan and Blower Status Partition Manager You can list fan and blower status by using Partition Manager When using Partition Manager Version 1 0 use the Details Show Complex Details action Power Cooling tab to list fan and blower details When using Partition Manager Version 2 0 use the Power and Cooling tab to list fan and blower details 1 Access Partition Manager For details on accessing Partition Manager or other tools see Tools for Listing Status page 223 2 List fan and blower details for the server complex From Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the Details Show Complex Details action and the Power Cooling tab to view fan and blower status For specific details select the cabinet blowers or I O fans entries in the Power Cooling summary list From Partition Manager Version 2 0 select the Power and Cooling tab to view fan and blower status details 240 Listing nPartition and Hardware Status Exit Partition Manager From Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the File Exit action From Partition Manager Version 2 0 select Log off parmgr or exi
413. st shut down the operating system On HP Integrity servers you should reset an nPartition only after all self tests and partition rendezvous have completed e BCH Menu REBOOT command e EFI Boot Manager Boot Option Maintenance Cold Reset e EFI Shell reset command e HP UX sbin shutdown or usr sbin reboot command e OpenVMS SYS SYSTEM SHUTDOWN command and enter Yes at the Should an automatic system reboot be performed prompt e Windows shutdown r command or the Start Shut Down action and Restart pull down menu option e Linux sbin shutdown command You must include the required time argument to specify when the shutdown is to occur See Rebooting and Resetting nPartitions page 135 Performing a Reboot for Reconfig e NOTE e HP UX sbin shutdown R command e OpenVMS SYS SYSTEM SHUTDOWN command and enter Yes at the Should an automatic system reboot be performed prompt e Windows shutdown r command or the Start gt Shut Down action and Restart pull down menu option Only supported for cell based HP servers e Linux sbin shutdown r time command You must include the time argument to specify when the shutdown is to occur See Performing a Reboot for Reconfig page 139 Shutting Down toa Shutdown for Reconfig Inactive State Booting an Inactive nPartition Booting over a Network e NOTE e Service Processor MP or GSP RR command
414. sx1000 chipset or HP sx2000 chipset when the nPartition Configuration Privilege is restricted the parunlock command e cannot unlock the Partition Configuration Data of non local nPartitions e cannot unlock the Dynamic Complex Configuration Data or Stable Complex Configuration Data for the local complex cannot cancel pending changes to the Stable Complex Configuration Data and e cannot unlock the cell data of cells not assigned to the local nPartition These restrictions do not apply when using the g h options Refer to the parunlock 1M manpage for details Synopsis parunlock p PartitionNumber s parunlock A Enhanced nPartition Commands only parunlock d c cell P Enhanced nPartition Commands Notes e The u h set of options may be specified to cause the command to send its management request using WBEM to an nPartition other than the local nPartition but can also be used as a loopback access to the local nPartition e The g h options may be specified to cause the command to send its management request using IPMI over LAN to a service processor in another server complex but can also be used as a loopback access to the service processor in the local complex The u and g options are mutually exclusive Options p PartitionNumber Unlock the Partition Configuration Data of the specified nPartition S Unlocks the Stable Complex Configuration Data of the target complex d Enh
415. t Interfaces page 101 Monitoring nPartition Use the VFP option from the service processor Main Menu to access a Virtual Front Panel Boot Activity for monitoring the boot status of an nPartition See Monitoring nPartition Boot Activity page 104 Finding Bootable e BCH Menu SEARCH command Devices e EFI Shell map command See Finding Bootable Devices page 106 Performing a Transfer of Control Reset e CAUTION Under normal operation you shut down the operating system before issuing a TOC reset e Service Processor MP or GSP TC command See Performing a Transfer of Control Reset page 107 Booting HP UX e BCH Menu BOOT command e EFI Boot Manager select an item from the boot options list e EFI Shell access the EFI System Partition for example s0 for a root device and enter HPUX to invoke the loader See Booting HP UX page 110 This section also covers booting HP UX in single user mode and LVM maintenance mode Shutting Down HP UX e Issue the sbin shutdown command with the desired options such as r to shut down and reboot automatically or h to shut down and halt the system e The Rand Hoptions to shutdown and reboot are used when performing nPartition reconfigurations see the Reboot for Reconfig and Shutdown for Reconfig details in this table See Shutting Down HP UX page 117 Booting HP OpenVMS
416. t Manager menu select the EFI Shell menu option to access the EFI Shell environment Enter the dimmconfig command with no arguments to list a current summary of the memory configuration for the local nPartition Use the dimmconfig command to change memory configurations for any of the cells assigned to the local nPartition Configuring and Deconfiguring Memory DIMMs 221 A NOTE When you deallocate a DIMM all other DIMMs in the echelon also will not be used the next time the nPartition boots dimmconfig cell dimm OFF deconfigures the specified DIMM dimm on the cell cell indicated dimmconfig cell dimm ON configures the DIMM on the cell Use dimmconfig cell to display the DIMM configuration for a cell Enter the help dimmconfig command for more details Reboot the nPartition using the reset command Whenever changing memory configurations you must reboot the corresponding nPartition to allow the configuration changes to take place Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the EFI environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Complex Health Analysis of a Server You can analyze the general hardware and configuration status of a cell based server by using the Partition Manager Complex Analyze Complex Health action as described in the following procedur
417. t and presented in GMT Greenwich mean time variable Save restore specific EFI variables ver Display the version information Device Driver and Handle Commands EFI Shell Commands for managing devices drivers and handles baud View serial port com settings connect Bind a driver to a device dblk Hex dump of BlkIo devices devices Display devices managed by EFI drivers devtree Display tree of devices dh Dump handle info disconnect Disconnect driver s from device s drivers Display list of drivers drvcfg Invoke the Driver Config Protocol drvdiag Invoke the Driver Diagnostics Protocol guid Dump known GUID IDs lanaddress Display MAC address load Load EFI drivers map Map shortname to device path openinfo Display the open protocols for given handle pei Display PCI devices or PCI function configuration space reconnect Reconnect driver s from a device unload Unload a protocol image Filesystem Commands E FI Shell Commands for managing files directories and attributes attrib Display change the attributes of files directories Using Management Interfaces and Tools Table 4 3 EFI Shell Command Reference continued Command Description cd Update view the current directory comp Compare the contents of two files cp Copy one or more files directories to another location e
418. t boot values MAin Return to the BCH Main Menu BootID cell proc bootid Display or set Boot Identifier BootTimer 0 200 Seconds allowed for boot attempt CEllConfig cell Configure or deconfigure the specified cell ON OFF COreCell choice cell Display or set core cell choices for the nPartition CPUconfig cell cpu Configure or deconfigure the processor cpu on the specified cell ON OFF DataPrefetch Display or set data prefetch behavior ENABLE DISABLE DEfault Set the nPartition to predefined default values FastBoot test RUN SKIP Display or set boot tests execution self tests KGMemory value Display or set KGMemory requirement PathFlags Display or set boot path flags boot actions PRI HAA ALT value PD name Display or set the nPartition name ResTart ON OFF Set nPartition restart policy TIme en yr mo dy hr mn ss Read or set the real time clock the local nPartition date time setting The BCH time is set and presented in GMT Greenwich mean time Information Menu Commands Boot Console Handler BCH Commands to display hardware information MAin Return to the BCH Main Menu ALL cell Display all of the information available for the nPartition BootINfo Display boot related information CAche cell Display cache information ChipRevisions cell Displa
419. t diskptn Indicates which device diskptn to mount as the root disk partition e append options Specifies boot time kernel options that are passed to the Linux kernel when it is loaded Using Linux Loader ELILO Commands You can control the Linux boot process by using the ELILO Linux loader commands to select a non default Linux boot configuration specify additional boot options or load a Linux kernel whose path you explicitly specify See Booting to the Linux Loader ELILO EFI page 152 for details on accessing ELILO using ELILO and elilo conf and managing the elilo conf file ELILO Linux Loader Commands The following commands are available for use when interacting with the ELILO Linux loader the ELILO boot prompt Esc Enter Exit the ELILO Linux loader Tab List all entries labels in the current elilo conf file question mark List all disk devices available to the ELILO Linux loader Linux Booting Using ELILO Commands and Options The following list describes uses of ELILO to load Linux e Select a non default Linux boot configuration to be loaded 1 Access the ELILO boot prompt 2 Type the Tab key to list all boot configuration entries in the elilo conf file 3 Enter the name of the boot entry you want to load ELILO boot Tab linux linux up or any kernel file name dev_name path file ELILO boot linux up 154 Booting and Resetting nPartitions Uncompressing Linux done Loading ini
420. t in the same complex but they cannot be mixed in the same nPartition The model command output for the HP Integrity SD64A server is ia64 hp superdome server SD64A The HP Integrity Superdome SD64B server has single core or dual core Intel Itanium 2 processors The model command output for the HP Integrity SD64B server is ia64 hp superdome server SD64B The Superdome 64 way 128 way server can have up to 64 processor sockets 512 DIMMs and up to eight internal 12 slot PCI I O chassis Each of the two cabinets in a Superdome 64 way 128 way server provides up to 32 processor sockets 256 DIMMs and up to four 12 slot PCI I O chassis HP Superdome 64 way 128 way servers also can have optional I O expansion cabinet hardware HP Superdome I O Expansion Cabinet HP Superdome 32 way 64 way and Superdome 64 way 128 way servers can include I O expansion cabinets in addition to the server cabinet s in the complex Each I O expansion cabinet has a cabinet number of either 8 or 9 Server Hardware Details Cell Based HP Servers 59 A Superdome I O expansion cabinet includes up to 3 I O bays with two 12 slot I O chassis in each bay This provides for up to 6 chassis with a total of 72 PCI card slots in each I O expansion cabinet The Superdome I O expansion cabinet is a standard size cabinet that space permitting you can mount peripherals in as well as I O chassis Also refer to the book I O Expansion Cabinet Guide for Superdome Servers
421. t the Web browser when finished Listing Fan and Blower Status 241 242 A nPartition Commands y This appendix has details and command line syntax for the HP nPartition Commands including both the Original nPartition Commands and the Enhanced nPartition Commands e The Original nPartition Commands were distributed as part of HP UX 11i v1 B 11 11 releases prior to the December 2004 release e The Enhanced nPartition Commands are distributed with current HP UX releases including HP UX 11i v3 B 11 31 all releases of HP UX 11i v2 B 11 23 and releases of HP UX 11i v1 B 11 11 beginning with the December 2004 release The Enhanced nPartition Commands also are distributed as bundles on the HP Smart Setup CD for Windows and as bundles on the HP Integrity Essentials Foundation Pack for Linux For an introduction to the nPartition Commands see Commands for Configuring nPartitions page 19 This appendix provides the following reference information for using HP nPartition Commands e parcreate Command page 249 e parmodify Command page 252 e parremove Command page 256 e parstatus Command page 258 e parunlock Command page 260 e fruled Command page 262 e frupower Command page 264 e cplxmodify Command page 266 Only supported by the Enhanced nPartition Commands NOTE For the most current information for these commands refer to the online manpage
422. tails refer to the parmodify 1M manpage e For the Enhanced nPartition Commands the parmodify command s a option is as follows a cell type use fail clm where the cell type use and fail attributes are the same as supported by the Original nPartition Commands The clm value specifies the amount of memory that will be configured as cell local memory for the cell You can specify the clm value in either of two forms percentage or absolute amount of memory Percentage cell local memory CLM The percent number can be any number in the range 0 100 with a suffix of This number is rounded to 12 5 25 37 5 50 62 5 75 87 5 or 100 If the cell contains less than 4 GBytes of memory then the percentage is rounded to 25 50 75 or 100 Percentages are rounded up or down to the nearest value but are not rounded up to 100 Absolute CLM specification The default The absolute number is interpreted as an absolute number of gigabytes of memory and can optionally have a suffix of GB As needed an absolute CLM specification is rounded up to the nearest 0 5 GBytes If the clm value is rounded the command reports the final value used For details refer to the parmodify 1M manpage parmodify Command B Option for nPartition Booting You can optionally specify the parmodify command s B option to require that the modified nPartition be rebooted e When you specify B to modify an inactive nPartition the
423. the BCH and EFI environments do not have methods for changing Dynamic Complex Configuration Data Users and administrators do not directly configure this data Partition Configuration Data nPartition specific information each nPartition has its own data Getting Started with nPartitions Table 1 5 Complex Profile Group Details continued Complex Profile Group Description and Contents The Partition Configuration Data contains configuration details specific to each nPartition in the complex Each nPartition has its own Partition Configuration Data entry which may be modified by administrators The service processor MP or GSP has a copy of the Partition Configuration Data for every nPartition Each cell has a copy of the Partition Configuration Data entry for the nPartition to which it is assigned Partition Configuration Data includes this data for each nPartition e HP 9000 server components unused on HP Integrity servers These components apply only on HP 9000 servers but are present on HP Integrity servers for compatibility Primary Boot Path HA Alternate Boot Path Alternate Boot Path Console Path Keyboard Path Boot Timer Known Good Memory Requirement Autostart and Restart Flags and CPU Flags e g Data Prefetch setting e Cell use on next boot values Specifies whether the cell is to be an active or inactive member of the nPartition to which it is assigned e Core Cell Choices Up to fo
424. the Reboot for Reconfig and Shutdown for Reconfig details in this table See Shutting Down Microsoft Windows page 128 Booting Red Hat Enterprise Linux e NOTE Only supported on HP Integrity servers e EFI Boot Manager select an item from the boot options list e EFI Shell access the EFI System Partition for example s0 for a root device and enter ELILO to invoke the loader See Booting Red Hat Enterprise Linux page 131 Booting SuSE Linux Enterprise Server e NOTE Only supported on HP Integrity servers e EFI Boot Manager select an item from the boot options list e EFI Shell access the EFI System Partition for example s0 for a root device and enter ELILO to invoke the loader See Booting SuSE Linux Enterprise Server page 132 Shutting Down Linux e NOTE Only supported on HP Integrity servers e Issue the sbin shutdown command with the desired options such as r to shut down and reboot automatically or h to shut down and halt the system You must include the required time argument to specify when the operating system shutdown is to occur See Shutting Down Linux page 134 Task Summaries for nPartition Boot and Reset 97 98 Table 5 1 nPartition Boot and Reset Task Summaries continued Task Rebooting and Resetting nPartitions Summary e Service Processor MP or GSP RS command under normal operation you fir
425. the customer LAN port by using telnet if login access through the customer LAN is enabled for the service processor On HP Superdome servers the customer LAN hardware is labeled Customer LAN On HP rp8400 servers it is GSP LAN On HP rp7405 rp7410 servers it is the only LAN port on the core I O Use telnet to open a connection with the service processor then login by entering the account name and corresponding password e Connecting through the local RS 232 port using a direct serial cable connection On HP Superdome server hardware the local RS 232 port is labeled Local RS 232 On HP rp8400 servers it is the Local Console port On HP rp7405 rp7410 servers it is the 9 pin D shaped connector DB9 labeled Console e Connecting through the remote RS 232 port using external modem dial up access if remote modem access is configured On HP Superdome server hardware the remote RS 232 port is labeled Remote RS 232 On HP rp8400 servers it is the Remote Console port On HP rp7405 rp7410 servers it is the DB9 connector labeled Remote Using Management Interfaces and Tools Example 4 1 Overview of a Service Processor Login Session The following output shows a sample login session for a server whose service processor hostname is hpsys s gt telnet hpsys s Trying Connected to hpsys s rsn hp com Escape character is Local flow control off MP login Username MP password Welcome to the S Class 1
426. the nPartition into a shutdown for reconfig state HP UX shutdown R H Windows shutdown s Linux shutdown h time OpenVMS SYS SYSTEM SHUTDOWN with no automatic system reboot then MP Command menu RR command 178 Creating and Configuring nPartitions From the EFI Shell for the nPartition use reconfigreset to put the nPartition into a shutdown for reconfig state From the BCH menu for the nPartition use RECONFIGRESET to put the nPartition into a shutdown for reconfig state From the service processor Command Menu for the server complex where the nPartition resides use the Command menu RR command to put the nPartition into a shutdown for reconfig state After you complete the nPartition removal the nPartition no longer exists All cells and associated I O chassis that used to be assigned to the deleted nPartition now are unassigned and can be assigned for other uses Procedure 6 5 Deleting an nPartition Partition Manager You can delete an nPartition by using Partition Manager When using Partition Manager Version 1 0 select an nPartition then select the Partition Delete Partition action When using Partition Manager Version 2 0 select an nPartition then select the nPartition Delete nPartition action 1 Access Partition Manager For details on accessing Partition Manager or other tools see Tools for Configuring nPartitions page 165 2 In Partition Manager select the nPartition you want
427. the reconfigreset command at the EFI Shell to put the nPartition in the shutdown for reconfig state then use the BO command at the service processor Command Menu to boot the nPartition If you have changed any cell from of n do not use on next boot to on y use the cell on next boot then you must perform these two tasks this resets and reconfigures the nPartition and boots it 4 Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the EFI environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 7 10 Configuring and Deconfiguring Cells nPartition Commands From the command line use the parmodify p m command to configure or deconfigure a cell by setting its use on next boot attribute value You also can use the parstatus V c command to list attribute details for a specific cell c where is the cell number NOTE You can remotely perform this task using remote administration options supported by the Enhanced nPartition Commands or Partition Manager Version 2 0 Remote administration is supported by the Partition Manager Tools Switch Complexes action and by the nPartition command u h optionsor g h options For details see Tools for Managing Hardware page 201 1 Login to a system with the nPartition commands installed If using remot
428. the service processor MP or GSP Main menu Common nPartition Boot Commands and Tasks The following summary briefly describes the main nPartition boot commands and tasks For more summaries and details see Table 5 1 page 96 e Service processor MP or GSP support for managing nPartition booting includes the following commands which are available from the service processor Command menu RS Reset an nPartition On HP Integrity servers you should reset an nPartition only after all self tests and partition rendezvous have completed RR Reset and perform a shutdown for reconfig of an nPartition On HP Integrity servers you should reset an nPartition only after all self tests and partition rendezvous have completed BO Boot the cells assigned to an nPartition past the waiting at BIB state and thus begin the nPartition boot phase Overview of Managing nPartitions 33 34 TC Perform a transfer of control reset of an nPartition PE Power on or power off a cabinet cell or I O chassis On HP Integrity rx8620 servers rx8640 servers rx7620 servers and rx7640 servers nPartition power on and power off also is supported to manage power of all cells and T O chassis assigned to the nPartition using a single command e EFI Shell support for managing nPartition booting includes the following commands EFI is available only on HP Integrity servers bcfg List and configure the boot options
429. the shutdown command to shut down gracefully 1 Login to Windows running on the nPartition that you want to shut down For example access the nPartition console and use the Windows SAC interface to start a command prompt from which you can issue Windows commands to shut down the nPartition 2 Issuethe shutdown rcommand to shut down the Windows Server 2003 operating system on the nPartition and reboot You also can perform this task by selecting the Start gt Shut Down action and choosing Restart from the pull down menu For example shutdown r t 60 c Reboot for reconfig This command initiates a Windows system shutdown and reboot after a timeout period of 60 seconds The c option specifies a message that is broadcast to any other users of the system For more details use the help shutdown command Procedure 5 37 Reboot for Reconfig from Linux shutdown r time command To perform a reboot for reconfig of an nPartition from Linux issue the shutdown r time command where time is the time when the system will be shut down and rebooted 140 Booting and Resetting nPartitions 1 Login to Linux running on the nPartition you want to shut down 2 Issue issue the shutdown r time command with the required time argument to specify when the shutdown is to occur You can specify time in the format hh mm in which hh is the hour one or two digits and mm is the minute of the hour two digits or in the format m in which m is th
430. tion Commands parremove p command removes the specified nPartition p where is the nPartition number When removing an active nPartition you must specify the F option e Partition Manager Version 1 0 Select an nPartition then select the Partition gt Delete Partition action Version 2 0 Select an nPartition then select the nPartition Delete nPartition action See Removing Deleting an nPartition page 176 Assigning Adding Cells to an nPartition NOTE When a cell is assigned to an inactive nPartition the assignment completes immediately To complete new cell assignments to an active nPartition you must perform a reboot for reconfig HP UX shutdown R Windows shutdown r Linux shutdown r time OpenVMS SYS SYSTEM SHUTDOWN with an automatic system reboot e nPartition Commands parmodify p a command which adds a cell a where is the cell number to the specified nPartition p where is the nPartition number e Partition Manager Version 1 0 Select an nPartition and use the Partition Modify Partition action Add Remove Cells tab Version 2 0 Select an nPartition and use the nPartition Modify nPartition action Add Remove Cells tab See Assigning Adding Cells to an nPartition page 179 166 Creating and Configuring nPartitions Table 6 1 nPartition Configuration Task Summaries continued Task Unassi
431. tion details about the nPartition you plan to remove Use the parstatus V p command to display all current configuration information related to the nPartition you plan to remove Save this information as you can use it to manually recreate the nPartition if necessary at a later time Removing Deleting an nPartition 177 3 Remove the nPartition Use one of the following procedures to remove the nPartition Removing an Inactive Remote nPartition Removing a Local nPartition or Removing an Active Remote nPartition e Removing an Inactive Remote nPartition 1 Issue the parremove p command to remove the inactive remote nPartition p where is the nPartition number For example parremove pl 2 Issuethe parstatus P command to confirm that the nPartition was removed If the nPartition was removed it no longer is listed in the parstatus command output e Removing a Local nPartition To remove the local nPartition the nPartition on which you currently are issuing commands perform the following steps 1 Shut down all applications and warn users Follow the same procedures you would use if you were to reboot the nPartition 2 Issuethe parremove F p command to force remove F the local nPartition p where is the number of the local nPartition Note that the local nPartition remains active following the parremove F p command until you perform a shutdown for reconfig to complete the removal As so
432. tion specifies either the hostname or IP address of the remote nPartition When you use the u h set of options the specified command sends the appropriate WBEM requests to the remote nPartition where the requests are handled by the nPartition Provider using dev ipmi to communicate with the service processor in the target complex Partition Manager Support for Remote Management Using WBEM Partition Manager Version 2 0 supports remote management using WBEM in either of two ways e Run Partition Manager Version 2 0 on an nPartition and then select the Switch Complexes task from the Tools menu In the resulting dialog enter the hostname or IP address of the remote nPartition and supply a username and that user s password If you will use Partition Manager only to display information about the target complex then you can specify any user defined on the remote nPartition However if you will use Partition Manager to make changes to the target complex then you must specify a user with superuser privileges on the remote nPartition e Run Partition Manager Version 2 0 on a system that is not an nPartition and Partition Manager will immediately display the Switch Complexes dialog Remote and Local Management of nPartitions 45 Figure 1 1 Partition Manager Version 2 0 Switch Complexes Dialog Parmer Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Hewlett Packard DER Fie Edt View Favorites Tools Help a y gt a a OQ x A GD Preach
433. tition SYSSSYSTEM SHUTDOWN COM Shuts down the OpenVMS 164 operating system The SYS SYSTEM SHUTDOWN COM command provides a series of prompts that you use to establish the shutdown behavior including the shutdown time and whether the system is rebooted after it is shut down To perform a reboot for reconfig from OpenVMS 164 running on an nPartition issue SYSSSYSTEM SHUTDOWN COM from OpenVMS and then enter Yes at the Should an automatic system reboot be performed prompt To perform a shutdown for reconfig of an nPartition running OpenVMS 164 first issue SYSSSYSTEM SHUTDOWN COM from OpenVMS and enter No at the Should an automatic system reboot be performed prompt then access the MP and from the MP Command Menu issue the RR command and specify the nPartition that is to be shutdown for reconfig RUN SYSS SYSTEM OPCRASH Causes OpenVMS to dump system memory and then halt at the POO gt gt prompt To reset the nPartition following OPCRASH access the nPartition console and press any key to reboot Overview of Managing nPartitions 35 e Microsoft Windows includes the following commands for shutting down and rebooting the nPartition shutdown r Shuts down Windows and performs a reboot for reconfig of the nPartition All cells are reset and nPartition reconfiguration occurs as needed The nPartition then proceeds with the nPartition boot phase shutdown s Shuts down Windows and performs a shut
434. tition e The g h options may be specified to cause the command to send its management request using IPMI over LAN to a service processor in another server complex but can also be used as a loopback access to the service processor in the local complex The u and g options are mutually exclusive Options s Indicate through parstatus exit status whether the system is an HP server that supports nPartitions Not supported with the g h options W Display the nPartition number for the local nPartition Not supported with the g h options X Display the server complex attributes A Only display the available resources in the complex V Increase the amount of information displayed For Enhanced nPartition Commands this option includes interleaved and cell local memory settings when cell c cell or nPartition p partition details are displayed M Produce output suitable for machine parsing Show information for all the cells in the complex I Show information for all I O chassis in the complex B Show information for all cabinets in the complex P Show information for all nPartitions in the complex c cell Show information about the specified cell i IOchassis b cabinet 258 nPartition Commands Show information about the specified I O chassis Show information about the specified cabinet E partition username IPaddress hostname Show information about the specifi
435. tition Manager by selecting the Complex Set Complex Name action 1 Access Partition Manager For details on accessing Partition Manager or other tools see Tools for Configuring nPartitions page 165 188 Creating and Configuring nPartitions 2 Select the Complex gt Set Complex Name action Enter the new name for the complex in the text box provided which shows the current complex name If no name was previously assigned the default name is MyComplex 3 Exit Partition Manager From Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the File Exit action From Partition Manager Version 2 0 select Log off parmgr or exit the Web browser when finished Setting Cell Attributes A You can set the attributes for a cell by using any one of the following procedures e Setting Cell Attributes BCH Menu page 189 e Setting Cell Attributes EFI Shell page 190 e Setting Cell Attributes nPartition Commands page 191 e Setting Cell Attributes Partition Manager page 193 Each cell assigned to an nPartition has attributes including use on next boot that determine how the cell is used within the nPartition On servers based on the HP sx1000 chipset or HP sx2000 chipset each cell also has a cell local memory attribute that determines the amount of memory on the cell that is not interleaved CAUTION Memory configured as cell local memory only can be used by operating systems that support it Any
436. tive cell from an nPartition you do not need to specify the B option to parmodify and do not need to perform a reboot for reconfig of the nPartition to which the cell is assigned When you use parmodi fy to remove an inactive cell the cell is immediately unassigned from its nPartition If you specify the B option when removing an inactive cell from an inactive nPartition then the cell is immediately removed and the modified nPartition is booted past its inactive shutdown for reconfig state and becomes an active nPartition For example the following command removes cell 2 from partition 0 Because cell 2 is inactive it is immediately unassigned parmodify p0 d2 Command succeeded 4 Asneeded perform a reboot for reconfig of the nPartition being modified HP UX shutdown R Windows shutdown r Linux shutdown r time OpenVMS SYSS SSYSTEM SHUTDOWN with an automatic system reboot You must perform a reboot for reconfig if you have removed an active cell or have specified the B option when modifying an active nPartition See Reboot for Reconfig Guidelines for Removing Cells page 182 for details on when to perform a reboot for reconfig This reboot for reconfig enables the cell removal to complete and the Complex Profile to be unlocked If you have removed an active cell and you did not specify the B option to parmodify then the nPartition will remain inactive in the shutdown for reconfig state after you perform th
437. tive either are not assigned to an nPartition or they have not participated in partition rendezvous to form an nPartition with any other cells assigned to the nPartition Partition rendezvous is the point during the nPartition boot process when all available cells in an nPartition join together to establish which cells are active for the current boot of the nPartition For example a cell is inactive when it is powered off has booted with a n use on next boot value or is assigned to an nPartition that has been reset to the shutdown for reconfig state The resources belonging to inactive cells are not actively used by an nPartition For a cell and its resources to be actively used the cell must boot and participate in partition rendezvous Cell Local Memory A On cell based servers that are based on the HP sx1000 or sx2000 chipset a portion of the memory in each cell can be configured as cell local memory CLM which is non interleaved memory that can be quickly accessed by processors residing on the same cell as the memory CAUTION Memory configured as cell local memory only can be used by operating systems that support it Any memory configured as cell local memory is unusable when an nPartition runs an operating system that does not support it The nPartition management tools enable you to configure CLM for each cell either as a percentage of the total memory in the cell or as an absolute number of gigabytes of memory Fo
438. to HP 9000 servers PA RISC model e Complex System Name User chosen name for the complex e Original Product Number Set by HP manufacturing e Current Product Number Originally set by HP manufacturing e Creator Serial Number Set by HP manufacturing e Cell Assignments User configurable nPartition assignments for all cells in the complex also specifies each cell type e g base e Cell Local Memory CLM Per Cell Only on servers based on the HP sx1000 or sx2000 chipset User configurable setting for each cell that determines the amount of cell local memory The operating system on an nPartition with CLM configured must also support CLM for the cell local memory to be accessible to the operating system e nPartition Configuration Privilege Only on servers based on the HP sx1000 or sx2000 chipset Either unrestricted or restricted A restricted privilege means complex changes are possible only through the service processor LAN interface which prompts for the IPMI password Dynamic Complex Configuration Data Architecturally reserved information The Dynamic Complex Configuration Data is architecturally reserved information that applies to the entire server complex A copy of the Dynamic Complex Configuration Data resides on the service processor MP or GSP and on every cell in the complex A reboot is not required for Dynamic Complex Configuration Data changes to take effect The system boot interfaces
439. to remove If using Partition Manager Version 1 0 you must select either the local nPartition or a inactive remote nPartition where all hardware assigned to the nPartition must be listed as having an Actual Usage of inactive If using Partition Manager Version 2 0 you also can remove an active remote nPartition either when managing the complex where nPartition resides or when managing the remote nPartition Both remote management features involve using the Tools gt Switch Complexes action 3 Select the Partition Manager action to request that the nPartition be removed deleted From Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the Partition Delete Partition action From Partition Manager Version 2 0 select the nPartition Delete nPartition action 4 Proceed with the nPartition deletion by clicking the OK button when Partition Manager requests confirmation for deleting the nPartition 5 If removing an active nPartition perform a shutdown for reconfig of the nPartition You do not need to perform a shutdown for reconfig if removing an inactive nPartition Login to the nPartition being removed and issue the HP UX shutdown R H command or Windows shutdown s command to perform the shutdown for reconfig Following the shutdown the nPartition no longer exists its configuration information is deleted 6 Exit Partition Manager From Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the File Exit action From Partition Manager Version 2 0 s
440. to remove a remote nPartition check to see whether the remote nPartition is inactive e If using Original nPartition Commands to remove a remote nPartition the remote nPartition must be inactive To make a remote nPartition inactive put the nPartition into a shutdown for reconfig state by performing any of the following tasks Login to HP UX running on the remote nPartition and issue the shutdown R H command Login to Windows running on the remote nPartition and issue the shutdown s command Login to Linux running on the remote nPartition and issue the shutdown h time command Login to OpenVMS running on the remote nPartition first issue SYSS SYSTEM SHUTDOWN from OpenVMS and enter No at the Should an automatic system reboot be performed prompt then access the MP and from the MP Command Menu issue the RR command and specify the nPartition that is to be shutdown for reconfig Access the console for the remote nPartition and use the RECONF IGRESET command at the BCH Menu on HP 9000 systems or the reconfigreset command at the EFI Shell on HP Integrity systems Usethe RR command at the service processor Command Menu to reset the nPartition to a shutdown for reconfig state e Toremove an active remote nPartition you must use the Enhanced nPartition Commands remote administration options and the remote nPartition must be in a complex based on the HP sx1000 chipset or HP sx2000 chipset Save all current configura
441. to set the use on next boot value and Configure Memory tab to set the cell local memory value On an HP 9000 server you also can use the BCH Configuration menu CELLCONFIG command to set use on next boot values On an HP Integrity server you also can use the EFI Shell cellconfig command to set use on next boot values Also see Setting Cell Attributes page 189 Overview of Managing nPartitions 31 Setting Core Cell Choices To set core cell choices for an nPartition use the parmodify p r r command to specify up to four core cell choices in priority order for a specified nPartition p where is the partition number From Partition Manager Version 1 0 select the nPartition use the nPartition Modify nPartition action Core Cell Choices tab From Partition Manager Version 2 0 select the nPartition use the nPartition Modify nPartition action Set Cell Options tab and use the Core Cell Choice column to set priorities On an HP 9000 server you can use the BCH Configuration menu COC command to set core cell choices On an HP Integrity server you can use the EFI Shell root cell command to set core cell choices Also see Setting nPartition Core Cell Choices page 194 Setting nPartition Boot Paths On HP Integrity servers boot paths can be listed and configured only from the local nPartition From HP UX use the set boot command to configure the local nPartition boot paths or use the parmodify p b s t
442. to the service processor Main menu See Command Reference for Service Processor Commands page 80 for details Service processor commands are restricted based on the three levels of access Administrator Operator and Single Partition User See Service Processor Accounts and Access Levels page 69 for details e Consoles Each nPartition in a server complex has its own console Enter CO at the service processor Main menu to access the nPartition consoles To exit the console type b Control b See nPartition Console Features page 70 for details Console output for each nPartition is reflected to all users currently accessing the nPartition console One console user can have interactive access to each nPartition console and all other users of the console have read only access To gain write access for a console type e cf Control e c f Using Management Interfaces and Tools Each nPartition console provides access to The nPartition system boot environment either BCH or EFI The BCH or EFI system boot environment is available when the nPartition is active but has not yet loaded or booted an operating system The Boot Console Handler BCH environment is provided on HP 9000 servers only PA RISC servers gt The Extensible Firmware Interface EFI is provided on HP Integrity servers only Intel Itanium based servers HP UX console for the nPartition The nPartition console prov
443. trd initrd 2 4 18 e 12 img done Specify additional boot options when loading a Linux boot configuration 1 Access the ELILO boot prompt 2 Type the Tab key to list all boot configuration entries in the elilo conf file 3 Enter the name of the boot entry you want to load followed by any additional boot options to apply See bootparam 7 or other Linux manpages for details on kernel boot options ELILO boot linux S Uncompressing Linux done Loading initrd initrd 2 4 18 e 12smp img done Load a kernel by explicitly specifying the kernel path and any boot options to be used 1 Access the ELILO boot prompt 2 Type question mark to list all boot devices 3 Enter the full path to the Linux kernel you wish to load and specify any kernel boot options to apply ELILO boot scsi0 efi redhat vmlinuz 2 4 18 e 12 root dev sda2 console ttyS0 Uncompressing Linux done Linux version 2 4 18 e 12 bhcompile rocky devel redhat com gcc version 2 96 2 0000731 Red Hat Linux 7 2 2 96 112 7 2 1 Thu Oct 17 15 22 28 EDT 2002 Configuring Boot Paths and Options You can configure boot paths and boot options by using any one of the following procedures Configuring Boot Paths and Options BCH Menu page 155 Configuring Boot Paths and Options EFI Boot Manager page 156 Configuring Boot Paths and Options EFI Shell page 157 Configuring Boot Paths and Options HP UX page 157 Adding an HP UX Boot
444. ts the selected Performing a Transfer of Control Reset 107 partition Name 0 julesoo 1 julesol Select a partition number 0 Do you want to TOC partition number 0 Y N y gt The selected partition will be TOCed GSP CM gt 3 After you initiate the TOC you can observe its progress and select the type of crash dump through the nPartition console Once the nPartition completes the dump or once you cancel it the nPartition reboots kkkkkK Unexpected TOC Processor HPA FFFFFFFF FCO7C0O00 GENERAL REGISTERS r00 03 00000000 00000000 00000000 0099CA2C 00000000 00000000 00000000 010BB790 r04 07 00000000 00000002 00000000 010BC140 00000000 0080F000 00000000 00AA2490 r08 11 00000000 00000001 00000000 0099A800 00000000 0099A800 00000000 0099C800 0 0 0 12675c 0 10340004 0 2 8bfd30 Processor 8 TOC pcsq pcoq isr ior Boot device reset done The dump will be a SELECTIVE dump 457 of 4080 megabytes To change this dump type press any key within 10 seconds Proceeding with selective dump The dump may be aborted at any time by pressing ESC Dumping 7 complete 32 of 457 MB device 64 0x2 Booting and Shutting Down HP UX This section has procedures for booting and shutting down HP UX on cell based HP servers and a procedure for adding HP UX to the boot options list on HP Integrity servers e To check whether the cell local memory CLM configuration is appropriate for HP UX refer to
445. ttah 226 Listing Processor Cordis Ural ONS iy 4acc sete axsivn valictahucvses ret cia sagan laicts lst ramen EIN TEA E EEEa eek 227 Listing Memory Contig utaHon secs 25 ye ienas eiS a AEE ENA ENa E EEA Se EEES en iua 229 Listing Input Output I O Configurations ssesesesssssesssseseesssesressestesessestessssestentsressessestesensenrenene 231 Listing Cabinets ima Server Comi pleXsoriiissisi test nease costes EEEE T N EES REEE 234 Listing Product and Serial Numbers i ssdscsscosetsss iraire irei danien istai i ensi tenesa 235 Listing NPartiton Config raHonS iiio cernas iris iar an euS E AA EAE ENA EENE EESE 236 Listing the Local nPartition Number s sssessessessserssssessserssrsrssserssrsnsssernsessresrenseenresersrenresrerseessesees 237 Listing Power Status and Power SUpplieSsesiisnesienioicireisainsiii ieii riiai isai 238 Listing Fan and Blower Statuses nrscisscsniriiiain iaioe iiin irti TE EE EE a E ai oent 240 A nPartition COmMOaNGS 5c recital vee Dodane 243 Specifying Cells and I O Chassis to Command Siete se cestiateklssierotadareealoayeietitan een ceed neeelaeee Gears 243 Cell Specification FORMS seier osaeran e iat vey uty daveb valde i bee Deng od i aaa 243 I O SPECI CATON Formatssuresn iranse eire ii aeia EEEE EEEE ri AE AAEE A AET 244 Specifying Remote Management Options to Command S esssssssessseissessssseersessreseerseesresresseessesees 247 PACTS Command sie tenait a E tos E Ea N a sates tah butts ee e a aa e
446. tting Down Microsoft Windows This section has procedures for booting and shutting down Microsoft Windows on cell based HP Integrity servers and a procedure for adding Windows to the boot options list e To check whether the cell local memory CLM configuration is appropriate for Windows refer to Microsoft Windows Support for Cell Local Memory page 124 e To adda Windows entry to the boot options list refer to Adding Microsoft Windows to the Boot Options List page 125 e To boot Windows refer to Booting Microsoft Windows page 126 e To shut down Windows refer to Shutting Down Microsoft Windows page 128 Microsoft Windows Support for Cell Local Memory On servers based on the HP sx1000 chipset or HP sx2000 chipset each cell has a cell local memory CLM parameter which determines how firmware interleaves memory residing on the cell 124 Booting and Resetting nPartitions A NOTE Microsoft Windows supports using CLM on cell based HP Integrity servers For best performance in an nPartition running Windows HP recommends that you configure the CLM parameter to 100 for each cell in the nPartition To check CLM configuration details from an OS use Partition Manager or the parstatus command For example the parstatus V c command and parstatus V p command report the CLM amount requested and CLM amount allocated for the specified cell c where is the cell number or the specified nPartition p wh
447. u page 232 e Listing Input Output Configurations EFI Shell page 232 e Listing Input Output I O Configurations nPartition Commands page 233 e Listing Input Output I O Configurations Partition Manager page 233 nPartition input output I O configuration details include the I O chassis population cell to chassis connections PCI card slot capabilities and PCI card details Procedure 8 14 Listing Input Output I O Configurations Service Processor From the service processor Command Menu use the 10 command to list connections from cells to I O chassis or use the PS command and the cabinet option to list I O chassis population and power status for an entire cabinet 1 Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CM to access the Command Menu Listing Input Output I O Configurations 231 2 At the Command Menu enter the IO command to list the connections from I O chassis to cells the IO command is supported for HP Superdome servers only To list the power status for I O chassis and the locations of installed I O chassis issue the PS command and select the cabinet option for the server cabinet whose I O configuration you want to view e On HP Superdome servers select the B cabinet option and specify the cabinet whose information you want to view e Onall other systems select the T cabinet option 3 To exit the service processor Command Menu enter MA to return to the service p
448. u To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 8 12 Listing Memory Configurations nPartition Commands From the command line issue the parstatus C command for memory summaries for all cells useparstatus V c for detailed memory information for the specified cell c where is the cell number or use parstatus V p for detailed memory information for the specified nPartition p where is the nPartition number 1 Login to a system with the nPartition commands installed If using remote administration features to list memory configurations you can login to any system with Enhanced nPartition Commands installed 230 Listing nPartition and Hardware Status 2 Issue the command to list memory details e parstatus C Cell and memory summaries for all cells in the server complex e parstatus V c Detailed memory information for the specified cell c where is the cell number including memory module DIMM locations and sizes For HP Integrity servers this includes details about the interleaved memory in the cell as well as the requested and allocated cell local memory CLM amounts e parstatus V p Detailed information about the specified nPartition p where is the nPartition number including summaries for all assigned cells including their amounts of memory For HP Integrity servers the nPartition details include the total good memory size total interleaved memory and the total requested an
449. uilt in BW Windows OS boot option D isplay M odify C opy E x port I mport E rase P ush H elp Q uit Select gt 5 Use the Import command to import the Windows boot option file Select gt i Enter IMPORT file path EFI Microsoft WINNT50 Boot0001 Imported Boot Options from file EFI Microsoft WINNT50 Boot0001 Press enter to continue 6 Type Q to quit the NVRBOOT utility and exit the console and management processor interfaces if you are finished using them To exit the EFI environment press B Control B this exits the system console and returns to the management processor Main Menu To exit the management processor type X at the Main Menu Booting Microsoft Windows You can boot the Windows Server 2003 OS on an HP Integrity server by using the EFI Boot Manager to choose the appropriate Windows item from the boot options list 126 Booting and Resetting nPartitions A Refer to Shutting Down Microsoft Windows page 128 for details on shutting down the Windows OS CAUTION ACPI Configuration for Windows Must Be windows On cell based HP Integrity servers to boot the Windows OS an nPartition must have its ACPI configuration value set to windows At the EFI Shell enter the acpiconfig command with no arguments to list the current ACPI configuration If the acpiconfig value is not set to windows then Windows cannot boot in this situation you must reconfigure acpiconfig or booting will be interrupte
450. upply details for the specified cabinet 1 Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CM to access the Command Menu 238 Listing nPartition and Hardware Status At the Command Menu enter the PS command and select the cabinet option for the cabinet whose power status and related details you want to view e On HP Superdome servers select the B cabinet option and specify the cabinet whose information you want to view e Onall other systems select the T cabinet option To exit the service processor Command Menu enter MA to return to the service processor Main Menu At the Main Menu enter X to exit the service processor interface Procedure 8 33 Listing Power Status and Power Supplies nPartition Commands From the command line issue the parstatus B command for a power status summary for all cabinets or parstatus V b for detailed power status for the specified cabinet b where is the cabinet number You also can issue the frupower d C command for cell power status or the frupower d I command for I O chassis power status 1 Login to a system with the nPartition commands installed If using remote administration features to list power status you can login to any system with Enhanced nPartition Commands installed Issue commands to list details about system power status e parstatus B Power status summary for all cabinets e parstatus V b Detailed power status for the specified cabinet
451. ur cells preferred to be the core cell e Partition Number The partition number not user configurable e Profile Architecture Specifies whether the current Partition Configuration Data applies to the HP 9000 server architecture or HP Integrity server architecture not user configurable e nPartition Name The nPartition name used in various displays e Cell Failure Usage Specifies how each cell in the nPartition is handled when a processor or memory component fails self tests Only activating the cell to integrate it into the nPartition is supported the ri failure usage option as specified by the parcreate and parmodify commands e IP Address If set should be consistent with the IP address assigned to the nPartition when HP UX is booted Not actually used for network configuration but for information only Remote and Local Management of nPartitions You can remotely manage cell based servers using either the Enhanced nPartition Commands or Partition Manager Version 2 0 The Enhanced nPartition Commands and Partition Manager Version 2 0 also can run on an nPartition and manage that nPartition and the complex to which it belongs The ability to remotely manage a server based on the HP sx1000 chipset or HP sx2000 chipset is enabled by two technologies the Web Based Enterprise Management infrastructure WBEM and the Intelligent Platform Management Interface IPMI A brief overview of these technologies is pr
452. utually exclusive 0 Start blinking the specified attention LED s The o option is unavailable with C or I B Start or stop blinking the cabinet number LCD of the cabinet that contains the cell or I O chassis The B option is only available with c and i c cell Blink or turn off the specified cell attention LED cell can be specified either in the local cabinet slot or global cell_ID format i IOchassis Blink or turn off the specified IOchassis attention LED b cabinet Start or stop blinking the cabinet number LCD of the specified cabinet C Turn off all cell attention LEDs 1 cabinet Limit the scope of the C or I option to a given cabinet u username Enhanced nPartition Commands only Specifies the account and authorization to access an nPartition other than the local nPartition The h option is required if this option is used username specifies a configured user name on the target nPartition g Enhanced nPartition Commands only Allows access to the complex specified by the h option The accessed complex is then considered the target complex Access is through the service processor LAN port The h option is required if this option is used 262 nPartition Commands Enhanced nPartition Commands only This option is only used in combination with either the u or g option IPaddress hostname specifies the IP address or hostname of the target nPartition u or service processor g h I Paddress h
453. ve the Enhanced nPartition Commands installed and have WBEM configured Also the client pem file on the system from which the command is issued must have a copy of the SSL certificate entry including the BEGIN and END lines from specified host s server pem file See Remote Management Using WBEM page 44 for details e The g h options may be specified to cause the command to send its management request using IPMI over LAN to a service processor in another server complex but can also be used as a loopback access to the service processor in the local complex EY NOTE When specifying the g h options the host specified by h must have IPMI LAN access enabled Also the user who issues the command must correctly specify the host s IPMI password in order for the command to be able to successfully complete See Remote Management Using IPMI over LAN page 46 for details The u and g options are mutually exclusive For more details about remote management see Remote and Local Management of nPartitions page 41 248 nPartition Commands parcreate Command The parcreate command creates a new nPartition This command assigns the specified cells and any attached I O chassis to an nPartition assigns anumber to the new nPartition and returns the partition number of the newly created nPartition Root permission or IPMI LAN access is required to use parcreate NOTE A On se
454. vely you can use the SYSS MANAGER BOOT_OPTIONS COM command also referred to as the OpenVMS 164 Boot Manager utility to manage boot options for your system disk The OpenVMS 164 Boot Manager BOOT_OPTIONS COM utility isa menu based utility and is easier to use than EFI To configure OpenVMS 164 booting on Fibre Channel devices you must use the OpenVMS 164 Boot Manager utility BOOT_OPTIONS COM For more information on this utility and other restrictions refer to the HP OpenVMS for Integrity Servers Upgrade and Installation Manual For details refer to the following sections Toset HP UX boot options refer to Adding HP UX to the Boot Options List page 109 To set OpenVMS boot options refer to Adding HP OpenVMS to the Boot Options List page 120 To set Windows boot options refer to Adding Microsoft Windows to the Boot Options List page 125 To set Linux boot options refer to Adding Linux to the Boot Options List page 130 Autoboot Setting You can configure the autoboot setting for each nPartition either by using the autoboot command at the EFI Shell or by using the Set Auto Boot TimeOut menu item at the EFI Boot Option Maintenance menu To set autoboot from HP UX use the setboot command ACPI Configuration Value HP Integrity Server OS Boot On cell based HP Integrity servers you must set the proper ACPI configuration for the OS that will be booted on the nPartition To check t
455. vice By default the AUTO file is configured to load stand vmunix Booting and Shutting Down HP UX 111 Main Menu Enter command or menu gt BOOT PRI Primary Boot Path 0 0 1 0 0 15 Do you wish to stop at the ISL prompt prior to booting y n gt gt n ISL booting hpux Boot Gdisk 0 0 1 0 0 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 stand vmunix To boot an HP UX kernel other than stand vmunix or to boot HP UX in single user or LVM maintenance mode stop at the ISL prompt and specify the appropriate arguments to the hpux loader 4 Exit the console and management processor interfaces if you are finished using them To exit the BCH environment press B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the management processor Main Menu To exit the management processor type X at the Main Menu Procedure 5 8 HP UX Booting EFI Boot Manager From the EFI Boot Manager menu choose an item from the boot options list to boot HP UX using that boot option The EFI Boot Manager is available only on HP Integrity servers Refer to ACPI Configuration for HP UX Must Be default page 110 for required configuration details 1 Access the EFI Boot Manager menu for the nPartition on which you want to boot HP UX Log in to the management processor MP and enter CO to access the Console list Choose the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If you are at another E
456. vous in the nPartition e Perform a reboot for reconfig HP UX shutdown R Windows shutdown r Linux shutdown r time OpenVMS SYSSSYSTEM SHUTDOWN with an automatic system reboot If you have changed any use on next boot values from n do not use on next boot to y use the cell on next boot then you must perform a reboot for reconfig to allow the currently inactive cells to reboot and rendezvous when the nPartition reboots Configuring and Deconfiguring Processors A You can configure and deconfigure processors by using any one of the following procedures e Configuring and Deconfiguring Processors BCH Menu page 217 e Configuring and Deconfiguring Processors EFI Shell page 218 You can configure and deconfigure processors from any cell that is assigned to an nPartition Deconfiguring a processor causes it to not be available for use by the cell or its nPartition Whenever you configure or deconfigure processors you must reboot the corresponding nPartition for the configuration change to take effect NOTE Configuring and deconfiguring processors may be restricted based on any Instant Capacity contract for the server complex Procedure 7 12 Configuring and Deconfiguring Processors BCH Menu From the BCH Configuration Menu use the CPUCONFIG command to configure or deconfigure processors in the local nPartition The BCH Menu is available only on HP 9000 systems 1 Access the BCH Main Menu for th
457. ware requirements and performance guidelines 3 Modify the nPartition by issuing the parmodify p a command to add the cell a where is the cell number to the specified nPartition p where is the nPartition number The a option differs slightly for the nPartition command releases To add multiple cells you can specify the a option multiple times in the same command parmodify Command a Option Differences for nPartition Command Releases The parmodify command s a option specifies a cell number and attributes which are used when adding the cell to an existing nPartition For the Enhanced nPartition Commands an additional cell local memory attribute is optional Both syntaxes are given in the following list e For the Original nPartition Commands the parmodify command s a option is as follows a cell type use fail where 180 Creating and Configuring nPartitions cell The cell to be added to the nPartition You can specify the cell in global cell format or in hardware location cabinet slot format type The cell type base is the only supported cell type and it is the default use The cell use on next boot value y or n Use y the default if the cell is to be an active member of the nPartition or use n if the cell is to remain an inactive member fail The cell failure usage ri reactivate with interleave is the only supported failure usage policy and it is the default For de
458. ware resources in nPartitions and their server complexes It describes power and LED attention indicator management hardware configuration and deconfiguration and analysis of the current status of the server complex Listing nPartition and Hardware Status page 223 This chapter describes procedures for listing the current status of nPartitions and server hardware components nPartition Commands page 243 This appendix contains details and command line syntax for the HP nPartition configuration commands New and Changed Information in This Edition 11 Typographic Conventions 12 This document uses the following typographical conventions audit 5 Command Computer output Ctrl x ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE ERROR NAME Key User input Variable WARNING CAUTION IMPORTANT NOTE A manpage The manpage name is audit and it is located in Section 5 A command name or qualified command phrase Text displayed by the computer A key sequence A sequence such as Ctrl x indicates that you must hold down the key labeled Ctrl while you press another key or mouse button The name of an environment variable for example PATH The name of an error usually returned in the errno variable The name of a keyboard key Return and Enter both refer to the same key Commands and other text that you type The name of a placeholder in a command function or other syntax display that you replace with an actual v
459. with the EFI Boot Manager heading From the EFI Boot Manager menu select the EFI Shell menu option to access the EFI Shell environment 2 Access the EFI System Partition sX where X is the file system number for the device from which you want to boot Microsoft Windows For example enter fs2 to access the EFI System Partition for the bootable file system number 2 The EFI Shell prompt changes to reflect the file system currently accessed The full path for the Microsoft Windows loader is e i microsoft winnt50 ia641dr efi and it should be on the device you are accessing However you must only initiate this loader from the EFI Boot Menu and not from the EFI Shell 3 List the contents of the EFI Microsoft WINNT50 directory to identify the name of the Windows boot option file Boot 00nn that you want to import into the system boot options list fs0 gt 1s EFI Microsoft WINNT50 Directory of fs0 EFI Microsoft WINNT50 09 18 03 11 58a lt DIR gt 1 024 09 18 03 11 58a lt DIR gt 1 024 ee 12 18 03 08 16a 354 Bootoool 1 File s 354 bytes Booting and Shutting Down Microsoft Windows 125 2 Dir s fs0 gt 4 At the EFI Shell environment issue the MSUtil nvrboot e i command to launch the Microsoft Windows boot options utility fs0 gt msutil nvrboot NVRBOOT OS Boot Options Maintenance Tool Version 5 2 3683 SUSE SLES 9 HP UX Primary Boot 0 0 1 0 0 2 0 Windows Server 2003 Datacenter EFI Shell B
460. xes based on the HP sx1000 chipset or HP sx2000 chipset See Commands for Configuring nPartitions page 19 for details e Partition Manager opt parmgr bin parmgr Partition Manager provides a graphical interface for managing and monitoring nPartitions and hardware within a server complex See Partition Manager page 22 Tools for Booting nPartitions 95 Task Summaries for nPartition Boot and Reset 96 Table 5 1 describes the main nPartition boot and reset tasks and provides brief summaries and references for detailed procedures You can perform the nPartition boot tasks in Table 5 1 nPartition Boot and Reset Task Summaries using various tools including the service processor MP or GSP Boot Console Handler BCH available only on PA RISC servers Extensible Firmware Interface EFI available only on HP Integrity servers HP UX commands or Partition Manager opt parmgr bin parmgr See Tools for Booting nPartitions page 95 for details Table 5 1 nPartition Boot and Reset Task Summaries Task Troubleshooting Boot Problems Summary This section has tips for resolving common nPartition boot issues See Troubleshooting Boot Problems page 100 Accessing nPartition Console and System Boot Interfaces Use the service processor Console Menu CO to access the BCH or EFI system boot environment for an nPartition See Accessing nPartition Console and System Boo
461. xit action From Partition Manager Version 2 0 select Log off parmgr or exit the Web browser when finished Listing the Local nPartition Number You can list the local nPartition number by using any one of the following procedures e Listing the Local nPartition Number BCH Menu page 237 e Listing the Local nPartition Number EFI Shell page 238 e Listing the Local nPartition Number nPartition Commands page 238 The local nPartition number is the numerical identifier for the nPartition currently being accessed where the command executes Procedure 8 29 Listing the Local nPartition Number BCH Menu From the BCH Configuration Menu use the PD command to list the local nPartition number and its name The BCH Menu is available only on HP 9000 systems 1 Access the BCH Main Menu for the nPartition whose name and number you want to list Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the BCH Main Menu the Main Menu Enter command or menu gt prompt If ata BCH menu other than the Main Menu then enter MA to return to the BCH Main Menu 2 Enter CO to access the BCH Configuration Menu 3 Enter the PD command to list the local nPartition number and its name Listing the Local nPartition Number 237 4 Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the BCH
462. xit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the EFI environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Enabling and Disabling Hyper Threading on Dual Core Intel Itanium 2 Processors nPartitions with dual core Intel Itanium 2 processors support Hyper Threading Hyper Threading provides the ability for processors to create a second logical CPU on a single 218 Managing Hardware Resources A core that can allow additional efficiencies of processing For example a dual core processor with Hyper Threading active provides four logical processors two on each processor core CAUTION Some operating systems do not support Hyper Threading Problems can occur when running an OS that does not support Hyper Threading on an nPartition that has Hyper Threading enabled NOTE You must reset an nPartition when changing its Hyper Threading status Hyper Threading will not be enabled or disabled until after the nPartition is reset Checking the Hyper Threading Status for an nPartition To check the current Hyper Threading status for an nPartition e From the EFI Shell cpuconfig or cpuconfig threads e From HP UX setboot e Using the Enhanced nPartition Commands parstatus T Example 7 2 Checking the Hyper Threading Status for an nPartition setboot Primary bootpath 0 0 1
463. y is stored at least temporarily e Whether the OS is installed booted and properly configured on the nPartition If the OS is not installed on an nPartition you should access the nPartition console through the service processor in order to install and configure the OS You should use the network to login to the OS running on an nPartition when you do not need to use service processor features and do not want to record a log of your activity Before an OS has booted the service processor nPartition consoles are the primary method of interacting with an nPartition After an nPartition has booted the OS you should be able to connect to and login to the nPartition by using telnet or rlogin or ssh to remotely login to HP UX or Linux or by using remote desktop for a remote Windows session Boot Console Handler System Boot Environment Each nPartition in a server complex has its own Boot Console Handler BCH interface The BCH interface is available through an nPartition console interface before an operating system has booted and after the cells have booted and performed nPartition rendezvous to make the nPartition active The nPartition BCH interface enables you to manage and configure the HP UX boot process for an nPartition You also can configure some settings for the local nPartition get some information about the nPartition and its server complex and perform other tasks such as reboot e To access an nPartition console type CO
464. y revisions of major integrated circuits ComplexID Display Complex information FabricInfo Display Fabric information FRU cell CPU MEM Display FRU information FwrVersion cell Display versions for PDC ICM and complex Command Reference for BCH Menu Commands 85 86 Table 4 4 Boot Console Handler BCH Command Reference continued Command IO cell Description Display I O interface information MEmory cell Display memory information PRocessor cell Display processor information Service Menu Commands Boot Console Handler BCH Commands related to nPartition system service tasks MAin Return to the BCH Main Menu BAttery cell Display cell battery status CLEARPIM cell Clear the non volatile processor internal memory NVM PIM data for the nPartition DimmDealloc cell dimm ON OFF Display deallocate or re allocate the DIMM identified by dimm in cell number specified by cell ErrorLog cell MEMORY IO FABRIC CELL Display error log information LanAddress Display Core I O LAN station address MemRead address len Read memory locations scope of nPartition PDT cell CLEAR Display or clear the memory page deallocation table PDT PIM cell proc HPMC LPMC TOC Display the processor internal memory PIM data for the nPartition SCSI path INIT RATE TERM WIDTH
465. you want to boot over a network Login to the service processor MP or GSP and enter CO to access the Console list Select the nPartition console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If at another EFI menu select the Exit option from the sub menus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading From the EFI Boot Manager menu select the EFI Shell menu option to access the EFI Shell environment 2 Atthe EFI Shell issue the Lanboot select command to boot from the selected networking card For details see the help lanboot command Shells lanboot select O01 Acpi 000222F0 0 Pci 1 0 Mac 00306E0E5268 02 Acpi 000222F0 800 Pci 1 0 Mac 00108327549F Select Desired LAN 1 Selected Acpi 000222F0 0 Pci 1 0 Mac 00306E0E5268 Running LoadFile CLIENT MAC ADDR 00 30 6e Oe 52 68 148 Booting and Resetting nPartitions 3 Exit the console and service processor interfaces if finished using them To exit the EFI environment type B Control B this exits the nPartition console and returns to the service processor Main Menu To exit the service processor type X at the Main Menu Booting to the HP UX Initial System Loader ISL A On HP 9000 servers you can boot to the HP UX Initial System Loader ISL by using the following procedure NOTE The Initial System Loader ISL interface is available only from HP UX boot devices on HP 9000 s
466. ystems f s0 fs1 and so on that are known and have been mapped To choose a file system to use enter its mapped name followed by a colon For example to operate with the boot device that is mapped as fs3 enter s3 at the EFI Shell prompt 3 Enter ELILO at the EFI Shell command prompt to launch the ELILO EFT loader If needed you can specify the loader s full path by entering e i SuSE elilo at the EFI Shell command prompt 4 Allow the ELILO EFI loader to proceed with booting the SuSE Linux kernel By default the ELILO EFI loader boots the kernel image and options specified by the default item in the elilo conf file To interact with the ELILO EFI loader interrupt the boot process for example type a space at the ELILO boot prompt To exit the loader use the exit command Shutting Down Linux Use the shut down command to shut down Red Hat Enterprise Linux or SuSE Linux Enterprise Server The Red Hat Enterprise Linux and SuSE Linux Enterprise Server shut down command includes the following options h Halt after shutdown On cell based HP Integrity servers this will either power down server hardware or put the nPartition into a shutdown for reconfig state Use the PE command at the management processor Command menu to manually power on or power off server hardware as needed r Reboot after shutdown a Cancel an already running shutdown time When to shut down Required You can specify the time optio

HP rp7410 Administrator's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents